Home

DREAM Station Installation and User Manual

1. MUI lo 2 000000011 06 9o 00000009 009090020909 Oo 000 000 0 Oo 9909990899002889585992299599999995 900059059000 00286096050 o 0000000 o 020 9 0092092000 9009509 06 206 2005 020000008 5909905909 0620 000000000 50900200200700 909920000 000090020902090 90099000989000000500509 05000 2 600990959 O 00000000 o9 o 000000000 00oooooooo 0000000000 000 00000000 000 Figure 1 QDC Engine front view Step 1 Remove the front facia which is fixed with five pop out retaining studs by gripping the edges and pulling firmly Step 2 To mount the Engine into the rack insert four rack screws on to both the left and right rack mounts Once this is done re attach the front facia MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 38 3 0 q 209900000000 150500909200000 4090909200 Retaining Rack Screws Pop out Retaining Studs Front Facia Figure 2 QDC Engine and Rack Mounting Details ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ENGINE INSTALLATION The Engine is designed to run from a single phase power source with one of its cur rent carrying conductors at or near ground earth ground potential the neutral con ductor Only the line l
2. 8 11 19 2 Time Matk sitos as 27 2 Time Compression Expansion 20 2 Time Scale L8 acie oto ds 4 6 Timecode ATE ace i E LARA 30 2 Torte os ae ug 4 10 Touche rast 25 6 25 7 Touch Auto Enable 25 16 Touch Indicator 7 6 13 5 Touch Welten 25 9 TRACK Gor ost RS 16 3 Track asc en 22 2 Track Display 2593 odere fe 4 2 Track Feed 255 AAA 5 3 Track Selection 4 4 Trackballs rs ed 8 8 Transport Controls 4 7 A A eee e RESO 10 13 Soft Key Function 10 14 Trim Indicator 7 6 13 6 Trim Level Ss dese din eco a RES 17 3 Trimming Relative Speaker Levels 6 4 Two handed edit 10 2 10 6 10 8 10 13 C matic nfold npatch inpu E mc CC EC EE tils V Vari VERSION Version Number VGA Cable Video VISIBILITY Vmotion Voice W Wave Export Wave Files X X Level X Point Z Zoom Zoom Factors ndo and Redo nfolding Buses npatching Inputs pdate Sys Files ia eas pgrading System Software lS D LAO Lace y Us Index vii 10 15 35 14 10 4 11 5 11 7 11 8 5 0 5 0 6 8 35 16 35 23 6 8 25 10 25 17 35 16 20 2 35 5 35 24 38 6 9 3 30 4 35 3 35 5 35 14 20 3 29 0 29 4 26 7 9 3 30 4 35 5 4 7 7 6 13 6 10 19 10 19 4 6 4 6 INDEX Index viii INDEX
3. Description Sony RS422 Machine control interface Connector 9 pin D Male PIN 1 GND PIN 2 AES IN NEGATIVE PIN 3 AES OUT POSITIVE PIN 4 BIPHASE TACH PIN 5 BIP DIRECTION PIN 6 AES IN POSITIVE PIN 7 GND PIN 8 AES OUT NEGATIVE PIN 9 NOT CONNECTE 40 26 Modem Description RS232 serial interface for connection to serial printer or modem Connector 9 pin D Male PIN 1 MOD_DCD PIN 2 MOD_RX PIN MOD_TX 3 PIN 4 MOD_DTR PIN GND 5 PIN 6 MOD_DSR 7 PIN MOD_RTS PIN 8 MOS CTS PIN 9 N VGA1 Description SVGA Monitor output for command shell and disk recorder Connector 15 pin High Density D Female Resolution 1024 H x 768 V Frequency HSYNC 60khz VSYNC 75hz SVGA STANDARD PIN 1 RED PIN 2 GREEN PIN 3 BLUE PIN 4 GND PIN 5 GND PIN 6 GND PIN 7 GND PIN 8 GND PIN 10 GND PIN 11 GND PIN 12 NC PIN 13 HSYNC PIN 14 VSYNC PIN 15 NC Word Clock In Description Sample word clock synchronisation input Connector BNC Input Optically Isolated Input Impedance 75 Ohms QDC WIRING AND CONNECTION DETAILS 40 27 Word Clock Out Description Sample word clock synchronisation output Connector BNC Output Level 4 3V TTL Output Impendence 75 Ohms Video Sync In SPECIFICATIONS Description Video synchronisation input Connector
4. PIN 5 USB 1 SHELL SHIELD 1 Sidecar USB Description USB connection for Sidecars Note that Sidecars do not require DC power Cable must be shielded and less than 3 meters in length Connector 5 Pin XLR Female XLR5 SIGNAL PAIR PIN 1 USB 1 PIN 2 0 VDC PIN 3 NC PIN 4 0 VDC PIN 5 USB 1 SHELL SHIELD 1 Controller Engine Description Serial interface to QDC Use shielded cable only Connector D 9 Male 9 Pin D Type Signal Pair Connector PIN 5 232 GND 1 PIN 2 232 CON Tx 1 PIN 3 232 CON Rx 2 PIN 8 422 CON Tx POS 3 PIN 7 422 CON Rx POS 4 SPECIFICATIONS 40 14 PIN 1 422 CON Tx NEG 3 PIN 6 422 CON Rx NEG 4 SHELL GND Drain Talkback Description Mic level input and line level output for studio talkback microphone Mic input may be configured to carry 8VDC phantom power for electret and con denser microphones Connector D 9 Female 9 Pin D Type Signal Pair Connector PIN 1 TB Out 1 PIN 2 TB Out GND Shield 1 PIN 3 TB In GND Shield 2 PIN 4 NC PIN 5 TB In 2 PIN 6 TB Out 1 PIN 7 NC PIN 8 NC PIN 9 TB In 2 USB Description Standard USB port Cable must be shielded and less than 3 meters in length Connector USB Type A Female USB Type A Signal Connector PIN 1 5VDC PIN 2 USBDO PIN 3 USB
5. PIN 1 Rx PIN 2 Rx PIN 3 Tx PIN 6 Tx Cross over Cable Required for direct connection between console and engine Not required if hub is present RJ45 1 Signal RJ45 2 PIN 1 Rx PIN 3 PIN 2 Rx PIN 6 PIN 3 Tx PIN 1 PIN 6 Tx PIN 2 Description Standard PC parallel printer interface Connector 25 pin D female PIN 1 PSTROBEn PIN 14 PRAUTOFDn PIN 2 PDRO PIN 15 PRFAULTn PIN 3 PDRI PIN 16 PRINTIIn PIN 4 PDR2 PIN 17 PRSELINn PIN 5 PDR3 PIN18 GND PIN 6 PDR4 PIN 19 GND PIN 7 PDR5 PIN20 GND PIN 8 PDR6 PIN21 GND PIN 9 PDR7 PIN22 GND PIN 10 PRACKn PIN23 GND PIN 11 PRBUSYn PIN 24 GND PIN 12 PRERROR PIN25 GN PIN 13 PRSELECT QDC WIRING AND CONNECTION DETAILS 40 23 9 Pin A Description Sony RS422 Machine control master interface Connector 9 pin D Female PIN 1 GND PIN 2 9ARxA PIN 9ATxB 3 PIN 4 GND PIN NC 5 PIN 6 GND PIN 7 9ARxB PIN 8 9ATxA PIN 9 NC 9 Pin B Description Sony RS422 Machine control master interface Connector 9 pin D Female PIN 1 GND PIN 2 9BRxA PIN 9BTxB 3 PIN 4 GND PIN NC 5 PIN 6 GND 7 PIN 9BRxB PIN 8 9BTxA PIN 9 N 9 Pin Slave Description Sony RS422 Machine control slave interface Connector 9 pin
6. Takes Key Track Key Figure 1 Takes and Track Keys TRACK MENU Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Track key Step 2 Define a Range not applicable to the NUMBERS function Step 3 Select the source track Step 4 Select the desired function Step 5 Select the destination track Swap After SWAP has been selected the defined Range will be swapped on the source and destination tracks Numbers The NUMBERS function swaps the entire track including the track name It does not use a Range and is not reversible using the UNDO key Move MOVE removes the clips in the Range on the source track and places them on the destination track Any clips on the destination track will be buried INTRODUCTION 22 3 Copy COPY places a copy of the clips in the Range onto the destination track Any clips on the destination track will be buried The source track is not changed Shadow The audio on the destination track is erased where there are clips on the source track This is useful for splitting audio to different tracks for example telephone and perspective splits The source track is not changed TAKES MENU When new clips are recorded or copied above existing clips in a track only the top clip can be heard The Takes Menu allows you to select a clip from several clips that have been layered and bring it to the top Clips that lie beneath the cursor are listed in the upper display Clip Layers Under Cursor kk EDIT MENU
7. The zoom factor can also be entered by holding down the Zoom key and typing the desired zoom factor on the numeric keypad This is useful for making macros For information on Macros refer to Macros on page 33 2 There are 16 scales with larger numbers indicating more detail less time Zoom can be increased or decreased by holding the Zoom key and pressing or on the numeric keypad Alternate Zoom Factors It is possible to set two different Zoom factors to allow for alternate views of the track display Step 1 Select a Zoom factor by holding down the Zoom key Step 2 Select a different Zoom factor by again holding down the Zoom key and turning the jogger wheel Step 3 Press the Zoom key the previous Zoom will be shown on the Track display Press the Zoom key again and the alternate Zoom factor will be displayed It is also possible to move the horizontal position of the cursor by holding down the BLUE and Zoom keys and turning the jogger wheel TIME SCALE AND DISPLAY ZOOMING 4 7 TRANSPORT CONTROLS The PLAY STOP FF and REW controls work in a similar manner to a tape ma chine An additional feature is increasing the fast forward and rewind speeds by pressing the respective keys multiple times starting from 16 times play speed To enter record press the REC and PLAY keys together SHUT REW FF PLAY REC Play JOG SS gt gt Menu Figure 8 Transport Control Keys The play command can be accessed a
8. 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 13 2 FADER STRIPS 4 202032 aa oe 13 2 Signal Path Indicator 13 3 LCD Legend Window 13 3 A E Aa EN 13 3 edo TRUE 13 3 OO ues daas t airo AI ues eee 13 3 Mile Gres E Ging FU eR NER pP EY qu 13 4 callido eund eite a oo xo db ed 13 5 SOT sMlleh 2er Eder oto e dt Ae 13 5 AUTOR ott o ue oe Dee e Rus 13 5 Automation Status Indicators 13 5 Signal Path IndicatorS 13 6 MACROS a ana er ee are 13 6 SURROUND CONTROL SECTION 13 6 FADER SETS uei re tet ete 13 7 Loading a Fader Set 9 sepes 13 7 Mapping a Fader Set o 13 7 Mapping Bus FaderS o o oo 13 8 Mapping Link Groups 13 8 Holding Faders aes boas eR TR 13 9 METER BRIDGE 2222222 13 9 DUALSIDECARS 2 2 2 222 222 13 9 Fader Sete Loss ia daros ed 13 9 Two Master Sidecars 22 2222200 13 9 Chapter 14 Meters INTRODUCTION 2 2 22 222 222 14 2 Station Main Meters o o ooo 14 2 Station Sidecar Channel Meters 14 2 KEAK RESET o 4 vibe oo URDU eA DS 14 2 PEAK HOLD 2 32 32 ias 14 2 Chapter 15 Talkback INTRODUCTION 2 2 2 2 2 2 15 2 USING TALKBACK 2 2 2 2 22 22 2222 15 2 SETTING UP THE TALKBACK PATH 15 2 Selecting a Talkback Destination 15 2 Select a Talkback Source 15 2 A c eia 15 3 ore EP 15 3 Chapter 16 Name INTRODUCTION ccc rm
9. Analog Input 4 13 29 46 Analog Input 5 12 28 1 45 Analog Input 6 11 27 44 Analog Input 7 10 26 43 Analog Input 8 9 25 42 Analog Output 1 8 24 41 Analog Output 2 7 23 40 Analog Output 3 6 22 39 Analog Output 4 5 21 38 Analog Output 5 4 20 37 Analog Output 6 3 19 36 Analog Output 7 2 18 35 Analog Output 8 40 6 AUDIO I O CONFIGURATION 40 7 DIO DIO GND Channel 17 33 50 Digital Input 1 2 16 32 49 Digital Input 3 4 15 31 48 Digital Input 5 6 14 30 47 Digital Input 7 8 13 29 46 Digital Output 1 2 12 28 45 Digital Output 3 4 11 27 44 Digital Output 5 6 10 26 43 Digital Output 7 8 9 25 42 Digital Input 9 10 8 24 41 Digital Input 11 12 y 23 40 Digital Input 13 14 6 22 39 Digital Input 15 16 5 21 38 Digital Output 9 10 4 20 37 Digital Output 11 12 3 19 36 Digital Output 13 14 2 18 35 Digital Output 15 16 DIO AO GND Channel 17 33 50 Digital Input 1 2 16 32 49 Digital Input 3 4 15 31 48 Digital Input 5 6 14 30 47 Digital Input 7 8 13 29 46 Digital Output 1 2 12 28 45 Digital Output 3 4 11 27 44 Digital Output 5 6 10 26 43 Digital Output 7 8 9 25 42 Analog Output 1 8 24 141 Analog Output 2 7 23 40 Analog Output 3 6 22 39 Analog Output 4 5 21 38 A
10. Live Feeds are used for effects returns microphones signals or oth er real time inputs for mixing Track Feed When a disk recorder track is armed an input can be recorded on to the track and monitored through it During mix down the disk recorder track is played back and mixed to a bus through the Track Feed Feeds are all inherently mono although they can be linked into multiformat Link Groups as described in Link Groups on page 11 2 Physical inputs can also be patched to Insert Returns Patch Interrogation While input patching operations are in progress the track selection keys are used to represent the physical inputs as described in the procedures below The following convention for feed selection key and bus key illumination provides information on the current status of the patching Inputs available for patching to the selected feeds Dimly Lit Inputs currently patched to the selected feeds Brightly Lit Inputs currently patched to other feeds Flashing Off to Dim Inputs not installed Unlit Buses not currently patched to any feeds Dimly Lit e Buses patched to the currently selected feeds Brightly Lit e Buses patched to feeds other than those currently selected Flashing Off to Dim Analog And Digital Inputs Physical inputs are numbered 1 to 48 Analog and 1 to 48 Digital of which the latter can be further extended to includel to 48 AES EBU and 1 to 64 MADI They are all represented by the first 48 Tr
11. Patching is completed by pressing an edit mode key or other menu key or by pressing Patch I O to return to the previous state It is also possible to patch a group of inputs to a group of Feeds Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 First enter the Patch I O Menu by pressing the Patch I O key Select the feeds to be patched to by using the Track Feed keys on the selection panel or you can use the Track keys already selected Press the Patch soft key PATCHING INPUTS TO TRACK FEEDS 9 5 Step 4 Step 5 Select the input type soft keys ANALOG DIGITAL and AES MADI Select any number of physical inputs by holding one down selecting others then releasing the original The physical inputs are patched to the feeds successively until the feeds are all used If the physical inputs are all used before the feeds are then patching starts again from the first physical input For example selecting only one input will cause it to be patched to all selected Feeds Selecting two inputs will cause them to be alternately patched to the selected feeds Input Gain and Phase Analog and Digital inputs can have digital gain or attenuation and phase reversal applied at the input Inputs are selected by first selecting the feeds that they are patched to To set input gain Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 First enter the Patch I O Menu by pressing the Patch I O key Select the feed or feeds whose inputs you wish to adjust Press the Gain soft
12. Speaker mute keys for bus or link group elements already patched flash off to dim green Speaker mute keys for bus or link group elements not currently patched are illuminated dim green Each insert send may be patched to a single output or multiple outputs Press the SINGLE MULTI soft key to select single or multi mode Step 6 OR 5 12 In SINGLE mode Press a track key to select the output for the cur rent feed insert send If the selected path is a bus or link group in SINGLE mode the current bus or link group element is advanced automatically when an output is selected Press a track key to select the output for the current bus or link group element insert send The bus or link group elements advance in the following order Left Left Centre Centre Right Centre Right Left Surround Centre Surround Right Surround Boom Elements that are not in the current bus or group format are not displayed To skip the current bus or link group element press the Next soft key To remove patching for the current bus or link group element and leave it with no output press the Blank soft key In MULTI mode outputs for the selected feed bus or link group element may be togeled ON or OFF by pressing the correspond ing Track keys If the key is flashing pressing the key will remove it from its current source and patch it to the current element Press a track key to add it to the outputs for the insert send To advance to the nex
13. BNC Input Level 1V p p Input Impedance 75 Ohms Terminated SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 40 28 Analogue Inputs and Outputs Input impedance Output impedance Maximum input level Maximum output level Standard operating level Input signal to noise Output signal to noise Through system signal to noise Through system THD Bandwidth 25dB AES EBU Inputs Minimum differential Input impedance Channel status AES EBU Outputs Output level Output impedance Channel status Synchronisation System sample rates Run Up Run down sample rates SRC range with optional SRC I O module gt 10k Ohms lt 55 Ohms 24dBu 24dBu adjustable from 14dBu to 24 dBu gt 113dB A weighted A D conversion gt 113dB A weighted A D conversion gt 110dB A weighted lt 0 0008 20Hz to 20kHz 200mV 110 Ohms transformer isolated insensitive to channel status 4V 110 Ohms transformer isolated professional normal audio source locked sample frequency locked to project sample rate stereophonic 24 bit word length 32 44 056 44 1 48 96kHz 44 044 44 056 47 952 48 048 95 904 96 096kHz Input 0 33 to 3 0 x system sample rate with range limits of 8kHz to 108kHz SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 40 29 SPECIFICATIONS Clock references Output current system sample rate converted to any other possible system sample rate internal AES reference WCLK any digital input video reference LTC input Clo
14. Keys Figure 3 Project Navigation Keys Opening and Closing a Domain or Device Step 1 Use the Files Folders and arrow keys to select the desired domain or device so that it is highlighted Step 2 Press the Folder or Folder icon key on the console depending whether you want to open or close the domain device or folder Creating a New Project Step 1 Press the Proj Project key This is already selected when the machine is powered up Close any previously opened Project by pressing the CLOSE soft key on the console Step 2 Select the domain device and folder where you would like the new Project to be created Step 3 Press the NEW soft key on the console LCD menu Step 4 Type the name you wish to give the new Project using the PC keyboard The name appears in the console s LCD display as you type See the notes below for details on filenaming con ventions Step 5 Press the Enter key The top section of the video screen display shows information about the currently open Project Project Name of current Project NAVIGATING THE PROJECT MENU 3 5 Frame Rate The frame rate currently set for the Project Sample Rate The sample rate currently set for the Project Date and Current date and time Time Make sure you set up the project sample rate in the Digi menu before recording any material See Project Sample Rate on page 9 2 for more details Closing a Project Step 1 Press the Proj key on the console
15. Level Mode 17 3 Mode Level ota Sasse ns 17 3 Momentary Talkback 35 14 MOMENTARY TB TIME THRESHOLD 50 0 35 15 Monitor Format 6 5 Monitor Level 6 6 Monitor Phase Reversal 6 7 Monitor Ports 35 11 Monitor Source Patching 6 4 Monitor Source Selection 6 4 9 9 Monitor Speakers 6 2 Monitor Sources XT 6 8 35 16 Mono Clips oret es oe 4 4 Move Ue a RU Ere e 22 2 34 2 MTE Sposa nemus x 31 2 Multi ets e ay 8 14 11 7 Multitrack Editing 10 5 MU a A e Ve N 7 5 13 4 21 3 Monitoring x ex ege VS KS 6 7 Speaker Mutes 2 4 a0 fees 6 7 N Names oros 33 3 Name Mark a4 da 27 2 Naming BUSCS ii 03 disco ann 16 3 Chen AP 16 2 AS O LE 16 3 Track at ose dad 16 2 Index v Naming External Monitor Sources 6 5 Naming Feeds and Buses 7 7 Naming Speaker Sets 6 2 NET MASK nuncio usa Elsa 35 3 Network Configuration 39 10 NeW c p RE pa Re 9 7 NOT adas 8 3 Nidia e an 10 16 Number Mark cia 27 2 Numbers Sane bad Peut Ae 22 2 O Ost a ll cua 31 2 On STOP Lists sde 25 16 One handed edit 10 6 10 8 10 13 10 15 Opus eu PP ia 40 12 OS teren Abe 35 2 OS9 Commands enana 35 17 A A 25 7 Over ea bete eR n eos 9 7 Overlap n iot Des LI E 10 9 P PTS wa ee bares 26 5 Pan Controls salar e bn os 8 7 Par ON OFF S dain pri estie 8 8 Parametric visse s 8 4 Pas
16. Loop Chapter 5 Patching and Routing Chapter 25 Automation Chapter 6 Monitoring Chapter 26 Project Management Chapter 7 Master Fader Chapter 27 Marks Chapter 8 Parameter Pad Chapter 28 AudioBase Chapter 9 Recording Chapter 29 Import Export Chapter 10 Binnacle Editing Chapter 30 Timecode Setup Chapter 11 Grouping Chapter 31 Machine Control Chapter 12 Library Chapter 32 Printing Chapter 13 Sidecar Operation Chapter 33 Macros Chapter 14 Meters Chapter 34 Backup and Restore Chapter 15 Talkback Chapter 35 System Files Chapter 16 Name Chapter 36 Drive Formatting Chapter 17 Clip Level Chapter 37 Installation Chapter 18 Clip Equalisation Chapter 38 Engine Installation Chapter 19 Gate Menu Chapter 39 Console Installation Chapter 20 Time Compression amp Chapter 40 Specifications Expansion Operational Instructions Chapters 2 to 36 describe the procedures used to manage workflow and perform re cording editing signal processing playback and mixing operations INTRODUCTION 1 3 Installation Instructions INTRODUCTION Chapter 37 provides an introduction to the installation process System installers should start here for guidance on performing a successful system installation Console Installation Chapter 39 details the installation procedures and requirements for the Station Console QDC Engine Installation Chapter 38 details the installation procedures and requirements for the QDC en gine Specifications Chapter 42 includ
17. M ixing Section The portion of the Station control surface that provides mixing control Editing Section The portion of the Station control surface that provides ed iting control Project The file created by Fairlight software containing the stored audio and its editing and mixing instructions Physical Input An analog or digital audio input or output Output Track Feed A signal path channel feeding to or from the disk recorder which can be processed and routed to mix buses and mon itoring Live Feed A signal path channel fed from a live real time signal that has been brought from a physical input and can be proc essed and routed to mix buses and monitoring Bus Destination ofa mixing operation Feeds are usually routed to buses via a multiformat surround panner Buses may be configured with various multichannel formats such as ster eo LCRS 5 1 or 7 1 INTRODUCTION 2 3 Bus Element One component signal of a bus e g left right centre or surround Bus elements are automatically allocated to in dividual buses as they are created Each system has a finite number of bus elements which will limit the format of bus es as they are created For example Station 48 has 16 avail able bus elements allowing 1 X 5 1 main bus 4 x mono sub buses 2 X stereo auxes and 2 X mono auxes or 1 X stereo main bus 4 X stereo sub buses 2 X stereo aux buses and 2 X mono aux buses ARCHITECTURE Faders 1 1 12
18. SNAP or LATCH Auto Ena any enabled parameters that are touched are automatically put ble into Write or Trim It is not necessary to first enable the feed or bus OFF When a Touch mode is engaged SNAP or LATCH only feeds or buses that have been enabled in the mix menu will be put into Write or Trim when their enabled parameters are touched Fill Used in conjunction with Preview Causes the current values Range of previewed parameters to be written through the range MIX UNDO 25 17 THE BLUE UTILS MENU Glide In Glide Out Update Sys File MULTI TRIM Multi Trim can be used to adjust a group of parameters while recording automa tion Multi Trim groups are temporary groups of feeds which are controlled from a single virtual master Individual members of the temporary Multi Trim group must be enabled for automation while the Mix menu is active prior to entering Multi Trim mode or from the AUTO keys next to each member fader No automation is recorded for the virtual Multi Trim master itself AUTOMATION When a parameter transitions from one READ value to a new RECORD value discontinuously as when dropping in from PREVIEW to RECORD or when merging one mix into an other this value is used to define a ramp from the previous data to the new data Press the Glide In soft key and use the jog wheel numeric keys or keys and press Enter to change the Glide In value When a parameter transitions from one RECORD valu
19. Shelf High amp Low Notch High Pass Low Pass e Compressor plus Limiter Expander Gate Insert e Direct Out Track Metering Aux Sends 4 x Mono or Stereo and Mute e Panning up to 7 1 surround Link Groups H Hoireer MOVEABLE PROCESSING BLOCKS MUTE FADER By our 1 pa PATCH moen e DER tee EQ gt e DYN INS METER MUTE Heroes e Ase E L 7 SHORT FADER PATH e Up to 8 members with linked parameter controls and support for advanced sur round panning features ARCHITECTURE 2 5 Main Bus MOVEABLE PROCESSING BLOCKS DRECT o ey e eI NET 1 2 VP OP PATCH PATCH of e ow INS eL METER sc A AAA Bus Element Signal Flow IOVEABI PROCESSING BLOCKS DIRECT E Ame ES OUT w h OP up PATCHES ZEN PATCH WT FADER won NS Pu More METER LZ l ey Ee Four Element Bus Signal Flow 1x Main Bus Formats Mono Stereo LCR LCRS LCRSS 5 1 6 1 7 1 Compressor plus Limiter Expander Gate e Insert Master Fader and Mute Sub Buses 4x Sub Buses e Formats Mono Stereo LCR LCRS LCRSS 5 1 6 1 7 1 Compressor plus Limiter Expander Gate Insert Direct Out Master Fader and Mute Aux Buses 4x Aux Buses Formats
20. Step 3 Press any soft switch in the Parameter Pad to select that function for the Sidecar soft keys Press the AUTO key to set the signal path into automation record See Automation on page 25 2 for more details on automation procedures Automation Status Indicators SIDECAR OPERATION These indicators show the automation status of the signal path using illuminated text See Automation on page 25 2 for more details TOUCH The fader is touched and will start to write automation data when in touch write mode LATCH Touch is active and in Latch mode Once a control is touched it will continue to write data after it is released SAFE The selected signal path is in safe mode and will not update automation data READ The selected signal path is in read mode and playing back au tomation data 13 6 WRITE The selected signal path is armed to write automation data the console is in write mode and recording automation The WRITE indicator flashes while in preview mode TRIM The selected signal path is set to trim automation data the console is in trim mode and recording automation The TRIM indicator flashes while in trim mode but not re cording Signal Path Indicators MACROS These indicators show the source status of the signal path using illuminated text INPUT The fader controls the input level to a disk recorder track FEED The fader controls a track or live feed level BUS The fader controls a bus level EQ T
21. Surface HSERVER SERVER PORT CLIENT PORT DEBUG 35 4 LOI T I 2721 2801 0 The following entries may need to be changed to enable the engine to run with your existing Fairlight Medialink network configuration Web HOSTNAME IP ADDRESS DOMAINNAME DNSSERVER DNSDOMAIN GATEWAY SCANHOSTS Enter a unique network identification name for the QDC engine To avoid conflict with engine software modules use names which include an underscore character for example Studio 1 Hostnames are limited to 10 characters Enter a unique address for the QDC engine This address must be within the subnet range of the console This means that with the engine or console netmask set to 255 255 0 0 and the console address set to 192 168 0 111 the engine IP address must start with 192 168 for example 192 168 0 11 Medialink de vices must be in the same class C subnet therefore the first three numbers in the IP address of QDC engines and Me dialink servers must be the same Fairlight recommends the following IP allocation strategy w X y 1 10 for servers w x y 11 110 for engines w x y 111 254 for consoles Enter the domain name for your local network do main The DOMAINNAME entry classifies what group you appear in The name can have no spaces For example DO MAINNAME MUSIC or DOMAINNAME ADR QDC engines can connect directly to the Internet for the purposes of FTP connections etc Enter the IP address of a dom
22. There are ten Fader Groups Fader Group Features l Selecting a fader group selects all the members of the fader group and calls the group master to the Master Fader and Parameter Pad Fader Groups can include any feed but not buses The group master fader defaults to OdB When the fader is adjusted the level of the faders of the members are offset by the amount the Master Fader is moved in dBs To get access to the individual fader settings of the members the members can be called to the Master Fader in the usual way by pressing the CALL key and using the feed selection keys The individual members can still be adjusted directly from their Sidecar faders and from the Parameter Pad to set their rela tive parameters within the fader group The group master pan control defaults to a centre position When the master pan control is adjusted the members are offset by the amount the master is moved he MUTE and SOLO keys on the Master Fader section indicated the mute and solo status of all the members The MUTE or SOLO keys are illuminated if all members are currently muted or soloed The MUTE or SOLO keys will flash if all members are not in the same state Press the MUTE or SOLO key to mute or solo all members of the fader group If the keys are flashing a single press will unmute or unsolo double pressing either key will mute or solo all members The AUTO key on the Master Fader enables automation recording for the gr
23. UPGRADING SYSTEM SOFTWARE A CAUTION System upgrades are normally performed by your Fairlight distributor This in formation is provided for system administrators and advanced users only Please refer all queries to your Fairlight distributor QDC Software Upgrade Software upgrades are made available on the internet from the Fairlight web site www fairlightesp com au Follow the links on the support pages to locate the latest release The QDC software release is distributed as gz archive file e g 16 5 2 14 22 Each release is accompanied by detailed release notes in PDF format Carefully read the release notes for any release specific or upgrade issues prior to starting the upgrade The release file may be transferred to the dd RELEASE directory on the QDC en gine by making an FTP connection to the QDC engine from a locally TCP IP net worked computer When making an FTP connection to the QDC engine login as m x No password is required some FTP applications may make it necessary to enter a single space as a password The QDC engine s IP address is specified in the setup file see QDC Network Setup on page 35 3 and is displayed in the diagnos tic screen during start up Type upgrade at the hash prompt and follow the on screen instructions to select the release file and target device Proceed by following the on screen instructions and restarting the system as required Software Version To display the
24. if any This range is bounded by the head and tail of the top clip under the cursor If there is no clip on the selected track the Range will be set to zero width and an error will result if you try and execute a cut or copy command Range Clip Head Tail Erases all layers from the beginning of the Range to the end of the Range Erases all layers from the beginning of the Range to the cur rent cursor position Erases all layers from the current cursor position to the end of the Range Erase with Razor On Edits performed with Razor On insert or remove time from the selected tracks em ulating a tape edit performed with a razor blade Range Clip Head Tail Erases all layers from the beginning of the Range to the end of the Range together with the associated track time Erases all layers from the beginning of the Range to the cur rent cursor position together with the associated track time Erases all layers from the current cursor position to the end of the Range together with the associated track time ERASE EDIT MODE 10 13 TRIM EDIT MODE Trimming allows clips to be resized Trim commands are used to set the head and tail of clips to determine how much of the original recording is played by the clip Trimming may shorten a clip or extend a clip if the original recording is longer than the displayed clip This will be the case if the clip was imported with handles or if the original clip has bee
25. see Solo and Mute on page 21 2 MONITORING SOLO 7 1 NOTES Chapter 7 Master Fader INTRODUCTION Station has one touch sensitive motorised Master Fader which can be used to con trol the level of an individual feed a bus or a group of feeds The fader section in cludes MUTE and SOLO buttons for eliminating and isolating a feed from the mix In addition the fader section includes a Master key to call the Main bus to the fader for level control a Fold key for gaining access to the individual elements of a bus or link group and the AUTO key for arming automation record Mute Solo Safe IK Key Call Key Faders Key Figure 1 Master Fader Call Solo and Mute Keys OPERATION Calling a Signal Path to the Master Fader To assign the Master Fader to control a particular signal path the signal path is called to the fader Press the CALL key then press a feed selection key to call an in dividual feed or a pre defined group of feeds or press the Main bus key or a Sub or Aux bus key Calling any member of a Link Group will call the entire group to the Master Fader Group operation is described in detail in Grouping on page 11 2 Step 1 Press the Call key Step 2 Press a feed selection key or the Main bus or Sub or Aux bus selection keys The fader now controls the level of the selected sig nal path and the path is displayed at the bottom of the mixer dis play INTRODUCTION 7 3 Fader Fo
26. 2 Record GPI lt a 24 5 Recording ande 4s bay ated sd 9 6 Recovering Waveforms 26 6 ReIO ints une ely en tates ue 10 4 Reference Level 6 7 Refresh da ome aed ET 26 3 Rehearse aw aieo rris p 24 2 Relative Speaker Levels 6 4 Release a e lecce icd ed 8 11 Removable Media 38 12 Renaming a Project 16 2 Renum Mark 222 1 zv lA 27 3 Restore vetas bee ala 34 2 Return se 2 2 ae an 25 16 Return to Birthday ii oops 26 7 Ret rns tati ee 5 7 Reverse dt nave eee 10 7 Rotate Control 8 9 Running a Macro 33 3 S A fL rr ep Sd d 21 3 25 10 Safe Indicator 7 6 13 5 Sample Rate ui dies 9 2 30 4 Saving Monitor Setups 6 8 O A argen s 20 3 20 5 SCANHOSTS cbe lexus 35 3 SE SI Anne 36 2 SGSI Devices zo ita 38 8 INDEX Seed Names sese Select a Link Group Member Select a range of tracks Select a single track uo aus a Selecting a Monitor Source Selecting Monitor Speakers Semitones ooooooo ooo Send A do eadcm ibas SERVER PORT SOG Re ovevel RR fiue T ete ts Set level tonos S ay MEU ru tci raro Urt E i edens Setup Variables TXT 2 22 SAO Lusto eed ne a D A p acier DECUS Sci es MIL ELE Shutdown 42 4 ges oe eens Sita orcos sarah A Sidecar s os hid in a Siena BED esos e tide di Signal Path sra na 2210444 Signal Path Indicator Signal Path Indic
27. 3 Dolby Process Monitoring 6 6 DOMAINNAME 35 3 DREAM Start coke So er 39 8 DREAM BAT odres 39 8 DREAM bat lt 2 24 4 h22dhedee nes 35 15 39 8 Drive Formatting neos end 36 2 DYN presets aan 12 3 Dynamic Range Control 8 10 Dynamics u Na Eas L4 8 10 Dynamics Library Presets 12 2 E Index iii A rats Howe tans 24 3 PO e ce S COPIER NER 35 2 Edit Macro elas nl 33 2 Edit Modes vis ca ter vien 10 6 Edit Options ias 10 3 Edit Targets si 22 4a a6 cacas 10 4 Ed au sa ferner debt 10 2 Eject a ID ge 34 2 Electrical Installation 38 3 Enabled ratas ee 25 3 Ea ara SR 8 4 13 6 EQ Fli hp ee 8 5 EQ Presets a eoe SEU 12 3 Eq aliser fat a goce ne 8 3 Equaliser Library Presets 12 2 Erase 2 6 ecb dead VELO eR 10 11 Erasing a Macro a ta zn 33 4 Ethernet ee ee 38 5 39 3 Event 26s sara tores v E evo ys d 25 16 Expander un zero nen Be 8 12 Range ante 8 12 Ratio ou a see 8 12 Threshold ua si 8 12 Export er xu orlsGc ODE 29 8 a AR 26 3 External SCSI Devices 38 8 F Factor o ooooooooooo ooo 4 7 FadeDefault 35 6 Baden ora id ans ue 7 10 13 3 Fader Pollo Wa rs 7 3 Fader Follows Selection 7 3 Bader Groups sales 11 6 Fader Sets a ikv ee 13 7 Fader Strips os Date 13 2 Paders Oia wine o ada 7 9 Dades aasa a a 10 18 BEER te eden cert Ai 13 6 Feed Forward Back 8 11 Fieldsa s uuu ese e DE e E ir 28 3 Filenames u owe
28. Assign on page 5 16 Press the Boom ON OFF soft key in the Parameter Pad to turn the signal to the boom element on or off This control will effect every member of a link group ifa link group is selected Boom Level The Boom Level control adjusts the amount of signal sent to the boom element of the bus to which a feed or link group is assigned The boom level control range is OFF to 10dB This level control may be pre or post the feed fader Boom Pre Post The BOOM Pre Post soft key determines whether the boom signal is derived be fore or after the feed fader This allows the boom level to be controlled by a combi nation of the feed fader level and the Boom Level control or in pre fader mode just the Boom Level control DYNAMICS The Dynamics comprises two sections the first of which is a compressor the second of which can be switched between the functions of a limiter an expander or a gate Press the Dyn key at the bottom of the Parameter Pad to select the dynamics section The first section is controlled by the left bank of knobs and switches The second section is controlled by the right bank DYNAMICS Mix Parameters Figure 5 The Dynamics Page Compressor Parameters PARAMETER PAD Compression Threshold The first rotary control adjusts the compressor threshold This sets the signal level above which gain reduction occurs The control range is 50 to OdB Compression Ratio The second rotary control adjusts th
29. AudioBase 1 database into AudioBase2 type exportabl at the command line AudioBase2 is designed to service a whole network of DREAM and MFX worksta tions and is therefore capable of handling very large sound libraries When a search yields a large number of results it produces very significant network traffic to download all the information to the MFX workstation that initiated the search To prevent this happening only the first group of 100 found records are downloaded but as the list is scrolled more records are found inside the database and downloaded automatically keeping the flow of information coming smoothly Alphabetic Sort AudioBase2 sorts all records alphabetically by name before downloading them from the server to the Station workstation while AudioBase does not No Export Because AudioBase2 works in the PC environment no export procedure is provid ed The SQL database can be interrogated and edited directly on the PC where it is running using tools supplied with the AudioBase2 package The Line Field AudioBase2 allows the Line field to have the value Any which means records are found whether they are online or offline The reason for this is that with the very large number of records that could be present in AudioBase2 it could take a long time to find out if each of them has audio on a disk somewhere on the network GUIDE TO AUDIOBASE2 This is particularly true if you are searching for individual WAVE fi
30. Auto Enable is ON the signal path ena ble mix mask is ignored If Touch Auto Enable is OFE the signal path must be enabled in the mix mask for Parameters to enter record 3 Punch in manually on enabled tracks with the In key or punch in automatically at the Active In point using PUNCH or the PLAY key All enabled parameters on all enabled signal paths in the current mix mask are put into record Note that the mix mask may be changed between Punches allowing different channels to be put into Record on subsequent Punch passes 4 Use the Prime mode and the transport PLAY and REC keys or ADR functions to record automation on selected signal paths All enabled parameters on all enabled signal paths in the current mix mask are put into record The first two methods are the simplest and most common methods These tech niques are described in detail below Leaving Automation Record There are seven methods of leaving automation record AUTOMATION BASICS AUTOMATION 1 Press the AUTO key on any fader Cause the transport to leave PLAY by using any transport command Press the Mix ON key to disable the mix automation system When in Touch Snap mode release any fader pot or switch wh ghe cux N Punch out manually on enabled tracks with the Out key or punch out automat ically at the Active Out point after pressing PUNCH or the PLAY key 6 In Prime mode use ADR or the PLAY key to punch out 7 Press the A11 Read soft key
31. Automation Playback The DREAM automation system ensures that your mix will always play back exactly as recorded There are two main forms of automation data recorded in a project The first is the static snapshot of all parameters which is recorded whenever a mix is saved The second type of data are the dynamic automation events that are recorded every time a parameter is modified while the system is writing or trimming automa tion Once a dynamic event has been recorded on a feed or bus that parameter will be in READ whenever Mix ON is engaged and the transport is in PLAY When the system detects that a parameter control has changed while in Write or Trim a dynamic event is recorded that stores the previous value and the new value FROM value and TO value of that specific parameter at a specific timecode loca tion When Mix ON is engaged and the transport is located to any position on the time line the automation system looks back and forward in time to find any events pre viously recorded for the parameter If no dynamic events have been recorded for the parameter the parameter is set to the value recorded in the mix snapshot The current value for any parameter is determined in the following order 1 The parameter is set to the TO value of the most recent previous event 2 If no previous event exists the parameter is set to the FROM value of the next future event 3 If no future or previous event exists the parameter is set
32. Console QDC Engine Disk Recorder Video Monitor Mixer Video Monitor UNPACKING It is advisable that before any installation work is attempted that the system be un packed and the contents verified A sizeable area approximately three square meters should be suitable Using the basic packing list below record the items you have received Having the relevant details logged in your Installation Manual will help you if you have to make an enquiry in the event of a packing omission At this stage do not power up the system or remove electronic modules from the system as damage may occur if not handled correctly INSTALLATION EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED QDC Engine IMW4 1 Station Console ABE1001 1 Microsoft Windows License ISE1111 1 Station Operating System Install CD 7WIN2000 1 Station Software Install CD 7BE1Vn n 1 Station Documentation CD DMIX100 1A 1 Station Installation Manual DBE1103 1 Console Serial Cable ABE1221 A 1 Ethernet Crossover Cable JAA3643 1 STATIC PRECAUTIONS Do not open or remove components from your system unless specifically instructed to do so by Fairlight support personnel Please take note that all Fairlight manufac tured electronic modules are static sensitive and should be handled under anti static conditions When working on a system always ensure that you have an anti static lead connected and that the system is connected to ground through an earth lead Never
33. Control Keys Figure 1 Machine Control Keys Station can control two machines M1 and M2 plus the disk recorder and generate timecode at all frame rates The following menus on the console are used to configure and control external de vices Setup PreRoll Offset M1 Button M2 Button Disk Button Gen Button Used to set systems frame rate time display format and NTSC rundown Used to set preroll times for automatic recording and play back Used to set offsets for M1 M2 Disk and Gen Takes first external machine on and off line When used with the BLUE key it opens a menu for setting parameters for Ma chine 1 Takes second external machine on and off line When used with the BLUE key it opens a menu for setting parameters for Machine 2 Hold down the BLUE key and press Disk to take the Station disk recorder on and offline When it is offline the disk re corder will not locate or respond to transport controls or playback any audio Switches the timecode generator on and off The timecode generator outputs longitudinal timecode at the LTC output and MIDI timecode at the MIDI output INTRODUCTION M1 AND M2 SETUP Type The master machines M1 and M2 can be configured to select 9 pin port A 9 pin port B 9 pin slave LTC input A or LTC input B Only one master can be selected an any one time Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press M1 or M2 Step 2 Select the desired soft key paramet
34. D Female PIN 1 GND PIN 2 9BTxA PIN 9RRxB 3 PIN 4 GND PIN NC 5 PIN 6 GND 7 PIN 9BTxB PIN 8 9BRxA PIN 9 GND SPECIFICATIONS LTC I O 40 24 Description Balanced audio longitudinal time code interface Connector 9 pin D Male Input Level 20dbm to 10dbm Output Level Odbm Note Unbalanced loads connected to LTC OUT should NOT ground the LTC OUT NEGATIVE signal PIN 1 GND PIN 2 LTC A IN NEGATIVE PIN 3 LTC OUT NEGATIVE PIN 4 GND PIN 5 LTC B IN POSITIVE PIN 6 LTC A IN POSITIVE PIN 7 GND PIN 8 LTC OUT POSITIVE PIN 9 LTC B IN NEGATIVE Serial Port Description RS232 serial interface Connector 9 pin D Male PIN 1 SER_DCD PIN 2 SER_Rx PIN 3 SER_Tx PIN 4 SER_DTR PIN 5 GND PIN 6 SER_DSR PIN 7 SER_RTS PIN 8 SER_CTS PIN 9 NC QDC WIRING AND CONNECTION DETAILS 40 25 MIDI I O AES Sync I O SPECIFICATIONS Connector 9 pin D Female Description MIDI interface not implemented 9 pin Signal MIDI DIN D type Connector PIN 1 NOT CONNECTED PIN 2 MIDI IN NEGATIVE DINI PIN 5 PIN 3 MIDI OUT NEGATIVE DIN2 PIN 5 PIN 4 MIDI THROUGH GND DIN3 PIN 2 PIN 5 MIDI THROUGH POSITIVE DIN3 PIN 4 PIN 6 MIDI IN POSITIVE DINI PIN 4 PIN 7 MIDI OUT GND DIN PIN 2 PIN 8 MIDI OUT POSITIVE DIN2 PIN 4 PIN 9 MIDI THROUGH NEGATIVE DIN PIN 5
35. Device Display Device display shows the devices currently available on the system with the selected device highlighted Device number is used to reference the device on the Project and Backup Menu SCSI ID shows the SCSI bus to which the selected device is connected and the device s SCSI ID In this case it is ID 3 on PCI SCSI bus 0 the internal bus This is the partition name Disk manufacturer Disk size in megabytes Available space in megabytes Available space in mono track time at the current sample rate Disk usage indicator On the left of the screen is the Folders display This shows the Fairlight worksta tions domains drives and folders available to the Station Pathlist The pathlist displays details of the currently selected path Files On the right of the screen is the Files display This shows the files stored on the se lected device along with information regarding the size of the file dates they were last modified their sample rates etc The selected file is always highlighted 3 4 NAVIGATING THE PROJECT MENU To open the Project menu press the Proj Project key This is already selected when the machine is powered up To move up and down the list of files or folders and devices use the Up and Down Arrow keys on the console or alternatively use the jogger wheel To jump between the files or folders and devices lists press the Files Folders key on the Station console Project Navigation
36. JUMP TO CLIP name functions Changing the search text in one function will also cause the text to change in the other JUMP TO CLIP NAME will locate the transport to the next clip with a matching name on any track POINT or The transport will locate to the head tail or sync point see be FADE low ofa clip or the start or end ofa fade described later on the selected track or tracks POINT The transport will locate to the head tail or sync point of a clip on the selected track or tracks MARK The transport will locate to the next mark NOTES A sync point ofa clip defaults to the head of a clip unless changed with the Trim Slip menu see Trim Edit Mode on page 10 13 JUMP TO POINT and JUMP TO POINT OR FADE will only work on selected tracks Holding down the Shift key and pressing a Jump key will override the Jump Menu and JUMP TO POINT Holding down the Ctrl key and pressing a Jump key will override the Jump Menu and JUMP TO MARK Holding down the BLUE key and pressing either Jump key will locate the trans port to the start or end of the Range LOCATOR FUNCTIONS Rapid navigation through the project is achieved by using the GO TO menu func tions and by making MARKS on the time line For more information see Go To on page 23 2 and Marks on page 27 2 4 10 SELECTING A RANGE A Range allows a group of clips across one or multiple tracks to be selected Many functions provided by Station require the
37. Left destination element e g Centre Gain in dB For example here is the entry for Stereo to Mono downmix Stereo to Mono SET NODE Stereo Mono Left Centre 3 SET NODE Stereo Mono Right Centre 3 Source elements that are not passed through to the destination do not appear in the downmix entry Follow these steps to edit the monitor matrix file Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Quit FMC by holding down the Shift key and pressing the Pause Break key on the PC keyboard and typing Q then Y Use the trackball to double click on the Start button on the task bar at the bottom left of the mixer screen Use the trackball to select Programs gt Accessories gt Notepad Notepad is a basic text editor application In Notepad select Open from the File menu at the top of the screen Navigate to the following file and click Open C Projects Mixers FMC Data monitor matrix txt Select File gt Save As and type monitor_matrix bak to save a back up copy then File gt Open C Projects Mixers FMC Data monitor matrix txt to re open the original file for editing Use the arrow keys to scroll down the file to the entry you wish to modify Edit the gain value at the end of a line or type a new line to add an element e g Boom When you have finished making changes click File Save then File gt Exit to save the file and exit Notepad Click on the DREAM Start Icon on the desktop
38. MADI that are not fitted are unlit If the selected path is a bus or a link group the outputs can be selected for one bus element at a time The Speaker Mute key of the current bus element is illuminated green Speaker mute keys for bus elements already patched flash off to dim green Speaker mute keys for bus elements not currently patched are illu minated dim green Each direct out may be patched to a single output or multiple physical outputs Press the SINGLE MULTI soft key to select sin gle or multi mode In SINGLE mode Press a track key to select the output for the cur rent feed direct out If the selected path is a bus or link group in SINGLE mode the current bus or link group element is advanced automatically when an output is selected Press a track key to select the output for the current bus or link group element direct out The bus or link group elements advance in the following order Left Left Centre Centre Right Centre Right Left Surround Centre Surround Right Surround Boom Elements that are not in the current bus or group format are not displayed To skip the current bus or link group element press the Next soft key To remove patching for the current bus or link group element and leave it with no output press the Blank soft key In MULTI mode outputs for the selected feed bus or link group element may be toggled ON or OFF by pressing the correspond ing Track keys If the key is flashing the
39. Monitor Matrix TXT File on page 35 12 below for details on modifying the de fault downmix behaviour of the system NAMING CONTROL ROOM SPEAKER SETS Alternative speaker sets may be given more meaningful names specific to the current installation INTRODUCTION 6 3 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Monitor Setup key next to the Monitor Level Control Press the soft key for the speaker set you wish to name e g Alt 2 Press the Patch Outputs soft key Press the Name soft key Type the name on the PC keyboard and press Enter PATCHING CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUTPUTS To set the format and select the physical outputs for any of the monitor sets follow MONITORING these steps Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 System I O Ports Hold down a BLUE key and press the Monitor Setup key next to the Monitor Level Control Press the soft key to select the speaker set you wish to patch e g Alt 2 Press the Patch Outputs soft key To determine the number of outputs required you must specify the format of the speaker set Press the Format soft key to cycle through the available formats These are None Mono Stereo LCR LCRS LCRSS 5 1 6 1 7 1 Select the type of physical output you wish to patch to by pressing the AES MADT soft keys The speaker mute keys are now used to select each speaker The current speaker mute key is brightly lit
40. Monitoring INTRODUCTION The Station provides control of up to nine sets of monitor speakers for the Control Room supporting all surround formats up to 7 1 Station also supports automatic fold down into narrower formats allowing for example a 5 1 mix to be checked in stereo monitors Bus Selection Keys Bus Element Speaker Mute Keys Monitor Level Figure 1 Monitoring Controls SELECTING CONTROL ROOM MONITOR SPEAKERS The system provides up to nine sets of monitor speakers which are named Main and Alternative 1 to 8 The default speaker set is Main The Monitor Alt key in the Monitor section is used to toggle between the Main speakers and the current i e most recently selected Alternative speaker set The Monitor Alt key is illuminated when the alternative monitors are selected To change the current Alternative speaker set Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Monitor Setup key next to the Monitor Level Control Step 2 Select one of the alternative speaker sets by pressing the appro priate soft key The alternative speaker set is immediately switched into the monitoring chain Each set of monitors can be set up in any of the available formats which are Mono Stereo LCR LCRS LCRSS 5 1 6 1 or 7 1 Selecting a monitor set of a lower or higher format than the currently selected monitor source will cause the elements of the source to be folded up or down to fit the format of the speaker system See The
41. ON May be set to a number of milliseconds or set to HELD where the GPO stays on until the transport stops Fires a GPO immediately for testing purposes If pulse is set to held the GPO switches on and off as the key is pressed and released GPO fires three times leading up to a programmed recording Cueing for artists Time between beeps Only available if Timecode is set Sets the length of time the GPO remains ON May be set to a number of milliseconds or set to HELD where the GPO stays on until the transport stops Fires a GPO immediately for testing purposes If pulse is set to held the GPO switches on and off as the key is pressed and released GPO fires once at a given time leading up to a programmed recording Streaming lights Set a time in frames by which the GPI precedes the recording Only available if T imecode is set Sets the length of time the GPO remains ON May be set to a number of milliseconds or set to HELD where the GPO stays on until the transport stops Fires a GPO immediately for testing purposes If pulse is set to held the GPO switches on and off as the key is pressed and released Type MARKS Description Examples Pulse Fire 24 8 GPO fires when the transport reaches each MARK in play and record Track starts for CD recorders Only available if Timecode is set Sets the length of time the GPO remains ON May be set to a number of milliseconds or set to HELD wh
42. Punch In Punch Out 4 446 30 80 40044 9 9 Automatic Drop in s titi een 9 10 RECORDING STEREO CLIPS 9 10 Chapter 10 Binnacle Editing INTRODUCTION 2 2 2 2 2 10 2 EDITING aa ie re 10 3 Edit Modes urn an u 10 3 EdIPOPUONS ss esee rer a 10 3 Edit Targets aa 10 4 One and Two handed Editing 10 4 Undo and Redo oona nananana 10 4 Single Track or Multitrack Editing 10 5 Clip Layers e scd LY ferr e ete 10 5 Transport and Selection Keys 10 5 CUT AND COPY EDIT MODES 10 6 The Clipboard se aves 10 6 GNOSE C A ON 10 6 Using Cut or Copy erm eme 10 6 Cut Edit Targets i244 nie er dosis 10 7 Copy Edit Targets i2 cuo egeret 10 7 Cut Copy Soft Key Functions 10 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS xi Cut and Copy Edit Options 10 8 Cut Copy with Range On 10 8 ERASE EDIT MODE 10 11 A Re R e den 10 11 Erase Edit Targets o o oo oo o ooo 10 11 Erase Edit Options ss 2 222212222222 10 11 TRIM EDIT MODE llle 10 13 Using MEL aa atero har 10 13 Trim Edit Targets rs ei 10 13 Trim Soft Key Functions 10 14 Trim Edit Options pe 2242 sa 10 14 SLIP EDIT MODE 2 2 10 15 Using Slip 224 asa miaa 44 Rer dete 10 15 Slip Edit Targets etre Ir oy 10 15 Slip Edit Options s is tido E 10 16 NUDGE iaa 10 16 Using Nudge oli 34x 10 16 Nudge with A Range 10 16 FADES EDIT
43. Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Space key Step 2 Define a Range and select tracks Step 3 Press the COMMIT soft key Step 4 Press the Enter key After COMMIT you will not be able to trim the heads or tails of the affected clips When commit doesn t commit 1 If only a small section of a waveform is unused it may be left whole as breaking it up will actually use more disk space 2 If the waveform is used by another clip that was not selected The PACK function shuffles the data in a Project to flush out the empty spaces re sulting from the DISPOSE and COMMIT functions The free space generated is avail able for use by any Project Use PACK at any time after DISPOSE and COMMIT Be sure not to inadvertently switch the machine off during PACK as this will destroy your Project Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Space key Step 2 Press the PACK soft key Step 3 Press the Enter key The Project is packed into the smallest possible area of disk releasing the remainder for general use This may take some time because the audio on the hard disks will be moved around Keep Borrowed Clips 4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT The KEEP BORROWED function copies borrowed clips permanently into the Project After KEEP BORROWED the Project will no longer need to access the library Projects or Projects from which it was extended The HANDLES parameter determines how much extra of the original waveform if available is c
44. The lay out of the parameter values is exactly the same as the layout on the numeric key pad A graph helps you to see what is going on EQ In Out Use the EQ In Out Soft key to toggle the EQ on or off at any time This action will affect the clip under the cursor or all clips in the Range if any The on off position of this switch is stored in the clip along with the settings of the EQ pa rameters 1 While you are changing parameter values with the jogger wheel the actual sound is updated every 25 sec 2 Turning the wheel faster increases the steps between values 3 There is no limit to the frequency Range for each band so you can have your low frequency higher than your high frequency if you want 4 When you are using a Range it is possible to change one or more bands for the entire Range while leaving other bands as they were So for example the clips might have different settings for LOW EQ but the same setting for HIGH EQ EQ DISPLAY 19 1 NOTES 19 2 Chapter 19 Gate Menu INTRODUCTION The Gate Menu automatically edits clips to remove sections that fall below a given level Gating can be set to occur during recording and playback of audio Gate Key Figure 1 The Gate Key GATING CLIPS Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and the GATE key Step 2 Locate the cursor over a clip or define a Range of clips Step 3 Enter the parameters described below Step 4 Press the GATE soft key The Gati
45. The speaker mute keys are also used for bus and link group element selection during patching operations Monitor Phase Reversal The phase of each monitor speaker may be inverted Hold down a BLUE key and press the speaker mute key of the speaker you wish to modify The mute key will flash to indicate that its phase is currently inverted Hold down a BLUE key and press the speaker mute key to return to normal phase 6 8 SAVING MONITOR SETUPS SOLO Utils key Automation Figure 2 Mix Utils Keys The BLUE Utils menu offers the Update Sys File item for storage of system settings System Files are stored in the C Projects Mixers FMC Data directory Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Utils key to enter the Utils menu Step 2 Press the Update Sys File soft key to store the system set tings This information is stored in the following files Monitor Sources TXT patching and formats of external monitor sources Speaker Sets TXT patching and formats of all speaker sets Setup Variables TXT Call Follow state and console brightness Individual feeds may be soloed into the monitoring system There are three solo modes which may be entered by pressing the SOLO key next to any fader These are solo in place or SIP after fader listen or AFL and pre fader listen or PFL SIP mutes all other feeds leaving only the soloed feeds feeding the bus being monitored SIP supports monitoring in any format AFL and PFL mode
46. an alternative format by pressing one of the format soft keys in the LCD menu The alternative format is immediately applied to the monitoring chain Whenever the signal path or monitor source being monitored is narrower than the current Monitor Format the speakers that are not needed are muted See The Monitor_Matrix TXT File on page 35 12 below to see how the default settings are derived The user can modify these settings to suit any mode of opera tion or to make the Station monitoring conform to any surround delivery format requirements Operators should be aware that while the Station is capable of playing a surround mix on any speaker format when checking for compatibility the appropriate de coding system should be employed for the target audience listening environ ment See Inserts in Monitoring on page 6 6 below for details on employing external decoders in the monitoring path INSERTS IN MONITORING Inserts in monitoring are not used explicitly but can be chosen by using the Source Setup Menu which allows any physical inputs to be monitored This allows for in stance both the Lt Rt outputs ofa Dolby encoder and the individual LCRS outputs of a Dolby decoder to be monitored directly as external monitor source inputs See Selecting a Control Room Monitor Source on page 6 4 above and Patching External Monitor Sources on page 6 4 for more details on setting up and using monitor sources MONITORING CONT
47. at the same time as long as your system contains enough channels to play them Arm on the Fly Normally tracks are armed before you put the system into record but it is possible drop in or out of record on specific tracks while the system is recording by pressing one or more track keys If the input patching for the track is not unique i e it tries to record an input that is already being recorded on another track the first track dis arms Metering Input Levels The input levels to the armed tracks are shown as vertical bargraphs at the top of the screen These are seen on the video screen as soon as you enter the Arm Menu For tracks that are not armed for record meters show the playback levels The behaviour of the meters can be changed so that the background colour changes to warn you when a certain input level has been reached This is done by setting the METER RED LEVEL field on the System Page Press the BLUE key and the S key then use the mouse to change the value of RED or type RED n ENTER where n is the desired audio level with or without a minus sign for example RED 18 The meter scaling can also be changed This is done by setting the Meter Law which affects the Range of the meter and its linearity Meter Law can be changed on the System Page or by typing LAW n ENTER where n is a number from 1 to 6 For more information on system page settings see The System Page on page 35 9 RECORDING Step 1 Locate the trans
48. batch The following procedure is run from the Backup Menu BACKUP AND RESTORE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Press the COPY or MOVE soft keys Select the destination device and folder Press Enter Use the jogger wheel and the MARK soft key to select the files to be copied or moved Press the START COPY or START MOVE soft key It is possi ble to create a folder using the NEW FOLDER soft key 34 6 COPYING AND MOVING 35 1 NOTES Chapter 35 System Files INTRODUCTION Station uses a number of files to store setup information These are normally set to sensible values at the factory but in some cases you may need to change them There are two main groups of system files Those associated with the QDC engine and those associated with the console The console system files are stored on the console computer under the Windows op erating system The QDC Configuration files are stored in OS9 partitions on the boot drive The names of the files which are given below include the disk partition and full path that is needed to access them Some options are only taken into account when the machine boots up Therefore to ensure your changes take effect restart the machine by powering down and switching back on WORKING WITH QDC SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILES It is always necessary to quit the disk recorder application and access the operating system in order to edit a configuration file Step 1 Hold down the Shi
49. be the same The latter half of the line should con tain category and description information from the received database 8 Remove one set of clip names and all other fields such as duration etc supplied in the received database so that you have on each line after the first the fields listed above under Text File Format in the same order 9 Repeat step 6 from Example 1 This time AudioBase will not ask you to find the Project file because the ID and Name are written into the first line of the text file PUBLISHING WITH TEXT FILES 28 13 AUDIOBASE Editing the Form The AudioBase Form can be changed from its default setup by editing a file which defines its layout Type lt Enter gt This brings up an OS9 shell or text interface chd dd usr mfx Enter ed abase form Enter Now you will see a screen layout depicting the fields their names and sizes The first part lists the fields provided by the Station You cannot change their names or sizes and should not interfere with this part of the file The second part shows user definable fields By default the first two are activated and you can change their names from USER 1 and USER 2 to anything you like To edit their names use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the correct place use the BACK or DEL key to remove characters and use the alphanumeric keyboard to insert characters You can also determine how many characters will be shown on the screen the actua
50. been copied to the C directory of the Station the archive can be executed Step 1 Click on the Start menu and select Run Step 2 Type C Station V100 Upgrade use the name of the archive file if different Step 3 Follow the on screen instructions to install the upgrade The FMC application will be extracted to the C projects mixers fmc directory FMC is usually launched from a shortcut on the desktop which runs the DREAM Start splash screen application which in turn runs a batch file named DREAM bat The batch file downloads current console software from the QDC engine via ftp and launches the FMC application with a complete set of command line options It may be necessary to edit the batch file to specify the current FMC application name See Automatic Start up on page 39 6 for details of the start up procedure Software Version The currently running version of FMC is displayed in the Utils menu Hold down a BLUE key and press the Utils key to display the version number UPGRADING SYSTEM SOFTWARE 36 1 NOTES Chapter 36 Drive Formatting INTRODUCTION Station supports two different disk file systems e FAT32 the Microsoft Windows compatible file system specified in the AES31 standard FLFS Fairlight File System invented by Fairlight to handle devices larger than 4 Gigabytes It must be used for these large devices Only a Fairlight approved disk drive should be used with Station A list of suitable
51. current QDC software version number type ver at the command line Console Software Upgrade SYSTEM FILES Software upgrades are made available on the internet from either the Fairlight web site www fairlightesp com au follow the links on the support pages to locate the lat est release or from the Fairlight ftp site fip fairlightesp com au Carefully read the release notes for any release specific or upgrade issues prior to starting the upgrade The software release is contained in a self extracting archive named Station V Up grade exe where is the version number Once the software has been transferred to a local internet connected computer it may be copied to the console computer in one of a number of ways For example 1 Create a CDR containing the Station archive and insert it in the Station s CD drive Use Windows explorer to copy the file to the root directory of the C drive 2 Copy the Station archive to the C directory of the Station computer from another computer connected via an Ethernet local area network or an Ethernet cross over cable 3 Copy the Station archive to a removable SCSI storage device Connect the removable SCSI storage device to the QDC engine Use FTP to transfer the Sta tion archive from the QDC engine to the Station s C drive 35 24 Refer to the document available with the software release download file which ex plains the process in detail Once the DREAM self extracting archive has
52. define one by one using a number of statements like these INPUT type index name attibutes OUTPUT type index name attibutes 35 12 Note that the index counts from 1 and that the name must be less than 12 characters long The attribute can be omitted a value of 1 specifies the port to be a system port HS Da ap E e pal a NE RUE This system has 32 analog IPs 32 analog outputs 32 digital IPs 32 digital OPs and no MADI Digital Inputs 1 amp 2 are named DAT L amp R respectively Analog Outputs 25 amp 26 are named Main Mon L amp R respectively dE db db dt IO CONFIG 1 32 32 IO CONFIG 2 32 32 IO CONFIG 3 0 0 INPUT 2 1 DAT L INPUT 2 2 DAT R OUTPUT 1 25 Main Mon L 1 OUTPUT 1 26 Main Mon R 1 The Monitor Matrix TXT File The monitor matrix file is a text file which contains a complete set of upmix and downmix matrix coefficients These are used when monitoring a larger format bus on a smaller format speaker set or when selecting a larger or smaller monitoring for mat than the current monitor source bus Monitor Downmix Matrix Defaults The monitoring downmix matrix allows any source format to be monitored on any format speaker system The elements of the source signal path are distributed or summed and attenuated as necessary to maintain the soundfield image in the target format When monitoring a source format with less elements than the current monitor for mat the elements in the source format that al
53. down make a selection of signal paths then release it This causes immediate return to the previous operation mode Solo Menu OPERATION The disk recorder solo functions are available from the Solo key at the top of the console While the Solo key is held down or while its menu is active the soft key menu offers a number of additional functions Solo On Off Pressing the Solo ON OFF soft key toggles the currently selected group of signals in and out of solo Solo Follow The follow soft key causes the solo selection to be the same as the current edit selection of tracks As tracks are selected for editing they are automatically soloed Mute Mute has the same effect on an individual signal path as pulling the fader right down to the bottom of its travel A single feed sub bus fader or link group can be muted using the MUTE key in the Master Fader section or above any fader in the Sidecar This mute function can be automated along with other parameters Muted feeds are shown with a red indicator on the mixer video display Disk Recorder Track Mute To mute a random selection of tracks use the track Mute key located in the upper set of function keys This function is not included in mix automation Indicators next to the track numbers on the track display show blue for soloed muted tracks Step 1 Press the track Mute key located in the upper set of function keys Step 2 Select the tracks that are to be muted by pressing the tra
54. edit hold down the edit target key to Slip move the cur sor then release the target key to slip the clip When slipping the head or tail of a clip pressing the target key once executes the SLIP Move the cursor and hit Enter to SLIP the head or tail again if required Slip Edit Targets BINNACLE EDITING The result of a SLIP edit is determined by the target key pressed Range Clip The entire clip is slipped from its current position by an offset defined by the difference between the cursor position when the key was pressed and the cursor position when the edit was completed Head The head of the clip is slipped to the position that the cursor is at when the edit is completed The tail remains stationary with audio being moved out from the tail or pushed under it as required Tail The tail of the clip is slipped to the position that the cursor is at when the edit is completed The head remains stationary with audio being moved out from the head or pushed under it as required 10 16 Locating the cursor over the clip and typing RTB Enter will slip the clip to its orig inal recording time RT B stands for Return To Birthday Slip Edit Options NUDGE Slip is usually applied to a single clip or selections across tracks therefore no options are available Range On RANGE ON is not supported in Slip Mode Layers On ALL LAYERS ON is not supported in Slip Mode Razor On RAZOR ON is not supported in Slip Mode Althoug
55. ee tee 4 3 10 4 Clip Clip Level ur 17 3 Clipboard 142i idee lead 10 6 Clock Rate Suse viov A 9 2 Corral ura ii 40 12 ComMit o ooooooooo o 19 3 26 4 Compatibility 4 sedes et en 29 11 Compression Attack Rate ae Ges Ss 8 11 Bypass un peru REY ERES 8 12 FEED Forward Back 8 11 Gain Makeup i5 24 4 8 12 Hold Time s cosa oce ey 8 11 Ratio cero 2 oe DERE 8 11 Release Bates ar 8 11 Ihrespoldisse san ss ar 8 11 Compressor asia 8 11 Configuration Files 35 2 Conflict of Sync sii adhe ine end 30 7 Console ai 2 8 CONSOLE Library Presets 12 2 Control Cable 38 5 39 3 CODY sins taa E 22 3 34 2 Cross Pades u una ideas 10 18 Cross over Cable 40 22 Cue Mute GPI 24 8 CURSOR read eurer 4 6 Cycle ADR ar an 24 3 D Data Storage eee Hr 25 19 Databases rata 28 2 Default Console Template 12 3 DefaultInp tlype 22 ru 35 7 Delete Mark 27 3 DEPTH lt a es 9 3 Device Display 2 ans o dol 3 2 Digital Audio Cables 38 6 Dum A mer UA 6 6 15 3 AA b 4 7 Direct Out Gans eure 5 14 Direct Out Pre Post 42 222224 5 14 Direct Outputs a2 en 5 12 Disk Button 5 es ees Sor x RR Rs 31 2 Diskinit 2 522 webs daros sii 36 2 Isp lay nen tree 17 3 Display Display Level 17 3 DISPOSE una er 26 4 DitherOutput 22 Sursee 35 7 Divetge Control 24 2 1 exe uz 8 8 DNSDOMAIN 2 2 2 44 2 20554 35 3 DNSSERVER cc 35
56. faders starting with the fader selected A fader may be removed from a Fader Set Step 1 Press the Delete soft key in the LCD All following faders move to the left when this is done and the fader at the extreme right of the console is made blank A fader may be inserted into a fader set Step 1 Press the Insert soft key in the LCD this is only active dur ing mapping at any point in the mapping The faders to the right of the current position will immediate ly move one place to the right so that the right most fader will disappear from the end The new fader is immediately ready to be assigned to a signal path If another fader is selected before this is done the insert ed one is left blank Changes to Fader Sets can be accepted in the following ways 1 Pressing the Map key accepts the changes and exits from map ping operations 2 Pressing a different Fader Set key accepts the changes and be gins mapping the new Fader Set 3 Selecting another mode accepts the changes and launches the new mode Changes to Fader Sets cannot be cancelled during a mapping operation but can be undone immediately afterwards Pressing the Fader Set key of the Fader Set being changed has no effect Mapping Bus Faders Mapping Bus Masters is accomplished during a mapping session by pressing the bus key on the Selection Panel The Bus Fader is a single fader controlling all Bus Ele ments Bus Elements cannot be mapped directly to faders
57. few samples may occur at the input This causes a characteristic periodic form of digital distortion called a whisper A whisper sounds like a brief glassy or metallic buzz and occurs about once every few seconds depending how fast the samples are overflowing or underflowing One way to guarantee digital synchronization is to choose the digital input signal itself as the Master Clock Reference for the Station This is done in the Digi Menu by selecting INPUT under the Sync soft key or AUTO under the Inp Sync soft key This latter source of timing will only be used when a digital input is armed with the normal HOUSE sync used at other times 30 6 A side effect is that the word clock rate of all digital outputs will also sync to the dig ital input which may cause digital synchronization conflicts downstream from the Station For example trouble may occur if at the same time as recording your dig ital input your outputs are feeding the inputs of a digital console If you choose IN PUT the digital console will be required to sample rate convert all of Station s outputs or synchronise with its Master Clock The best solution to digital sync conflicts is to drive all digital devices from a single studio wide word clock signal Then all devices will have identical word rates so whispers never occur and digital interconnections may made with ease In this in stance the sync HOUSE option is always used Pull up and Pull down The
58. key If all the inputs of the selected feeds have the same gain value that value is shown in the LCD below the Gain soft key as an absolute value ABS otherwise this field is initialised to O dB and is dis played as a relative value REL ABS represents the absolute value of all Inputs REL represents a trim or relative offset value applied to all inputs Use the Jog wheel to adjust the value or use the numeric keys and press Enter to complete To set input phase Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 ARMING TRACKS First enter the Patch I O Menu by pressing the Patch I O key Select the feed or feeds whose inputs you wish to adjust Press the Phase soft key to toggle the phase of the selected inputs If the inputs to all selected feeds are in phase the track keys are illuminated green If the inputs to all selected feeds are out of phase the track keys are illuminated amber If the inputs to the selected feeds do not all have the same phase status the track keys flash green to amber An input can only be recorded on one track at a time If an input is patched to more than one track arming one of these tracks will disarm any other track patched to this input RECORDING The transport must be in STOP to monitor the inputs To arm a track Step 1 Press Arm Track selection keys flash red to indicate the avail able tracks Step 2 Select track s to be armed by pressing the track selection keys Any number of tracks can be armed
59. keyboard back to the QDC engine This will bring up the calibration window LED Brightness The brightness of illuminated LEDs on the control surface may be modified to suit ambient lighting conditions There are five levels of brightness SYSTEM SHUTDOWN 39 5 Testing and Calibration Close xl Type A y Number Encoder Produ i en Test COM1 I Ci Switch Touch LED Test COM2 Touch Sensor PCB Serial Number Test GPIOs Figure 4 Console Calibration Dialogue Select Station Panel ID 1 from the Panel list select Encoder control types from the Type list Select All from the Number list then click Go Wait for the controller movement to finish before moving on to the Touch Sensor and Fader controller type See the descriptions below Encoder Calibration Select Encoder from the Type list All rotary encoders are automatically calibrated without intervention Check the calibration window messages to make sure the en coders are calibrated successfully Fader Calibration Select Fader from the Type list All faders are automatically calibrated without in tervention Check the calibration window messages to make sure the faders are cal ibrated successfully LCD Calibration Select LCD from the Type list Select each LCD one at a time The LCD dialogue box will be displayed Click the Contrast buttons to change the contrast Click the Backlight buttons to change the backlight level On Station all
60. keys on the PC keyboard to select items on the form Selecting the Publish to AudioBase box will publish all the created WAV files into AudioBase Step 4 Press Enter to perform the export All the clips selected will now appear as separate Broadcast WAV files in the folder specified 29 10 File Export Options UNIT Sets the destination drive Use the Up and Down arrow keys to move between the available drives on your system FOLDER If desired you can add a directory name where you would like these WAVE files to be placed The WAVE Import page can search for them and find them in this directory but they can not be borrowed successfully from it only kept see Import Menu for details FILE NAME Determines how the WAVE files will be named Use the Left and Right arrow keys to move between choices If Other is chosen another field appears allowing you to enter a new file name of up to 8 characters PUBLISHTO Allows WAVE files to be published to AudioBase at the same AUDIOBASE time as creating them This is a very useful way of publishing a single sound or group of sounds to AudioBase without pub lishing the whole Project NOTES VA The BWF format is 100 compliant with normal WAV players which simply play the files as normal WAV files without recognizing the extra data chunks in the BWF format BWE compatible WAV players however are able to make use of the extra data incorporated in the exported file This data i
61. keys while pressing the menu key Soft Keys Soft keys provide access to the menu options displayed on the LCD console display There are two rows of soft keys upper and lower LCD Console Display The LCD display provides status information and displays the menu options asso ciated with the Menu Soft Keys Menu options are displayed immediately above or below the Soft Key used to select the option Project Machine and Patching Menu Keys These Menu Keys provide access to the main project navigation functions machine control autolocation and patching menus To activate the function displayed in blue press and hold one of the three BLUE keys while pressing the menu key Parameter Pad The Parameter Pad provides access to the signal processing parameters of the current selected track feed live feed or bus The parameter types available are EQ Pan Dy namics Auxiliary bus sends and Plug ins All rotary controls are motorised and touch sensitive for easy update of automation Automation Menu Keys These keys provide access to all automation functions Edit Target Keys These keys modify the effect of each edit For instance a Cut may be performed on a Range a Clip the Head of a clip or the Tail of a clip Transport Keys The transport keys provide standard tape transport functions plus Jog Shuttle selec tion and a range of play options under the Play Menu To enter Record press the Play and Record keys together Hold d
62. kkk Ca PROJECT IES 1T FR SAMPLE RATE NEERESI NES Laver CLIP MANE St de HEAD HIH sec f S EORROHED Fi Ron 2 Voiceover 2 EEE a 8 7 BICOMPILE MT Figure 2 Takes Display Step 1 Locate the transport so the cursor lies over the clip Step 2 Hold down the BLUE key and press Takes Step 3 Use the Jogger wheel or and keys to select desired clip Step 4 Press the POP soft key TRACK amp TAKES 22 4 TAKES MENU 23 1 NOTES Chapter 23 Go To INTRODUCTION The Go To Menu is used to locate to SMPTE times marks stored timecode points or named clips After the transport has located to the target you will be re turned to the mode you were in before the GO TO command GO TO commands are terminated with the Enter key if you want to locate or with the Play key to preroll the selected point and go into play immediately see Setting Preroll and Postroll on page 24 3 Go To Key Figure 1 The Go To Key GO TO A TIMECODE LOCATION Step 1 Press the GO TO key The timecode location is displayed in the lower half of the upper console display Step 2 Edit the timecode location if necessary using numeric keypad Use CLEAR to set this value to 00 00 00 00 Step 3 Press Enter to move to the new timecode location The TIME soft key is the default mode for the GO TO function The GO TO TIME function locates the transport at a specific timecode point The output of each track is displayed on the level me ter
63. no clips lying under the cursor on an armed track a new clip is created If record ing commences where there is an existing clip the clip is over written using the same method as for OVER The WINDOW parameter available when this type of record ing is selected sets a time window prior to the start of an exist ing clip If the Station drops in to record within this window the recording starts at the start of the existing clip This is use ful for maintaining existing timing for drop ins The available window range is 0 999 frames ARM Mode The fifth soft key in the Arm Menu sets the operating mode of the arm menu In Ready mode the track keys are used to arm tracks for recording Armed Ready tracks play back existing clips until dropped into record When in record the input signal is passed through to the output of the track feed Armed tracks show the input highlighted in red on the meters display on the video screen and on the track keys In Thru mode the track keys are used to monitor the input of a track Tracks can not be armed in Thru mode Thru tracks show the input highlighted in green on the meters display on the video screen and on the track keys Monitoring Inputs The MONITOR soft key in the Arm Menu determines what is monitored on armed tracks in the various transport modes Press the MONITOR soft key use the jog wheel or keys and press Enter to select the input monitor mode RECORDING 9 8 The comprehensiv
64. normal sample rates used by the digital audio industry are 32 000 44 056 44 100 48 000 and 96 000 samples per second The normal frame rates are 24 25 29 97 and 30 These last two may cause confusion when used together Station can alter its sample rates far enough to accommodate the small speed change caused by going from 30 to 29 97 frames per second and back again In other words if you slow down the frame rate from 30 to 29 97 the Station can slow its internal sample rate to match This is called Pull up or Pull down depend ing in which direction you are taking the speed When you choose a frame rate you are telling Station what frame rate to expect To put it more accurately you are telling it the frame rate at which the chosen sample rate will be accurately reproduced For example if you tell the Station that the NTSC frame rate is 30 in the Setup Menu and the sample rate is 44 100 it will automatically pull down the sample rate to 44 056 if you feed in timecode at 29 97 If however you change the NTSC field to 29 97 the Station will play at 44 100 at 29 97 frames per second and will pull up to a sample rate of 44 144 when timecode runs at 30 frames per second It is advisable to choose a sample rate at which you want to make the final transfer of the Project Then record your material at whichever frame rate is going to be used during that final transfer The importance of this choice is that you do not want to compromis
65. of the band or indicates the type of shelf Range 0 99 Gain The gain of the band Range 99 to 20dB Old or New Shows if the EQ is the old or new setting Overload This shows red when digital clipping is occurring Level The gain adjustment applied to the EQ Range 20 to 20dB In or Out Shows if EQ is switched in or out Selecting Shelf To change a Q parameter to a shelf hold down the BLUE key and press the or keys on the numeric keypad Numeric Entry To enter the values for the EQ parameters as numbers press the NUMBER soft key and use the numeric keypad Otherwise the twelve numeric keys map to the twelve EQ parameters New or Old Whilst adjusting an EQ parameter it is possible to toggle between the new and old settings using the NEW OLD soft key until you press lt Enter gt In or Out Toggle the EQ on and off with the IN OUT soft key CLIP EQUALISATION Copying an EQ The EQ parameters of a clip can be copied to another clip or Range of clips Step 1 Press the EQ key Step 2 Locate the cursor over the source clip Step 3 Press the COPY soft key Step 4 The five soft keys enable deselection of bands if required Step 5 Locate the cursor over the destination clip or define a Range of clips Step 6 Press lt Enter gt VA Notes Parameter Display Current EQ parameters are always shown at the top of the screen when the EQ menu is active helping to see what is active and what values are current
66. oo o o o 31 3 lace Times v ern 31 3 OE ERROR AR A A o BO 31 3 A as 31 4 Master aaa 31 4 LTC Synchronization 4 2 dnd dee 31 4 EDITING WITH MACHINE CONTROL 31 5 THE OFFSET MENU 31 5 SONY ID CONFIGURATION 31 6 Chapter 32 Printing INTRODUCTION pct en 32 2 SETTING PRINTER CHARACTERISTICS 32 2 Printer Compression uoce onec ce 32 3 Printer Types oe ed 32 4 Chapter 33 Macros INTRODUCTION tas a t ce RS 33 2 RECORDING A MACRO u 33 2 Inserting a Pause ao A ore e 33 2 NAMING A MACRO 2 22 2222 33 3 SELECTING A MACRO esses 33 3 RUNNING AMACRO sseses ss 33 3 ERASING MACRO ss 33 4 MACRO FILES surta cu ptt err cn es 33 4 DISPLAYING MACROS pi tad 33 4 Chapter 34 Backup and Restore INTRODUCTION 2 2 2 2 2 2 34 2 BACKING UP sea 34 3 Backup Tapemode Options 34 4 RESTORING peces mE WP d as 34 4 COPYING AND MOVING sess 34 5 Chapter 35 System Files INTRODUCTION 145 me ds x wags 35 2 WORKING WITH QDC SYSTEM CONFIGURA MON FILES cea ho ed ee ato qos 35 2 Editing a Configuration File 35 2 Saving Changes toa File 35 2 QDC NETWORK SETUP 35 3 ODE Setup File eiae rr 35 3 THE MDR CONFIGURATION FILE 35 6 THE SONY ID FILE o 35 8 Destce Duis voee xe ee 35 8 Delay uot uto euet arm ore deals RATS 35 8 Jagshiice 2a vez NE EEE 35 8 THE SYSTEM PAGE ooo 35 9 Print Options sc
67. or Tail on the left hand side of the Binnacle Cross Fades If a fade is placed on a clip and there is another clip layered underneath a cross fade between the two will automatically be invoked Cross fade parameters can be mod ified with the soft key menu functions FADES EDIT MODE 10 19 Fade Targets The result of a FADE is determined by the target key pressed Range Clip Applies an AUTO IN and AUTO OUT Fade to the head and tail of all selected clips See below for details on Auto In and Out Head Fades from the head of the currently selected clip s to the current cursor position Tail Fades from the current cursor position to the tail of the cur rently selected clip s Fade Soft Key Functions Auto In Sets a value in frames for an Automatic Fade at the head of a clip or clips within a Range Pressing any other key ac cepts the entered value immediately Pressing Auto In fol lowed by Enter executes an Auto In fade to the head s of any clips touched by the cursor on selected tracks Auto Out Same as for Auto In but executed for tails of clips X Level These soft keys allows level and time characteristics for fades to be adjusted This enables you to set sudden or gradual X Point SP fades The fade curve is shown on the upper graphics display Capture Captures the fade parameters from the head of the current clip Head NOT available when RANGE activated Cap Captures the fade parameters from the tail of the c
68. pages the Frequency Page and the C Page Press the Freq Q soft key to toggle between them The Frequency Page In the Frequency Page the parametric equaliser bands are displayed from top to bot tom down the Parameter Pad The graphic icons in each band display the current shape and frequency range of each band The soft keys at the left of each band are used to switch the band IN or OUT and to select the frequency range or shape ofthe filter Press the SETUP soft key on the right of the Parameter Pad to select the func tion of the soft key on the left of each band Pressing the SETUP key once enables frequency range selection The vertical bars in the icons flash Press the soft key on the left of the band to move the filter to select a new band low low mid high mid or high frequency EQUALISER 8 5 EQ Flat PARAMETER PAD Press the SETUP key a second time to enable shape selection The shape icons flash Press the soft key at the left of the band to select the shape low shelf notch band pass reject and high shelf Press the SETUP key again to return to the default state in which the soft key to the left of each band is used to switch the band IN or OUT of circuit The rotary controls on the left control filter gain with a range of 18dB The rotary controls on the right control the centre or corner frequency depending on the filter type The rotary control at the bottom left controls the gain make up for the ent
69. plus the names of the10 macros within this bank Name of Name of Name of Hame af Name of Macro Macro Macro Macro Macro Hame of Bark Name of Mame of Mame of Name af Name of Macro Macro Macro Macro Macro In this mode pressing any of the 10 normal soft key buttons will activate the macro assigned to that soft key If the Bank key is pressed and released the display switches to show the available banks and the Bank key is illuminated Name of Name of Name of Name af Mame of Bank Bank Bank Bank Bank Name of Name of Name of Name af Mame of Bank Bank Bank Bank Bank Selecting one of the soft keys at this point will access that bank of macros and the display will switch to show the macros held in that Bank The Bank key is extin guished and the 10 soft keys are now used to trigger the individual macros If the Bank key is pressed and HELD the display switches to show the available banks and the Bank key is illuminated as before Selecting one of the soft keys at this point will access that bank of macros and the display will switch to show the Macros held in that Bank However now when one of the 10 soft keys is pressed the Macro itself is not fired but the Macros in the Bank corresponding to that soft key are displayed This allows the user to hold the Bank key and inspect the contents of each bank When the Bank key is released the Bank key LED is extinguished and the display remains on the last selected M
70. pressing the Patch I O key Select the feeds to be patched to by using the Track Feed and or Live Feed keys at the top of the Station or you can use the feed keys already selected Press the Patch soft key Select the input type soft keys ANALOG DIGITAL and AES MADI Select any number of physical inputs by holding one down selecting others or double pressing the last in a range then re leasing the original The physical inputs are patched to the feeds successively until the feeds are all used If the physical inputs are all used before the feeds are then patching starts again from the first physical input For example selecting only one input will cause it to be patched to all selected Feeds Selecting two inputs will cause them to be alternately patched to the selected feeds PATCHING INPUTS 5 5 Input Gain and Phase Analog and Digital inputs can have digital gain or attenuation and phase reversal applied at the input Inputs are selected by first selecting the feeds that they are patched to To set input gain Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 First enter the Patch I O Menu by pressing the Patch I O key Select the feed or feeds whose inputs you wish to adjust Press the Gain soft key If all the inputs of the selected feeds have the same gain value that value is shown in the LCD below the Gain soft key as an absolute value ABS otherwise this field is initialised to 0 dB and is dis played as a relative v
71. re 3 7 Ell Sasse a ee 10 9 Fill Range Clip 24 24542 gen 25 16 Filer a een 8 6 Fixed Reference Level 6 7 a ee 8 5 BEE Oke Mahe ou fal az 36 2 FMC Command Line Options 35 15 39 8 FMC Version Number 35 24 Poldinp cavidad 11 5 11 7 Follow matar t eI 21 3 Mt E ROUEN MD as 7 3 INDEX Index iv Format Configuring Bus Formats Monitoring Formatting a Drive 2 3 2 2 Frame Rate PEQUE sende From iia G Ga ds Hysteresis cadimib 12a ee Ringe we res en Threshold epi nar Ghost te ohare Savon dee oad Raed at GUSTA ait exes ha aa Glide CUE Global une sa a ed eee A arte in oo eee Hash Prompt ios Hatch Prompt i pap Head AA ados ee WO names ssi so AER LAG Euh IBM uso her ME sien pM Import Saint anata eS aor ns Fed er ar DEO atin dnl rada INP SYNC use iaa Inputs 2 a Input Indicator un ers Vu Input Trim ves ve ek PT Insert Beat Marks 2 esu Insert Returns INDEX 8 11 9 3 30 4 Insert Space AA ees 10 10 Inserts in Monitoring 6 6 Installation Electrical ooo arcada 38 3 Mechanical lt A 38 2 IN E ot dada So RAUS 9 3 30 4 Internal and External SCSI Devices 38 8 I O Conte IXT Ns 35 11 IP ADDRESS 2 052 252220441 35 3 Isolate m wien ape ted SA 25 10 J JOE ciara eo Sys Wears AUS 4 7 Joystick aaa 13 6 Jump A NA aea 4 8 4 9 K Keep A od S 29 2 Keep Borrowed as acus Ue 26 5 Keep Play
72. repeat the dialogue Cursor Places the BWF at the current cursor position subsequent BWFs will repeat the dialogue All Places all imported BWFs at their sync times Never Places all imported BWFs at the current cursor location Importing Other File Formats IMPORT EXPORT A new open file exchange program has been initiated with the introduction of the MLA file exchange format ML4 and ML3 are both supported by the external file conversion software packages Media Magic and AV Transfer Fairlight are actively moving towards use of PC based software for file format conversion for speed of both operation and updates and users requiring file format conversion should access information on these packages through their respective websites Media Magic for Apple Macintosh www darkmatterdigital com AV Transfer for Microsoft Windows www avtransfer net Contact your Fairlight distributor for more information Station supports WaveFrame AKAI and OMF file formats as standard Please refer to the Fairlight File Exchange Manual for more details 29 8 EXPORT The Export Menu is used to allow audio to be exported from a Project in the fol lowing formats e WAV Broadcast WAV Fairlight ML Fairlight DL To access the File Exchange Menu press the Export key on the console Export Key Figure 3 Export Key Export Menu Soft Key Options Dubber Export Exports a file to the root of the current disk drive which can be read
73. saved to MK file The following procedure is performed in the Edit Macro Menu Step 1 Press the File soft key Step 2 Select one of the macro file functions as listed below The File Menu performs similar functions to a PC or Macintosh file menu LOAD Load allows you to select a macro file from one of the drives and load it into the system This will erase the previous set of macro keys SAVE Save will update the currently loaded file to include changes SAVE AS This will save the current set of macro keys as a new file The system will prompt you for a destination and name UNLOAD Unload will clear all macro keys DISPLAYING MACROS The contents of a Macro can be displayed on the LCD by pressing the To Panel key ERASING A MACRO 34 1 NOTES 34 2 Chapter 34 Backup and Restore INTRODUCTION The Backup Menu allows multiple projects and macro files to be transferred to an Exabyte tape or another disk The backup device can be any hard disk optical disk or Exabyte tape drive connected to the system either directly or via a network To enter the Backup Menu hold down the BLUE key and press the B Up key Backup Key Figure 1 Backup Key The functions provided in the Backup menu are as follows BACKUP This is the same as copy but a BU backup file is also created The BU file lists the files backed up and the locations they came from This is stored in the destination where all the marked files have been copied
74. the desired function Step 3 Press Enter The functions available are STRETCH VARI and PITCH as described above STRETCH Stretching and compressing clips in time while maintaining pitch VARI Stretching and compressing clips by varying the pitch PITCH Changing the pitch without changing the duration INTRODUCTION 20 3 STRETCH AND VARI Selecting an Algorithm The STRETCH and PITCH functions use algorithms which must be selected and op timized depending on signal content for the best results Step 1 Press the Algorithm soft key Step 2 Use the jogger wheel or and keys to select the desired algo rithm Step 3 Press Enter The algorithms are as follows VOICE 1 Deep male voice VOICE2 Female voice or high male voice POP 1 Percussive Pop music POP 2 Pop music CLASSIC 1 Percussive Classical music CLASSIC2 Classical music There are optional high performance third party plug in algorithms available Contact your distributor for more details Selecting the Scale The STRETCH and PITCH algorithms have a Scale parameter which must be opti mized for the best results Start adjusting around 50 and increase the value to reduce frequency wobble or decrease to reduce flanging and phasing Step 1 Press the SCALE soft key Step 2 Use the jogger wheel or numeric keys to enter the desired scale Step 3 Press Enter Percent The STRETCH and VARI functions can be activated by entering a value from 2596 to 40096 1009
75. the physical input for a talkback microphone Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Talk key Step 2 Press the Patch Source soft key in the LCD menu The track feed selection keys are used to select physical analog inputs The input ifany that is currently patched to the talkback channel is brightly lit Inputs that are patched to other paths are flashing Inputs that available to patch to this talkback channel are dimly illuminated Step 3 Press a track feed selection key to patch a physical input to the talkback channel This replaces the previously selected patch INTRODUCTION The level of the monitor speakers is dimmed automatically when Talkback is en gaged To set the dim attenuation hold down the DIM key and turn the jog wheel to set the amount of attenuation Auto Cue The Auto Cue feature enables automatic dimming of the control room monitors when the transport is stopped or not locked to timecode This is achieved by auto matically turning on the talkback circuit This feature ensures that the faders are controlled by valid automation data before playing back an automated mix at full level To enable Auto Cue hold down a BLUE key and press a Talkback key Press the Auto Cue soft key to toggle Auto Cue on and off TALKBACK DIM 16 1 NOTES 16 2 Chapter 16 Name INTRODUCTION The Name Menu allows you to rename Projects tracks and clips and to setup seed names using the alphanumeric keys When a name
76. this can be done with M1 online Step 2 Hold down the BLUE key and press Import Open a library if one is not already open Step 3 Locate the transport so the cursor lies on the sync point of the clip Also check that only one track is selected Step 4 Select KEEP or BORROW Step 5 Select the desired target track it is a good idea to make a note of the destination track before using the import menu The clip will be placed on the destination track with the sync point under the cursor Importing a Range of Clips Step 1 Locate the transport so the cursor lies at the point you want the Range of clips to go Step 2 Hold down the BLUE key and press Import Open a library if one is not already open Step 3 Define a Range of clips and tracks Step 4 Align the cursor position in the library to the required sync point in the Project Step 5 Select KEEP or BORROW The clips will be imported to the Project on their original tracks IMPORT EXPORT LOCKING A LIBRARY TO PICTURE When the Import Menu is selected M1 will automatically go offline It is possible to put Ml online with an offset to the current library position by using the LOCK function This enables you to audition a sound to picture before importing Step 1 Step2 Press the LOCK soft key to audition to picture Pressing the LOCK key again will turn off the lock function This enables you to locate to a different sound for audition ing IMPORTI
77. this parameter for automation Fader To Boom While BLUE Faders To is active the Boom soft key may be chosen All channel faders now control the boom level The Mute key toggles the boom ON and OFF The fader control may be automated and will record data for the boom level param eter Use the enable key next to the Master fader to enable this parameter for auto mation CHANNEL FADERS See Sidecar Operation on page 13 2 for operating instructions for the optional fader Sidecar CHANNEL FADERS 8 1 NOTES 8 2 Chapter 8 Parameter Pad INTRODUCTION The Parameter Pad provides all the detailed processing control needed for one signal path Signal paths are called to the Parameter Pad and the Master Fader one at a time to have their parameters adjusted Multi Trim allows multiple paths to be controlled at once see Multi Trim on page 11 7 for more details Link groups and fader groups allow groups of faders to be adjusted from a single control see Grouping on page 11 2 for more details CALLING A SIGNAL PATH The Call key may be used at any time to select any signal path to the Master Fader Stepl Step 2 Step 3 Call Follow Pressing and releasing Call causes the function to latch on In this mode the Feed or Bus key representing the signal path currently on the Master Fader is illuminated Pressing any other selection key brings that signal path to the Master Fader whereupon its key is i
78. to instantly place all parameters in Read Transitions When the automation system makes a transition from Write or Trim to Read Glide out data will be written to smooth the parameter transition as described below When a transition is made from Preview to Write Glide In data will be written The Glide times are set in the Utils menu The Glide In transition starts before the point that the system entered record In point minus Glide In time and finishes at the point where the system entered record The Glide Out transition starts at the point where the system leaves record and finishes at the Out point plus the Glide Out time Write Trim to Read Touch Snap Glide Out When a Touch Snap enabled parameter is released the system returns to Read and the parameter values are ramped from the most recently written value to the previ ously recorded value over the Glide Out time Punch Out Glide Out Parameters currently in Write or Trim return to Read and the parameter values are ramped from the most recently written value to the previously recorded value over the Glide Out time when the Out key is pressed or when the transport passes the Active Out point AUTO key Glide Out Parameters currently in Write or Trim return to Read and the parameter values are ramped from the most recently written value to the previously recorded value over the Glide Out time when the AUTO key is pressed STOP or Mix ON key On Stop Hold Retur
79. to the value recorded in the mix snapshot CREATING A SIMPLE MIX FADERS ONLY Step 1 Press the Mix ON key to enable mix automation Step 2 Establish a basic static mix including bus assignments fader levels EQ panning and dynamics These static settings are saved with the rest of the mix CREATING A SIMPLE MIX FADERS ONLY Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Press the Enable key to enter the Enable menu Press the Fader soft key to enable recording fader mix data Press the Mix key to display the Mix menu Press the On STOP soft key until Event is selected This determines what happens to the parameter value when you drop out of automation record by pressing the transport STOP key The Event setting tells the mixer to hold the last recorded value until the next previously recorded event occurs If no events are encountered the parameter will remain at the same value Call the signal path to the Master Fader and press the AUTO key next to the fader or press the AUTO key next to the fader you wish to control on a Sidecar The WRITE indicator next to the fader will be illuminated Press PLAY and move the fader as required to adjust the balance Press the transport STOP key to stop recording automation Notice that the fader indicator displays READ Rewind press PLAY and audition the changes you have made Watch the fader move as it reproduces the moves you recorded You can continue to add fader moves u
80. two Master Sidecars are fitted to a Station system all the keys in the Fader Set section and the Soft Controls section mirror each other Each corresponding key on the two Sidecars has the same state of illumination and either one can be used to switch a function The joystick on a secondary master sidecar is only active ifthe currently called signal path appears in the faderset associated with that sidecar To use the joystick on either sidecar press the CALL key next to any fader on the sidecar The joystick now con trols the pan for that signal path 13 10 DUAL SIDECARS 14 1 NOTES 14 2 Chapter 14 Meters INTRODUCTION Signal level metering is available within the mixer video display and with option ex ternal hardware meters Station Main Meters The DREAM Station may be fitted with an optional Main Meter Panel The Sta tion Main Meter Panel includes eight 55mm multi segment bargraph LED signal level meters plus eight LCD meter legend windows The Station Main Meter Panel displays the signal level of each element of the Main bus The name of each element is displayed in the LCD window below each bargraph The number of active bargraphs is determined by the user defined format of the Main bus For example if the Main bus format is stereo only LEFT and RIGHT bus element meters are displayed If the Main bus format is 7 1 all eight elements are displayed These are LEFT INNER LEFT CENTRE INNER RIGHT RIGHT LE
81. use of a Range Use the From and To keys on either side of the Jog wheel to set ranges Range mode may be turned on or off by pressing the Range ON key to the right of the Binnacle or by double pressing a Binnacle edit key Selecting a Range using Cursor Position Step 1 Locate to the time at which you wish to start the range Step 2 Press the From key Some functions start with FROM auto matically Step 3 Locate to the time at which you wish to end the range Step 4 Press the To key The duration of the range is indicated on the screen time display above the track display and the range is high lighted on the track display Many functions start making a range as soon as you enter the function To change the FROM point just press the From key at any time Selecting a Range Between Gaps To quickly set a range from the start to the end of a clip or clips use the BLUE Gap From To keys The Blue Gap function is related to the From To range setting func tion which shares these keys The BLUE Gap From key sets the beginning of the range to the first piece of silence to the left ofthe cursor on the most recently selected track The BLUE Gap To key sets the end of the range to the first piece of silence to the right of the cursor on the most recently selected track This function is identical to the Prev Next Gap soft key function on the Range Menu which is available when the From or To keys are held down Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key a
82. work on the system while powered up unless you are authorized by Fairlight to do so As a matter of practice always touch the external chassis of the system be fore opening the front panel If cards are not handled under anti static procedures your machine may sustain damage which could either cause a complete failure or may cause intermittent crashes and subsequent system failure When handling cards please ensure that they are placed in anti static bags when not in the system For shipment purposes electronic modules should be placed in an anti static bag and then suitably surrounded with loose packaging materials in a sol id card board box Cards shipped to Fairlight without the correct anti static pack aging will have their warranty voided If you have any enquiries on this matter please feel free to contact your local Fairlight office or distributor ENVIRONMENT The system is designed to be operated in a clean air conditioned environment Gen erally an area comfortable for people 20 C 24 C should be suitable The rack mounted unit uses fans for ventilation Users may find it desirable to install these units away from the operator console location Make sure that the rack unit has access for cool air to flow through the opening on the front of the QDC Engine and warm air to be expelled from the back The Sta tion Console requires access for cool air to flow through the underside Do not place the console on carpet or any other surfa
83. 0 Option Description p lt t gt Specify the IP address for a network connected machine run ning MSAT for testing q lt HHH HHH HHH H gt Specify the IP address for the QDC engine f s lt gt Run jog and editor commands over TCP IP Specify mixer type where 0 for satellite 1 for station48 2 for console 3 for station24 Disables stop on wrong USB driver message FMC will still check the drivers still report out of date drivers and will still say that it can t continue but it will continue anyway A typical command line would be C projects mixers fmc fmc exe s1 q192 168 200 21 be projects mixers dreamstart EMU RAW Download When DREAM bat is executed it attempts to load a copy of the current emu raw file from the QDC engine Emu raw contains the 68000 emulator code which is run on the console computer to produce the editor commands transmitted to the QDC en gine via the serial ports and controller cable The emu raw file on the console com puter must be compatible with the current QDC engine software version to enable the disk recorder application to run The current emu raw is included in the QDC software distribution The DREAM bat file uses an ftp command to load the current emu raw This requires TCP IP communication to established and working If the emu raw file in the console computer C VP rojects Mixers EMO System directo ry is not the same as the QDC dd usr cons
84. 1 PESEMENU er ea 4 12 RECORD MENU a re enr ed 4 12 Chapter 5 Patching and Routing INTRODUCTION yr tona t c 5 2 Setting up Your Control Room Monitors 5 2 PATCHING INPUTS 2 2 2 2 2 222222 5 3 Patch Interrosationa 222 cl iaa 5 3 Analog And Digital Inputs 5 3 Patching Physical Inputs To Feeds 5 3 Input Gain and Phase 4 2 7 wicks evo mero 5 5 Patching Bus Elements to Feeds 5 5 Patching to Insert Returns 5 6 Patching To Multiple Signal Paths 5 8 Unpatching Inputs o oo ooo o o o o o 5 9 PATCHING OUTPUTS 2 2 2 2 2 5 10 Patching Bus Outputs sess 5 10 Patching Insert Sends 5 11 Patching Direct Outputs 5 12 Monitor Outputs 3 gow bated otal de 5 14 CONFIGURING BUS FORMATS 5 14 The Format Menu os pss ee 5 14 ASSIGNING SIGNALS TO BUSES 5 15 Assigning Feeds to Buses 5 15 Assigning Sub Buses to the Main Bus 5 16 Ste ASSIBDEa 2 22a d aer RA 5 16 Aux to Main BUS a vue SER Fr 5 17 AS A E ee 5 17 Chapter 6 Monitoring INTRODUCTION S dr cd 6 2 SELECTING CONTROL ROOM MONITOR SPEAKERS var nee 6 2 NAMING CONTROL ROOM SPEAKER SETS 6 2 PATCHING CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT A P d OD de qr 6 3 System AO POMS A 6 3 TRIMMING RELATIVE SPEAKER LEVELS 6 4 SELECTING A CONTROL ROOM MONITOR SOURCE ae ea d p eroe dod 6 4 PATCHING EXTERNAL MONITOR SOURCES6 4 NAMIN
85. 2 Step 4 The speaker mute keys are now used to select each speaker The current speaker mute key is brightly lit Other elements included the specified format are dimly lit Press a speaker mute key to select the element to patch Step 5 Press the Gain soft key and use the jog wheel or keys to adjust the gain in real time or use the numeric keys and press Enter to complete Step 6 Select the speakers to adjust one by one by pressing each speaker mute key and following the gain procedure described above SELECTING A CONTROL ROOM MONITOR SOURCE The monitor source can be selected from one of the following The Main Bus a Sub Bus or an Aux Bus OR external source presets 1 to 16 named ExtSrc by default on the LCD soft keys which can be patched from any physical input allowing monitoring of CD players surround encoders decoders and other external devices The Source Alt key in the Monitor section is used to toggle between the Main bus and the current i e most recently selected alternative source The Source Alt key is illuminated when the alternative source is selected To change the current alternative source Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Source Setup key next to the Monitor Level Control Step 2 Select an alternative source by pressing one of the bus keys or one of the Ext Src soft keys in the LCD menu The alter native source is immediately switched into the monitoring chain PATCHING EXTERNAL MONITOR SO
86. 2 INTERCONNECTING THE CONSOLE AND EN GINES Oe teu e e de TAO ceo 39 2 The Control Cable 39 3 The Ethernet Cable 39 3 STARTING THE SYSTEM 39 3 SYSTEM SHUTDOWN o oo oo o o 39 4 CONSOLE CALIBRATION 39 4 LED Brightness 022 Ee 8 39 4 Encoder Calibration 39 5 Fader Calibration 39 5 LCD Calibrati0N 39 5 Touch Sensor Calibration 39 6 AUTOMATIC START UP 39 6 Windows Start up 0000 39 6 DREAM Salta izada 39 7 DREAM BAT 2 none 39 8 FMC Command Line Options 39 9 EMU RAW Download 39 10 Console Network Configuration 39 10 QDC NETWORK SETUP 39 11 QDC Login Settings zero e Im 39 11 I O CONFIGURATION 39 12 System POLS sas rara 39 12 TABLE OF CONTENTS TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 39 13 SIDECARS oe a Ra 39 13 CONS COM i seek es 39 13 Sidecar Calibrati0N 39 14 TROUBLE SHOOTING 39 14 Chapter 40 Specifications AUDIO I O CONFIGURATION 40 2 Standard I O Configuration 40 3 Channel Allocation Method 40 3 Standard I O Cable Configurations 40 5 QDC VO Connector 6 40 6 Standard I O Cable Pinouts 40 6 Pin Connections for Standard QDC Configura COM M tes A einer RE 40 8 MADI Con
87. 2 2204 21 3 MUTING TRACKS ss u 8 2 0 a 21 3 SAFE wu er a d 21 3 DISABLE a aan ei E 21 3 Chapter 22 Track amp Takes INTRODUCTION 2 222 222 22 2 TRACK MENU arareo paan dena ba as 22 2 SWAP a a Gh n a 22 2 Numbers cular e sang 22 2 MOVE easan de Cs nn hs 22 2 CODY are 22 3 ShadOW AA a a ar 22 3 TAKES MENU burns cara Be 22 3 Chapter 23 Go To INTRODUCTION ads ci iaa e 23 2 GO TO A TIMECODE LOCATION 23 2 TIMECODE CALCULATOR 2 3 2 4 23 3 COTO A MARK eran an et 23 4 FAST MARK LOCATION 22 232 axe arate 23 4 GO TOC LAS T iacta a RR Mead a e it 23 4 GO TO CLIP NAME itr 23 4 ALPHANUMERIC SORTING 23 5 Chapter 24 ADR GPI amp Loop INTRODUCTION Sir er re 24 2 USING THE ADR FUNCTIONS 24 2 SETTING PREROLL AND POSTROLL 24 3 GPEMENLF Wise 24 4 Types OPE au ue p C et 24 4 Typer ON SS qure vue ARS Berka 24 4 Types Simple A A a occa 24 4 Types Record 22 22 24 5 Type PREROLL un u erede om 24 5 Type POSTROU nass adn 24 6 Type ADR REH ae daa al 24 6 Type SABR PLAY S dec S At ca 24 7 EOC BEERS s 1d oc i ncn a RRPOUEN 24 7 Type PREREC a ee 24 7 Type MINING nee ae 24 8 Type CUE MUTE 2 4 hs 24 8 SETTING LOOP MODE 15s px ses ars 24 8 Chapter 25 Automation INTRODUCTION seen 25 2 AUTOMATION BASICS 25 2 MIX ON iran eee oq ERR Ida 25 2 Static Snapshots s cd E ru 25 3 Parameter Enables 25 3 Signal Path Ehables i
88. 3 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED 37 4 STATIC PRECAUTIONS 2 2 2 2 22220 37 4 ENVIRONMENT 22222 2 2 37 4 Chapter 38 Engine Installation MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 38 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 38 3 ENGINE REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS 38 4 System I O Panels 2 244298 ie dos 38 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS XV Audio l O eee 38 5 CABLING 0 0 0 0 en 38 5 External Cable Length Considerations 38 5 Controller Cable 38 5 Ethernet 100BaseT Cable 38 5 Sony 9 pin Cable peste 38 6 VGA Cable i sert uo Bo 38 6 Analogue Audio Cable 38 6 Digital Audio Cables 2 ers 38 6 CONNECTING THE SYSTEM COMPONENTS V Pr ERI MTS 38 6 ENGINE CONFIGURATION 38 7 QDC NETWORK SETUP 38 7 INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL SCSI DEVICES 38 8 Internal SCSI Bus 38 8 External SCSI Bus 38 8 CONFIGURING DISK DRIVES 38 9 Narrow Based Disk Drives 38 9 Configuring The Engine For Narrow Use 38 10 Mixing Wide And Narrow Disk Drives 38 10 Checking for Newly Installed SCSI Devices IEEE 38 11 SETTING UP REMOVABLE MEDIA DEVICES PET PME EM 38 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 38 13 Cleaning The Monitor Screens 38 13 Cleaning The Engine Air Filter 38 13 New Air Filters 22220002 ces 38 13 Chapter 39 Console Installation MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 39
89. 31 kg DIMENSIONS WEIGHT AND POWER REQUIREMENTS 40 31 Power Consumption 300 Watts Fuse Fuse 10A 3AG Antisurge T HRC Ceramic 250V UL only Station Drawings ogoogo NO Vel SPECIFICATIONS 40 32 DIMENSIONS WEIGHT AND POWER REQUIREMENTS 40 33 SPECIFICATIONS Index 1 NOTES INDEX Index ii Index Symbols Numerics 24 and 48 Track Project Compatability 26 7 FED A PO RO List para ah nen O ee ADD wesen de ARAS OS Algorithm engere ll Bayerns a ee o D ele o LO all R al Ss aviae RES Alternate Zoom Alternative Speaker Sets Architecture AIIE a IRAK RH a Atm Key Delays oco seh e Assigning signals to Buses Attack cde E oct re Rs Audio Cable Isaias AudioBase oo a a A Ae ay AUTO ANULO tas ER T SUPE Auto Extended ss is ets the Auton wi toi eee Ve DRYER actes Auto Out AutoCue ner e oe Automation ooooooooo o Automation Lock Window Automation Locked to Video Automation Sta
90. 32 and RS422 signals and is limited to a maximum length of 30 meters pro viding correct attention is paid to signal pairing using twisted pair cable Ensure sufficient slack is left at the console end to ensure movement of the console does not cause undue stress on the connector or cause the connector to partially dis connect which can damage the serial drivers When fitting or reconnecting the ca ble ensure that power is off at either the engine or the console The Ethernet Cable The 100BaseT ethernet connection is required for automatic update of console soft ware during boot up and transmission of mixer control data If no network is present the console can be connected to the QDC engine with the cross over wired ethernet cable supplied If a network is present the ethernet cable can be connected viaa 100BaseT hub or other network infrastructure For optimum performance use shielded CAT5 cable and shielded RJ45 connectors See Ethernet on page 42 25 for wiring details STARTING THE SYSTEM CONSOLE INSTALLATION Figure 3 The DREAM Start Splash Screen Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 39 4 Power on the QDC engine first press the switch on the rear of the Engine to the right a red light will appear Next press and hold the button on the front of the Engine for 5 seconds a beep will be heard and the system will start to power on Power on the video monitors Comprehensive start up diagnostics are displayed o
91. 35 Use and or jog Press En ter to confirm selection All feet and frames measurements are based on a 24 frame per second film speed regardless of the timecode format you have actually set TC Format Sets the frame format for video sync or chasing timecode Use the and keys or jogger to choose 24 fps 25 fps NTSC DropFrame DF or NTSC Non Drop Frame ND Press Enter to confirm your selection NTSC When ND or DF is selected for the previous soft choice this allows you to determine whether the correct frame rate is 29 97 or 30 frames per second This field determines at which frame rate your selected sample rate will be accurately reproduced For example if you choose a sample rate of 44100 Hz and you set this field to 30 the system will run at precisely 44100 Hz when 30 frame timecode is used for synchronization But if you use standard NTSC video at 29 97 fps as a sync source the system will run down to 44056 Hz This may be desirable if you plan to return the audio to a 30 fps environment later Often Projects that are finished on film or for CD mastering require a setting of 30 but Projects finished on video normal ly use 29 97 Range Determines what happens to Ranges when changing menus Modes In Auto Mode Ranges are always switched off when entering a new mode unless the new mode must have a Range this is the option chosen by most operators In Manual Mode Ranges are always preserved unless the new
92. 4 eon 25 4 The Enable MatriX o o 25 4 Parameter Status o o o oooo oo 25 5 Recording Mix Data 22 4 4 eee es 25 6 Transitions ea pev Eo RE 25 7 Automation Playback 25 8 CREATING A SIMPLE MIX FADERS ONLY 25 8 CHANGING A MIX WITH TOUCH WRITE 25 9 PROTECTING MIX DATA WITH ISOLATE AND SAFE anda Eee bg ri dada vds 25 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS xiii Automation Safe ooo o 25 10 Automation Isolate 25 10 PUNCHING IN AND OUT OF AUTOMATION RECORD ime e aono des terere 25 11 Manual Punch In 25 11 Automatic Automation Punch In 25 11 Active IN and Active OUT 25 12 PUCHA ad eate dorum toco S Des 25 12 LINKING AUDIO AND MIX RECORD WITH PRIME 2 aA ere AERE SIDE eA aie 25 12 PREVIEWING MIX MOVES 25 13 Active In Out from Preview 25 14 Fill Range from Preview 25 14 Using Mix ON with Preview 25 15 SAVING AND LOADING MIXES 25 15 Saving a MiX a ea 25 15 Loading a MiX scr 25 15 Deleting a MIX pila sd ih a 25 15 Creating a New MIX lees eee 25 15 MX UNIDO a oa 25 16 THE MIX MENU eee n 25 16 THE BLUE UTILS MENU 25 17 MUET ERIM helei RReceReiis 25 17 TRIMMING A MIX WITH MULTI TRIM 25 18 AUTOMATION WITH LINK GROUPS 25 19 DATA STORAGE 2 28 a Xx ccs 25 19 RUTOCHE 4 a ates dE RS IS T Pra 25 20 Chapter 26 Project Management INTRODUC
93. 40 3 Standard I O Configuration Con 1 Con 2 Con 3 The QDC is normally supplied with the standard set of I O options as shown be low This configuration provides 16 analog inputs 16 analog outputs 16 digital in puts and 16 digital outputs per QDC card QDC Card 1 0 Daughter Board 1 Al1 Analog Input 8 channels I O Daughter Board AO1 Analog Output 8 channels 1 O Daughter Board AES1 AES I O 4 stereo in 8 4 stereo out 1 0 Daughter Board AES1 AES I O 4 stereo in amp 4 stereo out 1 O Daughter Board 5 AO1 Analog Output 8 channels 1 O Daughter Board AI1 Analog Input 8 channels Figure 8 QDC With Standard 1 O Option Fitted Channel Allocation Method SPECIFICATIONS When the QDC engine starts up it checks the fitted hardware to determine the channels allocated to each card and subsequently to the I O connectors on the rear of the unit If the card is a MADI card channels are allocated to the card depending on the sampling rate and the MADI mode see MADI Configuration on page 40 10 For non MADI cards the engine applies the following procedure 1 Check QDCI Slotl if AI1 fitted allocate 1st set of 8 analog inputs Check QDC1 Slot6 if AI1 fitted allocate next set of 8 analog inputs Check QDC1 Slot2 if AOI fitted allocate 1st set of 8 analog outputs Check QDC1 Slot5 if AOI fitted allocate next set of 8 analog outputs Check QDC1 Slot4 if AOI fitted allocate next set of 8
94. 6 Step 7 Press the Mix ON key to enable mix automation Establish a basic static mix including bus assignments fader levels EQ panning and dynamics These static settings are saved with the rest of the mix Press the Mix or Enable key to display the Mix or Enable menus When the Mix or Enable menus are active the illuminated selec tion keys display the signal paths currently enabled for Punch in automation recording Press any selection key to toggle the enable state of that signal path This selection can be used to protect previously recorded automation data from accidental modification You can also use the soft switches above the faders on the Sidecar to enable the signal paths associated with those faders Press the Enable key to enter the Enable menu Press the Fader soft key to enable recording fader mix data only on the selected paths You can enable any parameter you wish to record Press PLAY then press the In key Notice that the indicator next to the fader changes to WRITE to show that you are currently record ing mix data Move the faders as required to adjust the mix Press the Out key to punch out of automation record The auto mation indicator returns to READ and the fader returns to its ini tial position or the position previously recorded Use Glide Out in the Utils menu to smooth this transition You can also drop out of automation record by pressing the STOP key or by toggling the MIX On key Use Th
95. 6 is no change The function is performed as soon as this value is en tered The location of the cursor on the selected clip will be maintained with the new clip Step 1 Locate the cursor over the source clip Step 2 Press the PERCENTAGE soft key Step 3 Enter a percentage value using the jogger wheel or numeric keypad Step 4 Press Enter TIME COMPRESSION amp EXPANSION 20 4 Target Time The STRETCH and VARI functions can be activated by entering a target length for the clip The function is performed as soon as the time is entered Step 1 Locate the cursor over the source clip Step 2 Press the TARGET soft key Step 3 Enter a target time using the jogger wheel or numeric keypad The target time appears in the upper console display Step 4 Press Enter Pressing the TARGET soft key repeatedly brings up target durations corresponding with some useful ratios such as 24 to 25 and 44 1K to 48K and these can be further edited Pitch using Varispeed The VARI function can be activated by entering the pitch shift in semitones and cents hundredths of a semitone The function is performed as soon as the pitch is entered Step 1 Locate the cursor over the source clip Step 2 Press the MEASURE soft key to toggle between time and pitch Step 3 Press the SEMITONES soft key Step 4 Enter the pitch using the jogger wheel or numeric keypad Note Holding down the BLUE key and pressing the and keys will increment in whole s
96. 8 3 The Master Kc ati 8 3 The Fold ey re pcd eee Rus 8 3 EQUALISER cdit o aa 8 3 Navigating the Parametric EQ page 8 4 E O AE 8 5 Navigating the Filter Page 8 6 THE SURROUND PANNER 8 7 Using the Pannen s eS rhe pen AES 8 7 LR and FB Pan ControlS 8 8 Trackball ire aciei d Reb Rehd 8 8 Pan ON OFF a tia da as 8 8 Diverse Control i oso een 8 8 The Spread Control mostr 8 9 Rotate Control conta ridad 8 9 BOOMS een A ema 8 10 DYNAMICS tcc cds rai er 8 10 Compressor ParameterS 8 11 Limiter Parameters i ce ei dn 8 12 Expander Parameters 2 242222 8 12 Gate Paramelersnsa vols x e a er as v 8 12 AUXILIARY SENDS oidos Fo ate oop o 8 13 Auxiliary Send Controls 8 13 MUETFTREV Saa a ase o dac 8 14 Chapter 9 Recording INTRODUCTION ica x 9 2 PROJECT SET UP ore fe dotted aia 9 2 Project Sample Rate 9 2 Recording Bit Depth u 24 4 4 9 2 Selecting A Sync Source 9 3 Input Sync AU 22 2 u eA Cj roe Rs 9 3 Project Frame Rate va daa 2 a 9 3 PATCHING INPUTS TO TRACK FEEDS 9 4 Input Gain and Phase 9 5 ARMING TRACKS x 2 0 40202 o Det 9 5 Atm onthe Flys sais seb dep E quod 9 6 Metering Input Levels 9 6 RECORDING u Rr rm ndn 9 6 Recording Types cvs cue cave eas Es 9 7 ARM M de va au CR 9 7 Monitoring Inputs us 384 4 2 220 0 9 7 Auto Extend Ca breue tesa rer hoe ee 9 9
97. 9 10 D out 11 12 D out 13 14 D out 15 16 SPECIFICATIONS 40 10 MADI Configuration In QDC software version 17 1 MADI cards provide 32 channels of I O at all sam pling rates At 96 kHz the MADI interface employs high density framing as de scribed below In QDC software version 17 2 and above MADI cards support various I O config urations as described below The number of I O channels available on each MADI card output is determined by a combination of the sampling rate of the current project and the MADI mode en vironment variables set in the nvr aman_cfg file The default configuration provides 56 channels at 44 1 48kHz and 28 channels at 96kHz Inputs automatically conform to the incoming signal format MADI Modes MADI cards will operate in one of the following modes Sample Rate I O Channels Framing EE d E 44 1 48K 56 channels Normal No variables set 44 1 48K 64 channels Normal MADI_HIGHDENSITY 96K 28 channels Normal No variables set 96K 28 channels Legacy MADI96K_LEGACY 96K 32 channels Normal MADI9GK_HIGHDENSITY 96K 32 channels Legacy MADI96K_HIGHDENSITY MADI96K_LEGACY 96K 24 channels Normal MADI96K_24PER 96K 24 channels Legacy MADI96K_24PER MADI96K_LEGACY In order for MADI to work both receiving and sending equipment must be using the same modes These modes are explained below MADI Density and Framing At 44 1k 48k the MADI frame can co
98. AES MADI currently avail able are dimly lit Outputs of the selected type Analog AES MADI that are not fitted are unlit The outputs can be selected for one bus element at a time The Speaker Mute key of the current bus element is illuminated green Speaker mute keys for bus elements already patched flash off to dim green Speaker mute keys for bus elements not currently patched are illu minated dim green Each bus element may be patched to a single output or multiple outputs Press the SINGLE MULTI soft key to select single or multi mode In SINGLE mode the current bus element is advanced automati cally when an output is selected Press a track key to select the out put for the current bus element The bus elements advance in the following order Left Left Cen tre Centre Right Centre Right Left Surround Centre Sur round Right Surround Boom Elements that are not in the current bus or group format are not displayed To skip the current bus element press the Next soft key To remove patching for the current bus element and leave it with no output press the Blank soft key PATCHING OUTPUTS In MULTI mode outputs for the selected bus element may be tog gled ON or OFF by pressing the corresponding Track keys If the key is flashing pressing the key will remove it from its current source and patch it to the current element Press a track key to add it to the outputs for the current bus element To advance to
99. Break key Pressing the Pause Break key will always direct the keyboard output to the QDC engine The I O Config TXT File The I O Config txt file specifies what I O hardware is fitted in your QDC engine This file must be edited to allow the Station to properly address the physical I O hardware The I O Config txt file is stored in C Projects Mixers EMO Data direc tory Open the file with the Notepad text editor define the physical I O as described in the file You can also name individual I Os which will then bring their names up on the FAT channel when you patch them System Ports System output ports can only be accessed from the Monitor Setup Patch Outputs menu Using system ports for control room monitors prevents the operator from in advertently patching signals direct to the power amplifier inputs To define a system port enter an attribute value of 1 as described in the I O Config file The file contents are similar to the following e TN I O configuration There are three types of I O 1 is Analog 2 is AES 3 is MADI ee First define the number of different types of I O 4 IO CONFIG type inputs outputs where IO CONFIG 1 16 8 IO CONFIG 2 32 16 IO CONFIG 3 0 0 would configure the system with 16 analog IPs 8 analog outputs 32 digital IPs 16 digital OPs and no MADI rs E dc lu Lee a epe ai These ports are then
100. Bus and Sub Buses may be configured in mono stereo or multi channel surround formats The Auxiliary Buses may be configured as mono or stereo Each bus comprises individual bus element signal paths from one up to a maximum of eight for the Main and Sub Buses or up to a maximum of two for Aux Buses Bus formats must be configured prior to use Bus Selection Keys Bus Element Selection Keys Figure 4 Monitor and Bus Keys The Format Menu The Format Menu is used to set the format i e the number and type of independent bus elements comprising each bus Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the bus Format key Step 2 Select one or more of the Main or a Sub or Aux Bus by pressing the Main Sub or Aux keys Step 3 Available formats for the selected buses are displayed on the LCD Press a soft key to select the format required The formats available for Main and Sub Buses are Mono Stereo LCR LCRS LCRSS L C R LS RS CONFIGURING BUS FORMATS L C R LS RS B 6 1 L C R LS CS RS B 5 7 L LC C RC R LS RS B and OFF T 1 Note that the Main bus can not be set to OFF it must have a for mat of at least Mono The formats available for Aux Buses are Mono Stereo and OFF The Main Bus cannot be defined as OFF Bus elements are assigned automatically from a finite pool of 16 for Station 48 and 12 for Station 24 As formats are defined for each bus the number of available bus elements is reduced The number of re
101. COPY edit Step 1 Press either the Cut or Copy key to select the edit mode Step 2 Select the desired track s If only one track is to be edited double press its track key to ensure no other tracks are selected Step 3 Locate the transport so the cursor lies over the desired edit point Clips that will be edited are highlighted in red Step 4 Hold down the required edit target key Range Clip Head or Tail on the left hand side of the Binnacle Step 5 Locate the transport so the cursor lies over the destination edit point Select an alternative destination track if desired Step 6 Let go of the edit target key to paste the clip s Binnacle editing allows CUT and COPY to be achieved as a one handed or two hand ed edit To perform a one handed edit hit the edit target key Range Clip Head or Tail to COPY or CUT then hit enter to paste To perform a two handed edit hold down the edit target key Range Clip Head or Tail to COPY or CUT then release it to paste as described in the steps above CUT AND COPY EDIT MODES 10 7 Cut Edit Targets The result of a CUT edit is determined by the target key pressed The following ex amples illustrate how Cut works using a single clip with one handed editing Range Clip The entire clip is removed from the track and placed on the clipboard When Enter is pressed the clip is placed on the cur rently selected track Head The section of the clip from the head to the cursor is c
102. DO PIN 4 GND STATION WIRING AND CONNECTION DETAILS 40 15 GPIO Description General Purpose I O Connector D 15 Female 15 Pin D Type Signal 15 Pin D Type Signal Connector Connector PIN 1 GP In 1 PIN 9 GND PIN 2 GP In 2 PIN 10 GND PIN 3 GP In 3 PIN 11 GND PIN 4 GP In 4 PIN 12 GND PIN 5 GP Out 1 PIN 13 GND PIN 6 GP Out 2 PIN 14 GND PIN 7 GP Out 3 PIN 15 GND PIN 8 GP Out 4 Plugins I O Description Optional Plugins Audio I O 8 balanced pairs AES EBU digital audio input 8 balanced pairs AES EBU digital audio output Note that this connector is reversed to allow pin to pin connection to a QDC Digital I O connector Connector 50 Pin D Female GND Channel 17 33 50 Digital Output 1 2 16 32 49 Digital Output 3 4 15 31 48 Digital Output 5 6 14 30 47 Digital Output 7 8 13 29 46 Digital Input 1 2 12 28 45 Digital Input 3 4 11 27 44 Digital Input 5 6 10 26 43 Digital Input 7 8 9 25 42 Digital Output 9 10 8 24 41 Digital Output 11 12 7 23 40 Digital Output 13 14 6 22 39 Digital Output 15 16 5 21 38 Digital Input 9 10 4 20 27 Digital Input 11 12 3 19 26 Digital Input 13 14 2 18 25 Digital Input 15 16 SPECIFICATIONS 40 16 QDC WIRING AND CONNECTION DETAILS The following information contains all the wiring details necessary fo
103. DREAM Station Installation and User Manual QDC Software Version 17 2 DREAM Software Version 1 2 Part No DBE1100 1D Document No 224 nan I pae am DIGITAL AUDIO SOLUTIONS 1 Important Notice COPYRIGHT The material in this document is copyright to Fairlight ESP Pty Ltd and may not be quoted or re produced in any form without written permission from the company Fairlight is a trademark of Fairlight ESP Pty Ltd All other trademarks are the property of their re spective Owners LIMITED WARRANTY POLICY All the software and hardware provided with or purchased especially for Fairlight products has been tested for functionality Fairlight ESP Pty Ltd will make its best efforts to correct reported defects for future releases subject to technical practicabilities Fairlight ESP will also replace any defective media on which software has been delivered provided that the item to be replaced is returned to the dealer who supported the product within 90 days of purchase Fairlight ESP Pty Ltd makes no warranty or representation either expressed or implied with respect to the system s performance or fitness for a particular purpose In no event will Fairlight ESP Pty Ltd be liable for direct or indirect damages arising from any defect in the product or its documentation Further Fairlight ESP Pty Ltd will not accept any liability for any programs sounds audio recording or sequences stored in or used with Fairl
104. EEDS AND BUSES Feeds and Buses can be named from the Call menu Names appear in the mixer dis play on each channel or bus tile Step 1 Press the Call key to enter the Call menu Step 2 Press a feed or bus selection key to call the path to the master fader Step 3 Press the name soft key NAME Step 4 Type a name for the signal path and press Enter Press the Tab key to enter the name and step to the next feed Hold the Shift key and press Tab to move to the previous feed NAMING FEEDS AND BUSES 17 1 NOTES 17 2 Chapter 17 Clip Level INTRODUCTION The LEVEL Menu allows clips to be amplified and attenuated by up to 99dB The gain changes are performed by the system in real time as the audio is output from the machine Applying a level to a clip does not affect the waveform on disk The level function can operate on multiple tracks on clips that lie beneath the cursor and also within a Range The gain shown for a clip is relative to the original waveform For mixer level setting functions see Master Fader on page 7 2 Master Fader on page 7 2 Level Key Figure 1 Level Key Applying a Level Change Step 1 Press the Level key Step 2 Locate the cursor over the clip s or define a Range that whol ly contains the dips The level of a clip is shown in the edit dis play Step 3 Select SET or TRIM and use the jogger wheel numeric keypad or the and keys to set the desired level to enter a negative
105. EM 2 13 SYSTEM SHUTDOWN ees 2 13 USING THE SYSTEM lessen 2 14 Chapter 3 Projects INTRODUCTION 2 2 2222222 3 2 Project Menu Display 52 3 44 3 2 NAVIGATING THE PROJECT MENU 3 4 Opening and Closing a Domain or Device 3 4 Creating a New Project 3 4 Closing a Project za ale 3 5 Opening an Existing Project 3 5 FILES AND FOLDERS 3 5 Creating a New Folder 3 5 Copying Files Or Folders 3 6 Moving Files or Folders 3 6 Renaming Projects and Folders 3 6 Deleting Projects or Folders 3 7 Chapter 4 Tracks amp Transport INTRODUCTION 2 2 2222 2222er 4 2 DISPLAYING TRACKS o o o oooooooooooo 4 2 The Clip sr ascia Iti dae leoi eed 4 3 Mono and Stereo ClipS 4 4 SELECTING TRACKS AND FEEDS 4 4 TIME SCALE AND DISPLAY ZOOMING 4 6 Alternate Zoom Factors 4 6 TRANSPORT CONTROLS ss 4 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS LOOP JOG AND LINEAR JOG 4 7 A A Heres te gs 4 8 JUMP Seb tin a a SEA tds des 4 8 Jump Methods aria e 4 9 LOCATOR FUNCTIONS 4 220 4 9 SELECTING A RANGE ceo ker 0 4 10 Selecting a Range using Cursor Position 4 10 Selecting a Range Between Gaps 4 10 Range Menu 0 0 0 0 eee eee 4 10 Setting Range Modes 4 11 Jumping to To and From Points 4 1
106. Export Administration Regulations as well as end user end use and country destination restrictions issued by U S and other governments For additional information on exporting the SOFTWARE see http www microsoft com exporting 111 gt RSS aN DREAM Station Online Documentation QDC Software Version 17 2 DREAM Station Software Version 1 2 t No DBE1100 1D t No 224 Table of Contents Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXZ This page has been left intentionally blank and may be removed from the printed version of the manual OBTAINING TECHNICAL SUPPORT Users requiring technical support should contact their local Fairlight office or dis tributor Information can also be found on the world wide web at http www fairlightesp com FAIRLIGHT OFFICES WORLD WIDE USA West Coast Fairlight USA 844 North Seward Street Hollywood CA90038 USA Tel 1 323 465 0070 Fax 1 323 465 0080 United Kingdom Fairlight ESP Limited Unit 12 Spectrum House 32 34 Gordon House Road London NW5 1LP England Tel 44 20 7267 3323 Fax 44 20 7267 0919 Germany Fairlight Deutschland Gmbh August Bebel Strasse 26 53 14482 Potsdam Babelsberg Berlin Germany Tel 49 331 721 2930 Fax 49 331 721 2933 Asia Pacific Fairlight ESP Pty Ltd Unit 2 1 Skyline Place Frenchs Forest NSW 2086 Australia Tel 61 2 8977 9999 Fax 61 2 8977 9900 MANUAL ERRORS AND OMISSION USA East Coast F
107. FT SURROUND RIGHT SURROUND BOOM The Station Main Meter Panel displays peak program level Station Sidecar Channel Meters The Station Channel Meter Panel includes twelve 55mm multi segment bargraph LED signal level meters The Station Channel Meter Panel displays the signal level of the feeds associated with the faders in the current Sidecar fader set The meters display feed levels only If a bus or link group is included in a fader set those meters will show no signal Use the fader set keys to display the feeds you wish to meter on the Sidecar The Station Channel Meter Panel displays peak program level PEAK RESET Signal levels exceeding OdBFS on the main meters are indicated by a peak hold dis play where all segments of the meter are illuminated orange To clear this display press the Meters key at the top right of the Station PEAK HOLD The numeric peak levels displayed on the mixer display bus meters have a variable threshold The level at which these values are displayed can be set in the CWProjectAMixerA EMC Data System_Variables txt file Edit the following line in the file PEAK DISPLAY LIMIT 950 The value is from 0 to 1000 in 0 1dB steps where 1000 full scale level In the ex ample above the value of 950 will cause the numeric display to first be shown when the signal level reaches 5dB below full scale 970 will set the threshold to 3dB 990 will set the threshold to 1dB and so on INTRODUCTION 15 1 N
108. G EXTERNAL MONITOR SOURCES 6 5 MONITOR FORMAT 6 5 INSERTS IN MONITORING 6 6 MONITORING CONTROLS 6 6 Monitor Level 6 6 DINE ee ee ee ee ads 6 6 Fixed Reference Level 6 7 Master Mute 2 0 0 0 000 eee eee 6 7 Individual Speaker Mutes 6 7 Monitor Phase Reversal 6 7 SAVING MONITOR SETUPS 6 8 SOROS ante boo tee be 6 8 SIP Defeat ore yanani ed does 6 9 Disk Recorder Solo 6 9 Chapter 7 Master Fader INTRODUCTION seee eA 7 2 OPERATION 224 2 dts t e us 7 2 Calling a Signal Path to the Master Fader 7 2 Fader Follows Selection 7 3 The Master Key ann eode SR xod rms 7 3 SOLO ER RETE S 7 3 Mte a e PA RR EMIL UE 7 5 Th Fold Keya cs ee 7 5 Automation Mode Selection 7 6 Fader Displays Ji sis du same 44 7 6 USING GROUPS oo con 7 7 NAMING FEEDS AND BUSES 7 7 CONTROLLING THE SIGNAL PATH 7 7 Parameter Pad 222 eese 7 7 Input Gain and Phase zu 2250200 Le 7 7 HII TX a a a 7 8 Direct Outs oo oo oo nen 7 8 FADERS TO o o ooooooooo en 7 9 CHANNEL FADERS 7 10 Chapter 8 Parameter Pad INTRODUCTION 2 2 2 2222222 8 2 CALLING A SIGNAL PATH 8 2 Call Follow Le uae gol le 8 2 PARAMETER PAD GENERAL OPERATION 8 3 The Master Fader 2 222222200
109. Holding the BLUE key while jogging increases the jog speed by four times SHUTTLE JUMP 4 8 To shuttle the transport hold down the BLUE key and press JOG SHUT The jogger wheel will then increase and decrease the transport velocity in forward and reverse The PLAY key will illuminate in a steady state when play speed is reached Press the FF or REW keys to reverse the shuttle direction To play at normal speed in reverse press PLAY hold down the BLUE key and press JOG SHUT then press REW The Jump keys provide a fast method of locating forwards and backwards through a Project The Jump keys are located on the Binnacle left and right of the Play Jog key SHUT PLAY REC JOG gt gt Figure 9 Binnacle Transport and Editing Keys SHUTTLE 4 9 TRACKS amp TRANSPORT Jump Methods Holding down one of the Jump keys displays the Jump menu in the lower Console display Selecting one of these menu items will take effect when the Jump key is released and will remain as the jump method until a different method is selected The methods are as follows VARIABLE This enables you to use the jogger wheel or numeric keypad to enter the number of frames the transport will be moved each time a Jump key is pressed Range 0 999 frames CLIP NAME This enables the entry of search criteria in the same manner as for the GO TO CLIP NAME function The same search text is used as the default setting for both the GO TO CLIP NAME and
110. IM 9 1 NOTES 9 2 Chapter 9 Recording INTRODUCTION Station can record up to 48 simultaneous tracks to disk The following chapter de scribes how to configure and then record audio into the system Project Menu Key Setup Menu Key Digi Menu Key Figure 1 Digi and Proj Menu Keys PROJECT SET UP Step 1 Start a new Project by selecting the Proj key and then the NEW soft key Step 2 Use the keyboard to type a name for the Project and press En ter Project Sample Rate The sample rate for a Project is fixed after the first recording is made It is therefore very important to check this before recording Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Digi key Step 2 Press the RATE soft key Step 3 Turn the jogger wheel to select the desired sample rate Step 4 Press Enter Recording Bit Depth The bit depth for each recording is selected using the following steps Unlike the Project rate the bit depth can be changed every time a recording is made into a Project DREAM projects can support multiple bit depths The available bit depth rates are 16 20 and 24 Step 1 Press the ARM key INTRODUCTION 9 3 Step 2 Press the DEPTH soft key to toggle through the 16 20 and 24 bit options Selecting A Sync Source The Station s sample rate clock can be referenced to one of several sync sources The current sync source is displayed at the top right of the track menu The sync indica tor turns red if no syn
111. IMIT 950 The value is from 0 to 1000 in 0 1dB steps where 1000 full scale level In the ex ample above the value of 950 will cause the numeric display to first be shown when the signal level reaches 5dB below full scale 970 will set the threshold to 3dB 990 will set the threshold to 1dB and so on FMC Command Line Options The FMC mixer application is launched by the DREAM bat batch file This file is in turn launched from DREAM Start application on the Windows desktop or in the Windows Startup directory When executed the batch file downloads current con sole software from the QDC engine via ftp and launches the FMC application with a complete set of command line options It may be necessary to edit the batch file to specify the QDC engine IP address if it is different to the default values and to specify the current FMC application name You can also modify other FMC com mand line options as necessary The DREAM start up batch file is located at C Projects Mixers DREAM bat Use the Notepad editor to edit the file Click on the Start menu and select Pro grams gt Accessories gt Notepad and open the DREAM bat file Edit the following entries for QDC IP address and FMC application name as indicated at the top of the file See the examples below set ODC IPADDRESS 192 200 150 15 set FMC APP NAME FMC exe FMC command line options are listed below It should not be necessary to modify these settings in DREAM bat Option Desc
112. IN 22 TxDATP PIN 11 TxWRPN PIN 23 TxWRP PIN 12 HSSLDETn PIN 24 GND PIN 25 SYNC Controller Description Serial interface to Satellite Station and Console Connector 25 pin D Male on Engine Satellite Controller Cable Description QDC Serial interface to Satellite Console Connector 25 pin D Female cable mount 9 pin D Female RS232 cable mount 9 pin D Female RS422 cable mount 25 Pin D Type Signal Pair 9 Pin D Type Connector Connectors PIN 5 CON Tx 1 232 PIN 2 PIN 7 GND 1 232 PIN 5 PIN 3 CON Rx 2 232 PIN 3 PIN 1 GND 2 232 PIN 5 PIN 10 CON Rx POS 3 422 PIN 3 PIN 23 CON Rx NEG_ 3 422 PIN 4 PIN 11 CON Tx POS 4 422 PIN 2 PIN 24 CON Tx NEG 4 422 PIN 1 SHELL GND Drain 422 SHELL SPECIFICATIONS Station Console Controller Cable Description QDC Serial interface to Station Console Connector 25 pin D Female cable mount 9 pin D Female cable mount 25 Pin D Type Signal Pair 9 Pin D Type Connector Connector PIN 1 232 GND 1 PIN 5 PIN 5 232 CON Tx 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 232 CON Rx 2 PIN 3 PIN 11 422 CON Tx POS 3 PIN 8 PIN 10 422 CON Rx POS 4 PIN 7 PIN 24 422 CON Tx NEG 3 PIN 1 PIN 23 422 CON Rx NEG 4 PIN 6 SHELL GND Drain SHELL Satellite Controller External Adapter Cable 40 18 Description Adapter cable for systems upgrading from MFK controllers and MFX engines Connector 37 pin D Female cable mo
113. Level Change mr gn rmm MM finn Figure 2 Display Level Change Step 1 Press the Level key Step 2 Locate the cursor over the clip s or define a Range that wholly contains the clips Step 3 Press the MODE soft key to change to DISPLAY mode Step 4 Select SET or TRIMand use the jogger wheel numeric keypad or the and keys to set the desired display The clip display changes in real time Step 5 Press Enter to make the change permanent Additional information can be displayed in clips on the track display When Info is ON the clip display includes the status of the LEVEL PAN EQ and BIT DEPTH if greater than 16 associated with each clip Press the In o soft key to toggle between ON and OFF Range A number of clips can be altered at the same time using a Range and track selection A range is created using the From and To keys as described in Selecting a Range on page 4 10 When using a Range only clips that are entirely within the Range are affected NOTES It is possible when using the Level Menu to push the level of a clip over digital full scale Check the meters to set the level for just part of a clip then use the SPLIT command to break it into the right sized pieces then set the appropriate levels To create a ramp between different levels in one clip first copy the section whose level is to be changed using the Edit Menu then paste it back on top of its source Change its level as desired the
114. M2 is on line Generally it is better to use video or AES EBU as a Master Reference When M1 or M2 are selected to chase timecode MASTER is used to generate the sample clock from the incoming code This should be ON if the timecode source is not referenced to the same sync source as the Station See Synchronization chapter for further details LTC Synchronization To lock to LTC longitudinal timecode either M1 or M2 usually M2 must be configured to read one of the LTC input ports Step 1 Press M2 or M1 depending on configuration Step 2 Press Play If the LTC source is not locked to the same sync source as the Station set LOCK TO MASTER ON in the Digi Menu Enabling the LTC Generator The LTC generator will output the current timecode when in PLAY and output a short burst of timecode when locating the transport MIDI timecode is also output when GEN is enabled Press GEN to toggle the generator on or off M1 AND M2 SETUP EDITING WITH MACHINE CONTROL All the transport controls and locating methods operate with a 9 pin remote ma chine online The following procedure is used to place new recordings or previously used clips to picture Press the M1 key to toggle the 9 pin machine on or off The Stations transport will locate to the timecode from the 9 pin machine The system defaults to M1 control ling 9 pin Port A Placing Sound to Picture Step 1 With M1 online locate the video at the desired frame Step 2 Tak
115. MODE 10 18 Po oet etc bs 10 18 Cross Fades o or oca Pet eoe Pr gos 10 18 Fade Tareets 4 3 neu e epi eie dosis 10 19 Fade Soft Key Functions 10 19 Fade Option Sesion Sacha rag iQ RIT 10 19 Fade Default is 10 20 Creating Level Changes 10 20 Chapter 11 Grouping INTRODUCTION casas id o act 11 2 SUMMARY OF GROUPS 11 2 LINK GROUPS AH ee en 11 2 Link Group Format 422244 ees ee 11 2 Link Group Features 0 11 3 Creating a Link Group 11 4 Destroying a Link Group 11 5 Unfolding or Selecting to Access a Link Group MEE tas 11 5 FADER GROUPS cedex ave TER ci 11 6 Fader Group Features ricas 11 6 Adding a Feed to a Fader Group 11 6 Destroying a Fader Group 11 7 Selecting a Fader Group 11 7 Unfolding Fader Group Members 11 7 MULTITRIM eh metes 11 7 Applying Multi Trim lesse 11 8 BUSES umi yaaa aaa 11 8 Unfolding to Access Bus Elements 11 8 Chapter 12 Library INTRODUCTION 2 2 2 2 222 220 12 2 PRESETS omar ns 12 2 A A dpi uto area RA des 12 2 Ds oo o quce an 12 2 Channel seregen e uet ada ae 12 2 ALL CONSOLE lesen 12 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SAVING A PRESET 2 eget a4 ea aa 12 3 LOADING A PRESET ss et sce 12 3 DEEETINGO AL PRESET ees tae e eae 12 3 Chapter 13 Sidecar Operation INTRODUCTION 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 13 2 USING THE SIDECAR
116. Monitor and the instructions given in the monitor manual should be followed Cleaning The Engine Air Filter A To ensure good airflow through the Engine the air filter in the front panel must be periodically cleaned It is usually sufficient to simply remove accumulated dust us ing a vacuum cleaner to suck it out of the front panel grille From time to time how ever the front panel will have to be removed to give the filter a thorough clean or even replace it altogether The front dress panel should removed to allow access to the air filter 1 Gently lift the dress panel away from the Engine 2 Unclip the air filter and remove it from the front facia of the second panel 3 Once the air filter has been removed clean it thoroughly by washing it in warm water with mild detergent Make sure it is completely dry before reinstalling it 4 Reverse the above steps to attach the front dress panel back into place CAUTION DO NOT ALLOW WATER TO GET INSIDE ANY ENCLOSED ASSEM BLY OR COMPONENT DO NOT CLEAN ANY PLASTIC MATERIALS WITH ORGANIC CLEANING SOLVENTS SUCH AS BENZENE TOL UENE XYLENE ACETONE OR SIMILAR COMPOUNDS BECAUSE THEY MAY DAMAGE THE PLASTIC CAUTION DO NOT USE CLEANING FLUIDS OTHER THAN THOSE MEN TIONED IN THE GRAPHICS MONITOR MANUAL TO CLEAN THE SCREEN THE SPECIAL COATING COULD BE DAMAGED New Air Filters If the filter cannot be cleaned properly or is worn out a new one should be ordere
117. Mono or Stereo Master Pan for Surround Aux Buses Master Fader and Mute STATION OVERVIEW 2 6 System Overview SINALNO oy Iavw sav ISOWNV dio Wlan 1no 1193810 Wlan 1no 1193810 YN LNAWNOISSV SNA OL SN S4901H SNISS3OO3d 3 T18V3AONWN SINN SNG 193410 SIN3N31 SNG qaivooriv ATIVOLLVWOLNV 1no 30v4 u3av4 3av4 r SLAW ALAN ILAW LNAWNOISSV 0334 OL SN H1Wd 43QV4 1HOHS 1 N 938 SA9018 DNISSIDOYA 3 18V3AOW sa334 4oVH L f s NAG 3208 ONISSADONd 3 18V3JAOW sqa334 3A11 HOLVd SLNdINI IavW sav JDOTVNV ARCHITECTURE 2 7 USER INTERFACE The DREAM Station system offers improved ease of use and operator efficiency achieved through integration and advanced ergonomic design of the user interface HA eM i h dc Mm nitidi Figure 1 Station User Interface Station is made up of four interconnected hardware devices 1 QDC Engine 2 Station Console and Keyboard 3 Recorder Editor Video Monitor 4 Mixer Video Monitor STATION OVERVIEW Station Console Features The console control surface incorporates the various hardware user interface features indicated below Macro Pad Edit Menu Keys Soft Keys LCD Console Display Project Machine and Patching Live Feed Menu Keys Bus Element Track ive Fee Selection Mute Selection Selection Keys Keys Keys SBEEBEEE A
118. NG WAVE FILES WAVE Files can be imported into a current open Project either by borrowing or keeping them Importing a Single WAV File Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Position the cursor at the point at which the clip needs to be placed Hold down the BLUE key and press the Import key Browse to the WAV file you wish to import Press Borrow or Keep Select which track to place the clip onto The clip will now be imported at the cursor position Ifa WAVE clip needs to be kept at a later time after a BORROW use the KEEP BOR ROWED soft key within the Space Menu LOCKING A LIBRARY TO PICTURE 29 5 Importing Multiple WAV Files fer PROJECT Meena FRAME RATE Meet O F FrLeNane EST LP SAMPLE rare E Om Xxx IMPORT MENU X Imp SAMPLE RATE ERE Figure 2 Importing Wave Files Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Import key Step 2 Press the WAV Files soft key Step 3 A database form will appear on the video display This is used to enter search criteria for importing multiple WAV files Use the Up arrow and Down arrow keys on the console to move the cursor up and down the list Use the and keys on the console or arrow keys on the PC keyboard to select items on the form Step 4 Select the path for where the WAV files are located Step 5 Select a sub folder if required Step 6 Select a filename Step 7 Select a sample rate Step 8 Select a format and then press Enter to begin t
119. O PIXEL DENSITY x AXIS IME FILE DISPLAY SORTINGIA LIBRARY FILE LIST FILTER WAVEFORM LIST FILTER METER CALIBRATION LAK METER RED LEVEL dB PRINTER HEAD DENSITY PAPER WIDTH CINCHES gt PAPER LENGTH CINCHES gt PRINTER COMPRESSION FACTOR PIXEL DENSITY Y AXIS IN_CLIPS JO CLIP ATTRACTION IN FRAME PRINTER MODE PRINTER SMPTE FORMA CROSSFADE FROM ZER FADE DEF ON BUTTED CLIP DISTINGUISH CROSSF ADE I E A o E 5 i DI 3 m 3 z 4 m E DI e m m ic ien D D m in NI 2 AUTOMATIC EXTENSIO SUPER TRI Figure 2 System Page Print Options Printer Compression Removes vertical space where nothing is happening i e no clip is starting ending or being labelled The lower this number the more space is removed therefore the more Project time will appear on each page When compression is set to zero the maximum space is removed PRINTER HEAD DENSITY PIXEL DENSITY X Axis PIXEL DENSITY Y Axis JOIN CLIPS CLIP ATTRACTION IN FRAMES TIMECODE FORMAT Sets more or fewer dots per inch More dots per inch will give you a smaller picture Controls the number of dots used More dots will give a wider picture Similar to X Axis This feature is designed to prevent the printing of large numbers of small clips that have been edited together to make a composite sound It works to gether with the Minimum Gap parameter to print
120. O 1 to 32 I O 33 to 64 variable set limited to 48 by UI MADI96K_24PER variable set I O 1 to 24 I O 25 to 48 with or without MADII6K_HIGHDENSITY Note that MADII6K_LEGACY can be used in conjunction with any of the above it does not affect the number of channels only the framing style MADI Connector Options MADI cards can be supplied with three possible connector options The Coaxial only card is fitted with a 75 ohm BNC connector The Optical card is fitted with both BNC and optical connectors Two optical connectors are available The ST connector is a round bayonet style The SC connector is a square click fit style The toggle switch on the MADI card must be operated to select optical or coaxial Coaxial cable should be 75 Ohm and optical connections should be made using multimode 62 5 125 uM up to 2 kM distance or 50 125 uM more restricted dis tance cable AUDIO I O CONFIGURATION 40 13 STATION WIRING AND CONNECTION DETAILS The following information contains all the wiring details necessary for specifying studio cabling installations Connector sex described is the panel mount connector on the rear of the console Meter USB Description USB and DC Power connection for external meters Note that Side cars do not require DC power Cable must be shielded and less than 3 meters in length Connector 5 Pin XLR Female XLR5 SIGNAL PAIR PIN 1 USB 1 PIN 2 0 VDC PIN 3 12 VDC PIN 4 0 VDC
121. OTES Chapter 15 Talkback INTRODUCTION Talkback uses a physical input to bring the talkback microphone signal into the con sole The internal microphone amplifier may be used to connect the talkback mi crophone to a line level analog input on the QDC engine See the installation section for details on using the internal microphone amplifier The talkback path uses a physical input and can be routed via a dedicated return with no signal processing The talkback signal may be sent to one or more buses for slate or communications purposes USING TALKBACK Press the Talk key to unmute the talkback microphone The talkback key provides momentary or latching operation Touch the key briefly to latch Touch and hold for momentary operation See Setting Momentary Talk back Time Threshold on page 35 14 for changing the latching response time of this switch SETTING UP THE TALKBACK PATH To control the talkback configuration hold down a BLUE key and press thea Talk key An LCD menu will appear with options for configuring talkback Selecting a Talkback Destination The talkback signal can be routed to any bus or combination of buses Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Talk key Buses currently selected for the talkback signal are illuminated other buses are dimly lit Step 2 Press any bus selection key to toggle it in or out of the selection to which the talkback signal is assigned Select a Talkback Source To select
122. Other elements included in the specified format are dimly lit Press a speaker mute key to select the element to patch Track keys now represent the physical outputs of the type selected Press a track key to select a physical output for the current speaker Only one output can be selected for each speaker selecting a new output replaces the previous patch The output feed selection key patched to the current Monitor Ele ment is brightly lit Output track keys used for other purposes flash Output track keys available for patching are dimly lit Select the speakers to patch one by one by pressing each speaker mute key and following the patching procedure described above System output ports are only available for patching in the Monitor Setup Patching page System ports are defined in the I O Config TXT file as described in The I O Config TXT File on page 35 11 Use system output ports for patching your control room monitors to avoid accidentally patching other sources direct to the power amplifier inputs 6 4 TRIMMING RELATIVE SPEAKER LEVELS The level of each speaker in a speaker set can be adjusted independently This is use ful for setting surround speaker levels and compensating for different amplifier gains Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Monitor Setup key next to the Monitor Level Control Step 2 Press the Patch Outputs soft key Step 3 Press the soft key for the speaker set you wish to adjust e g Alt
123. Parameter Edit Binnacle Editing Keys Edit Trackball Fader Pad det and Jog Wheel E Section Numeric Monitor Automation Transport Keys and Track Controls Menu Keys View Keys Figure 2 Station Console Features Track Selection Keys The Track Selection Keys are used for selecting tracks and clips for editing and for arming tracks Press a track key to add a track to the current selection Double press a key to select that track only To select a range hold down the first key and double press the last track in the range The Track Channel Selection Keys are also used to select I Os and signal paths for patching Live Feed Selection Keys The Live Feed Selection Keys are used for selecting live feeds for mixing and patch ing operations USER INTERFACE 2 9 STATION OVERVIEW Bus Element Selection Speaker Mute Keys These keys are used for selecting buses and bus elements for mixing and patching operations Individual bus elements or speaker feeds Left Right Centre Surround etc may be selected or muted by pressing the appropriate key Macro Pad The Macro Pad provides quick access to and display of all stored user macros Edit Menu Keys These menu keys provide access to a range of editing project management and sig nal processing functions Most keys have two functions the names of which are dis played in colour on the button cap To activate the function displayed in blue press and hold one of the three BLUE
124. Patch I O Menu by pressing the Patch I O key Step 2 Select the feed or feeds whose inputs you wish to adjust MASTER FADER 7 8 Step 3 Press the Gain soft key Step 4 Use the Jog wheel to adjust the value or use the numeric keys and press Enter to complete To set input phase Step 1 First enter the Patch I O Menu by pressing the Patch I O key Step 2 Select the feed or feeds whose inputs you wish to adjust Step 3 Press the Phase soft key to toggle the phase of the selected inputs See Input Gain and Phase on page 5 5 for more details Inserts Inserts are controlled from the Insert menu Step 1 Enter the Insert Menu by pressing the Insert key Step 2 Press the Send Return soft key to select patching for outputs or inputs Step 3 Select the feed or bus to be inserted Step 4 Press the Patch soft key to select physical inputs or outputs for the insert send and return Step 5 Press the ANALOG DIGITAL and AES MADI soft keys to choose the desired type of input or output Step 6 Press a track feed selection key to select a physical input or output Press the ON OFF soft key to switch the insert in or out of circuit Direct Outs Step 1 Press the Direct key to enter the Direct Outputs menu Step 2 Select a feed or bus Step 3 Press the Patch soft key to select a physical output for the direct out Step 4 Use the ANALOG DIGITAL and AES MADI soft keys to choose the desired type of output Step 5 The track feed keys may
125. Printing INTRODUCTION The Print Menu allows a track sheet or dubbing chart to be printed based on the layout of the clips in a current open Project The Station supports serial or parallel printers A printout shows the selected tracks and the start and end times for each clip Print Key Figure 1 Print Key Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press Print Step 2 Define a Range and select the desired tracks Step 3 Press the PRINT CHART soft key The other soft keys operate as follows PAGE Determines how page numbers are shown X or X of Y BAUD Selects the baud rate for the serial printer 9600 or 38400 PORT Selects port used for the printer MODEM or PRINTER Use the modem port for a serial printer and the printer port for a parallel printer STOP CHART Stops printing SETTING PRINTER CHARACTERISTICS To change printer characteristics display the System Page type BLUE S You may now use the mouse to choose 9 24 or 48 pin printers You may also set the size of your paper if you want to print two pages of tractor feed paper with no header at the top of the second page set the page length to double Use the mouse to click on individual fields thus changing the displayed value These are explained below INTRODUCTION 32 3 PRINTING LOAD SAVE DEFAULTS FILE DISPLAY SORTIN METER CALIBRATION LA METER RED LEVEL lt dB PRINTER TYPE MAS PAPER WIDTH lt INCHES PAPER LENGTH CINCHES PRINTER COMPRESSION FACT
126. READ and be displayed green Press the Touch key again to return to Latch mode Alternatively press the channel AUTO key to drop the whole feed out of Preview To enter Preview on enabled parameters on any signal path turn the Touch Auto Enable Mix menu item on This over rides the signal path enable mix mask To Preview all the enabled parameters on a signal path press the AUTO key next to the fader Note that all the enabled parameters on that path now flash red When you are satisfied with the new mix roll back the transport and press PLAY Press the In key to drop the previewed parameters into automation record at the desired location Active In Out from Preview To drop into record from Preview at a specified timecode location follow these steps Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Establish your new mix in Preview mode as described above Press the Mix key to make the Mix menu active Select a range with the From and To keys on the Binnacle Hold down a BLUE key and press the Active In and optionally the Active Out keys Locate the transport to a location before the In point and press play The flashing parameters will drop in to automation record at the In point and drop out at the Out point if set The selected parameters return to the previously recorded values over the Glide Out time specified in the Utils menu Fill Range from Preview Fill Range can be used to write the static previewed parameters over a s
127. REAM Sta tion USING THE SYSTEM 3 1 NOTES 3 2 Chapter 3 Projects INTRODUCTION Station uses Project files to store work performed on the console and disk recorder All audio recordings editing and file imports are done within Projects A project contains all the audio data edit information and automation data Edits performed on the audio data are non destructive and are represented by clips which refer to pieces of audio data within the project Projects are continually updated and written to disk while recording and editing is being performed therefore there is no need to save a project Automation mix data however must be save before closing a project Project files are given the MT filename extension The Project Display is the first screen displayed when the system is started or when the Project Menu is selected by pressing the Proj key Project Menu Display Device Pathlist Folders Display N Files Display Figure 1 Project Menu Display Device Display The device display shows the storage device currently available on the system with the selected device highlighted Device number SCSI ID UNIT Se soa Partition Name VOLUME T Disk Manufacturer VENDOR BEAT nal DISK SIZ Bb Disk Size FREE SPAC is FREE TIME gt Available Space Disk Usage INTRODUCTION 3 3 PROJECTS UNIT SC03 VOLUME VENDOR DISK SIZE FREE SPACE FREE TIME BAR GRAPH Folders Figure 2
128. ROLS The Control Room monitoring controls include Monitor Level The Monitor Level control provides direct control of the control room listening lev el The DIM key next to the monitor level control reduces the monitor level by a fixed amount Follow these steps to set the Dim level reduction amount Step 1 Hold down the DIM key next to the Monitor Level Control The DIM key is illuminated when the monitors are dimmed The level reduction is displayed on the LCD The range is 0 to 20dB Step 2 Turn the jog wheel to enter the value Step 3 Release the DIM key Press the DIM key again to return to normal listening level INSERTS IN MONITORING 6 7 MONITORING Fixed Reference Level The BLUE Fixed key next to the monitor level control is used to set the monitoring level to a fixed reference standard volume The Fixed key bypasses the Monitor Level control Follow these steps to set the fixed monitoring level Step 1 Select the monitor system to calibrate by pressing the Monitor key to select the Main monitors or hold down the BLUE key and press the Monitor key then select an alternative monitor set Step 2 Using a pink noise source and a sound pressure level meter follow the steps in Trimming Relative Speaker Levels on page 6 4 to set all speakers to the same sound pressure level for 5 1 film mixing the surround speaker level may be reduced by 3dB Adjust the pink noise level in each bus element to 0VU 20dBFS or yo
129. S VA AND DIRECT SUNLIGHT AS THIS CAN DAMAGE THE DISK The system automatically detects new SCSI devices For example if an optical drive is connected at boot up and the media is not present the device will be seen on the Project page however it will indicate no media On placing a suitable formatted me dia in the drive the device will become available for use Hard drives will also be automatically detected if they are installed correctly Do not connect external devices by breaking the SCSI chain while the system is run ning as it can either crash the system or if a Project is open lead to Project corrup tion SETTING UP REMOVABLE MEDIA DEVICES 38 13 ENGINE INSTALLATION ROUTINE MAINTENANCE You should clean the units often enough to prevent dust or dirt from accumulating Dirt acts as a thermal insulating blanket that prevents effective heat dissipation and may provide high resistance electrical leakage paths between conductors or compo nents in a humid environment Clean the dust from the outside by wiping with a soft cloth or small brush A brush is especially useful for removing dust from around connectors and cooling grilles Use a cloth dampened in water that contains 5096 isopropyl alcohol to remove hard ened dirt You should not use abrasive cleaners Cleaning The Monitor Screens The Graphics Monitor has a special coating on the screen which prevents glare A cleaning cloth should be supplied with the Graphics
130. Save soft key becomes dis abled Saving a Mix Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Mix File key Step 2 Press the Save soft key in the LCD menu Step 3 Type a unique name for the mix on the PC keyboard and press Enter Alternatively type a name with a numeric suffix e g Demo Mix 1 The next time you press Save a new name will automati cally be generated with an incremented suffix e g Demo Mix 2 Press Enter to save the mix with the new name Loading a Mix Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Mix File key Step 2 Turn the jog wheel to scroll through the previously saved mixes Press the Sort soft key to select TIME or ALPHA ALPHA sorts the saved mixes in alpha numeric order TIME sorts the saved mixes in the order in which they were saved with the most recently saved mix at the end of the list Step 3 Press the Load soft key in the LCD menu to load the selected mix Step 4 Confirm by pressing the Yes or No soft key Deleting a Mix Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Mix File key Step 2 Turn the jog wheel to scroll through the previously saved mixes Step 3 Press the Delete soft key in the LCD menu to delete the selected mix Creating a New Mix Follow these steps to create new empty mix with no automation data Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Mix File key AUTOMATION 25 16 Step 2 Press the New Mix soft key in the LCD menu This new mix must be saved once new data has been
131. Sere rrt oi 35 9 File Display Sonting 2er nee 35 9 Library File List Filter ee 35 9 Waveform List Filtet ud 424 35 9 Meter Settings wen Aa ced Quy oes 35 10 Crossfade from Zero iso brescia gua 35 10 Fade Def on Butted ClipS 35 10 Distinguish Crossfades 35 10 Auto Update DL File wie en 35 10 Wave Menu Audio Format 35 10 Automatic Extension o o 35 10 Super Luce ue os yee Reed uS 35 10 WORKING WITH CONSOLE SYSTEM FILES 35 11 Keyboard FOCUS vie 35 11 The O Config TAT Elles che y ees 35 11 The Monitor Matrix TXT File 35 12 The System Variables File 35 14 FMC Command Line Options 35 15 BLUE Utils Menu 2 se da 35 16 FAIRLIGHT OS COMMANDS 35 17 UPGRADING SYSTEM SOFTWARE 35 23 QDC Software Upgrade 35 23 Console Software Upgrade 35 23 Chapter 36 Drive Formatting INTRODUCTION sun st 36 2 FORMATTING A DRIVE 4 s aa 36 2 FORMATTING OPTICAL DISKS 36 2 MAKING A NEW SYSTEM DISK 36 3 BOOTING FROM EXTERNAL DISK DRIVES 36 3 Chapter 37 Installation INTRODUCTION esses 37 2 ABOUT THIS MANUAL sese 37 2 Engine Installation 37 2 Station Console Installation 37 2 Specifications Dee Rec di EA 37 2 Trouble shooting 5 srt 37 2 Op rati n aaa og ST Ee A Saw eae 37 2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW 22 222222 37 3 UNPACKING 222222222222 37
132. Step 2 Press the CLOSE soft key Opening an Existing Project Step 1 Press the Proj key on the console Step 2 Use the project navigation keys to highlight the desired Project Step 3 Press the Enter key Opening a Project will close any currently open Project FILES AND FOLDERS Folders are a useful way to group Projects together Folders can also be created with in other folders Creating a New Folder Step 1 Press the Proj key Step 2 Press the NEXT soft key Step 3 Use the project navigation keys to select the domain device and folder where you would like the new folder to be created Step 4 Press the NEW FOLDER soft key Step 5 Type the name you wish to give the folder using the PC key board NOTE The name appears in the console s LCD display as you type Step 6 Press the Enter key and the new folder will be created PROJECTS 3 6 Copying Files Or Folders Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Press the Proj key Press the NEXT soft key Select the source file or folder Press the COPY soft key Select the destination Press the OKAY soft key Edit the name for the new file or folder Press Enter to start copying Multiple files may also be copied in batches see Copying and Moving on page 34 5 for more details Moving Files or Folders Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Press the Proj key Press the NEXT soft key Select the source Project Pres
133. Sub Bus is selected the available bus element speaker mute keys will flash Press a speaker mute key to select that bus element The element patched to the feed is displayed at the left of the signal path display an the bottom of the mixer display Choose another feed to patch or press Patch I O to return to the previous mode Bus Elements may be patched to a group of feeds or link group as follows Step 1 First enter the Patch I O Menu by pressing the Patch I O key Step 2 Select the feeds or link group to be patched to by using the Track or Live Feed keys at the top of the Station or you can use the feed keys already selected Step 3 Press the Patch soft key Step 4 Press the Main a BLUE Aux or a Sub Bus key The Main or Sub Bus Elements will be patched to the feeds in the follow ing order Left Left Centre Centre Right Centre Right Left Surround Centre Surround Right Surround Boom Ele ments that are not in the current bus or group format are not displayed or patched If a stereo Aux Bus is selected the left channel is patched first then the right The bus elements are patched to the feeds successively until the feeds are all used If the bus elements are all used before the feeds are then patching starts again from the first bus ele ment For example selecting only one bus element will cause it to be patched to all selected Feeds Selecting two bus elements will cause them to be alternately patched to all sele
134. TION 22 2 2222 26 2 ADDITIONAL PROJECT MENU ITEMS 26 2 Password Protecti0N 26 2 Extender Las 26 3 Refresh ooooooooooo ooo 26 3 MANAGING DISK SPACE 26 4 DISPO eo dus A ao 26 4 COMME oe oe need iia Ps 26 4 Packen ne SEC ER OT 26 5 Keep Borrowed CIIps ue cde ds 26 5 More About Committing 26 6 RECOVERING WAVEFORMS 26 6 The W Displays snos ds a bu eos 26 6 The Recover Waveform Command 26 6 24 AND 48 TRACK PROJECT COMPATIBILITY REN AA A ee ee 26 7 Chapter 27 Marks INTRODUCTION cosas hx e lea 27 2 CREATING A MARK aar eee 27 2 EDITING MARKS 3 m rtm m 27 2 GIOTOUM ARIS I ab eus a 27 3 Chapter 28 AudioBase TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION sata a 28 2 CREATING A DATABASE 2 2 2 28 2 SEARCHING FOR SOUNDS eene 28 3 Additional Search Conditions 28 4 Searching the Current Project 28 5 PLACING SOUNDS IN A PROJECT 28 6 MAINTAINING A DATABASE 28 7 Deleting Records aii aes 28 7 GUIDE TO AUDIOBASE2 28 8 Alphabetic Sonic rn ac dtt Tei cn 28 8 NO EXPOR aida dsd 28 8 Thelinekield A ar Mes 28 8 PUBLISHING WITH TEXT FILES 28 9 How AudioBase Recognises Text 28 10 The Eon e 6 outs Dens odd dd der 28 10 GMD S325 ne buceo 24 wand ae aa pepe ps 28 10 Commands Using Text Files 28 10 Using Text lesa ae 28 11 Editing the Form un an eat 28 13 AudioBase T
135. Tracks 24 48 Live Feeds 8 8 Bus Elements 12 16 Main Bus 1 741 1 741 Number Max Format Sub Buses 417 1 417 1 Number Max Format Aux Buses 4 Stereo 4 Stereo Number Max Format Analog Inputs 8 48 8 48 Standard Maximum Analog O utputs 8 48 8 48 Standard Maximum Digital I O AES MADI 8 48 8 48 Standard Maximum Signal Flow STATION OVERVIEW Signal paths for feeds and buses comprise both fixed and moveable processing blocks The diagrams below represent single elements of multichannel paths Signal paths may be configured in formats from mono up to 7 1 surround Individual ele ments may be controlled together as part of a bus or Link Group or unfolded and controlled separately When a track feed is armed for recording the fader may be switched to control the level at the input to the disk recorder as shown below 2 4 Track and Live Feeds DinecT mos Ur MOVEABLE PROCESSING BLOCKS up PATCH ie EQ prey ones Live Feed Signal Flow a DIRECT MI ADER H E MOVEABLE PROCESSING BLOCKS UTE FADER our VP PATCH DISK HD He o DISK SHORT FADER PATH Track Feed Signal Flow 48 Track Feeds 8 Live Feeds 6 band automated EQ Bell
136. UCTION Before any recording editing or mixing can be performed on Station the console needs to be configured and input signals patched to feeds feeds to buses and buses to outputs Feeds are selected by pressing one or more of the selection keys at the top of the Sta tion These keys are also used to display and select the associated inputs and outputs during patching operations Buses are selected by pressing one of the bus selection keys Individual bus elements are selected by pressing one or more of the illuminated speaker mute buttons at the left of the Station In general patching procedures require the operator to first select the destination then select the source Setting up Your Control Room Monitors If this is the first time your Station has been used you will first need to set up and patch your control room monitors See Monitoring on page 6 2 for instructions on patching and using your monitors with the Station BEL Suns Ea Figure 1 Feed Selection Keys Direct Insert Key Stem Bus Assign Key Patch O Key Figure 2 Patch 1 O Key INTRODUCTION 5 3 PATCHING INPUTS Each Track Feed and Live Feed can be fed from a physical input or a Bus Element Patching a physical input to a feed means connecting the signal at the physical input to the input of the feed signal path Live Feed Connects the input directly to the destination bus of the feed a Live Feed without an input cannot make any sound
137. URCES To set the format and patch the physical inputs for external monitor sources follow these steps Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Source Setup key next to the monitor level control Step 2 Press the define ExtSrc soft key TRIMMING RELATIVE SPEAKER LEVELS Step 3 Press the Ext Src soft key for the source you wish to patch Step 4 To determine the number of inputs required you must specify the format of the external monitor source Press the Format soft key to cycle through the available formats These are Mono Stereo LCR LCRS LCRSS 5 1 6 1 7 1 Step 5 Select the type of physical input you wish to patch to by pressing the Analog Digital AES MADI soft keys Step 6 The speaker mute keys are now used to select each element of the external source format The current speaker mute key is brightly lit Other elements included the specified format are dimly lit Press a speaker mute key to select the element to patch Step 7 Track keys now represent the physical inputs of the type selected Press a track key to select a physical input for the current source element Only one input can be selected for each element select ing a new input replaces the previous patch The input track key patched to the current source element is brightly lit Input track keys used for other purposes flash Input track keys available for patching are dimly lit Step 8 Select the source elements to patch one by one by pressing each spe
138. USE ON THE DEVICE WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA OR RAT IFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE This EULA grants you the following license You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE NOT FAULT TOLERANT THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT FAIRLIGHT ESP HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE AND FAIRLIGHT ESP S SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS HAVE RELIED i UPON FAIRLIGHT ESP TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE TH E SOFTWARE is provided AS IS and with all faults TH E ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY PERFORM ANCE ACCURACY AND EFFORT INCLUDING LACK OFNEGLIGENCE ISWITH YOU ALSO THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICEOR THE SOFTWARE THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM AND ARE NOT BINDING ON FAIRLIGHT ESP S SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS Note on Java Support The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed manufactured or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance such as in the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communication systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in whic
139. a Fader Group or a Bus Master Pressing the Fold key causes all the members of the group to be arrayed across the speaker mute keys From this position they can be called on to the Fader and the Parameter Pad If the optional Station Sidecar is fitted group members are placed on the Sidecar faders starting from the left hand fader Pressing the Fold key again causes the group members to disappear from the speaker mute keys restoring the normal layout of the console EQUALISER The equaliser provides four bands of parametric EQ and two filters Each paramet ric section can be switched to band pass reject shelving or notch Each parametric PARAMETER PAD 8 4 section can be switched to one of four ranges LF 10 250Hz LMF 50Hz 1k50Hz HMF 450 8k00Hz HF 1k40 22k0Hz Each parametric section pro vides 18dB of gain has a range of 0 3 to 10 When notch is selected the filter has a gain of 0 to 99dB Each filter can be switched to high pass low pass high shelving or low shelving The equaliser can be bypassed and also provides a gain makeup control with a range of 16dB Press the EQ key on the Parameter Pad to access the equaliser The equaliser is arranged in two pages the EC page and the Filters page Press the EQ Filt soft key at the top right of the Parameter Pad to toggle between them Mix Parameters Figure 1 The EQ Frequency Page Navigating the Parametric EQ page The parametric EQ page has two sub
140. a blue function hold the BLUE key while pressing any other key Track Sel Holding the Track Sel key and turning the Jog wheel will change the selected track 10 6 CUT AND COPY EDIT MODES Cut and copy commands can operate on either selected clips or a Range of clips or a Range within clips In CUT mode the selected clips are removed from a track and held on the clipboard In COPY mode the clips are left unchanged but copies of the clips are passed to the clipboard The resulting content of the clipboard is the same for both CUT and COPY modes The Clipboard Ghost When clips or sections of clips are cut or copied they are placed on the clipboard When the Enter key is pressed or when the target key is released whilst in the EDIT mode the contents of the clipboard are pasted on to the currently selected tracks Clips can be pasted multiple times by pressing the Enter key repeatedly If other clips are cut or copied to the clipboard the previous contents of the clipboard are lost regardless of whether they were used or not A Ghost is a representation of the clipboard s top layer A ghost is shown as a float ing white image at the cursor position The ghost display is automatically removed after pasting or when a new Mode is selected Whenever the CUT COPY or ERASE modes are current the Ghost soft key can be used to toggle the ghost clip display on or off Using Cut or Copy Follow these steps to perform a CUT or
141. a single shape for many clips When set to ALWAYS it treats clips that are butt ed together or overlapping as just one clip The name of the earliest clip is used SAME NAME joins butted clips together only if they have the same name The Join Clips software will treat clips as though they are butted together as long as they are closer than this minimum gap It also has the effect of quantising the print output so that events starting within a window of this gap will appear to start at the same time Click on this field to choose which timecode fields will be printed 32 4 Printer Types Parallel Printers The Station printer output is a standard PC compatible parallel printer port The system will support most Epson compatible parallel printers Serial Printers The Modem output supports serially connected Epson compatible machines of the 9 pin or 24 pin protocol Example EPSON LQ1170 with IF C82305 or C82307 serial interface card Baud rate 9600 or 38400 8 bits 1 stop bit no parity DTR handshake Pin 2 Pin 2 SW1 lon SW 1 1 on Pin 3 Pin 3 SW 1 2o0n SW 1 2 on Pin 4 Pin 5 SW 1 3 off SW 1 3 off Pin 5 Pin 7 SW 1 4 off SW 1 4 off Pin 8 Pin 20 SW 1 5 off SW 1 5 off SW 1 6 off SW 1 6 off SW2 lon SW 2 1 on SW2 2on SW 2 2 on SW 2 3 off SW 2 3 off SW2 on SW 2 4 on SW 2 5 off SW 2 5 off When Station prints a dubbing chart the length of each clip
142. ace is fitted with an HDC68 pin connector It is recommended that a rack tray be fitted either directly above or below the En gine to hold external SCSI devices The last device on the chain should be actively terminated with all other devices being looped through To avoid SCSI bus corrup INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL SCSI DEVICES tion the entire external SCSI bus should be no longer than 10 metres if all devices are LVD and less than 1 5 metres if single ended devices are used CONFIGURING DISK DRIVES For instructions on formatting storage devices see Drive Formatting on page 36 2 of the User Manual Wide SCSI Bus SCSI Controller Wide Disk Drive Wide Disk Drive Wide Disk Drive Ll l Figure 5 Recommended Wide SCSI Device Usage Narrow Based Disk Drives ENGINE INSTALLATION Narrow based SCSI disk drives may be attached to the external bus but must always be the last in the chain after any wide disks are connected While it is possible to use both wide an narrow devices on the same bus Fairlight recommends that a second SCSI interface be installed to allow wide and narrow devices to be kept separate A quality 68 pin to 50 pin adaptor must be used when connecting from the SCSI bus to a narrow disk drive The end of the bus must be terminated using an active SCSI terminator plugged into the last drive in the chain When using only narrow based disk drives along the SCSI bus the Engine must be configured fo
143. ack Keys and associated soft keys Patching Physical Inputs To Feeds The patching procedure requires the operator to first select the destination then se lect the source To patch a physical input to a Feed Step 1 First enter the Patch I O Menu by pressing the Patch I O key Step 2 Select the feed to be patched to by using the Track Feed and or Live Feed keys at the top of the Station or you can use the feed keys already selected PATCHING AND ROUTING Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 5 4 Press the Patch soft key The Track Feed keys now show all the physical inputs from 1 to a maximum 48 digital AES or MADD OR 1 to a maxi mum 48 analog depending on the ANALOG DIGITAL and AES MADI soft keys Press the ANALOG DIGITAL and AES MADI soft keys to select the desired input type Inputs that are available for patching are illuminated dim Inputs of the selected type already assigned to the Feeds select ed are brightly lit Inputs assigned to other feeds or returns flash between offand dim illumination Inputs that are not installed are not illuminated and cannot be selected Select the input by using the Track or Live Feed keys at the top of the Station Press an edit mode key or another menu key to exit the patch ing menu or press Patch I O to return to the previous state It is also possible to patch a group of inputs to a group of Feeds Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 First enter the Patch I O Menu by
144. acro Bank Their corresponding soft keys may now trigger the Macros in that Bank RUNNING A MACRO Macros can be run in two ways 1 Pressing one of the macro keys from within any menu except the Edit Macro Menu will run the macro MACROS 2 From the Edit Macro Menu as follows Step 1 Select the desired macro key Step 2 Press the RUN soft key This second procedure allows macros to call other macros ERASING A MACRO Learning a macro will erase any previous macro for that key It is sometimes desira ble to erase a macro and leave it vacant to prevent it from being accidentally pressed Step 1 Select the desired macro key Step 2 Press the ERASE soft key Step 3 Press the Enter key If a macro key is pressed while learning a macro the contents of that key will be re corded by the new macro Changing either macro will not affect the other All numeric values and menu selections must be entered with the numeric keypad When entering numbers press the Clear key then type the number and Enter Soft key menu parameters that are normally scrolled with the jogger wheel can be select ed with the 0 to 9 keys To invoke a delay in a macro hold down the Ctrl key and press one of the numeric keys The delay will be the approximate value of the key in frames e g 5 will be 5 frames with 0 being 10 frames MACRO FILES Macros can be saved to and loaded from disk A macro file is a snapshot of all the function keys Macros are
145. ain name server on your network Set this up to re solve names correctly Enter Of to disable domain name service requests Please refer to your network administrator or IT profes sional for advice on the correct DNS entries for the follow ing fields Enter the DNS domain to enable DNS lookups Note DNSDOMAIN has nothing to do with DOMAIN This is the default route for all IP traffic Any network that cannot be reached directly will be sent to this host Enter the range of addresses for the QDC to scan when de tecting network nodes The SCANHOSTS entry will accept multiple ranges separated by commas for example 1 32 254 This will cause the QDC to scan only IP address es 1 32 and then 254 in the current class C subnet for oth er QDCs MFX3pluses and MediaLink servers QDC NETWORK SETUP 35 5 SYSTEM FILES If the SCANHOSTS directive is not present the entire class C subnet will be scanned It is highly recommended that this configuration be optimized for all installations to avoid unnecessary network traffic and processor overhead in the QDC The remaining parameters are described below Web NET MASK VISIBILITY AudioBase VERSION SERVER Console ENABLE SERVER SERVER PORT CLIENT PORT DEBUG Surface The netmask determines what range of IP addresses the en gine can receive messages from The subnet part of the en gine s IP address are the numbers that coincide with 255 in t
146. airlight USA 2 West 45 Street Penthouse New York NY 10036 USA Tel 1 212 819 1289 Fax 1 212 819 0376 France Fairlight France 41 43 Rue des Peupliers 92100 Boulogne Billancourt Paris France Tel 33 1 4610 9292 Fax 33 1 4610 9295 Japan Fairlight Japan Inc 3 3 11 Ikejiri Setagaya Ku Tokyo Japan 154 0001 Tel 81 3 5432 4151 Freecall Japan only 0120 213 643 Fax 81 3 5432 4533 To help ensure that Fairlight provides the most accurate and comprehensive docu mentation please report any errors or omissions to documentation fairlightesp com au viii Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction INTRODUCTION 2 2 22222222 1 2 ABOUT THIS MANUAL esee 1 2 Finding the Information You Need 1 2 Operational Instructions 1 2 Installation Instructions 1 3 Chapter 2 Station Overview INTRODUCTION 2 2 2 2222 222 2 2 TERMINOLOQY 002 eee ee eee 2 2 ARCHITECTURE 2 0 0 00 e ee eee eee 2 3 Signal Flow scudo Va ude Coke Sete oe 2 3 Track and Live Feeds creed 2 4 Mau BUS dd sceau o tc ar ax t dade 2 5 SUDsBUS es u oben tables or veg qur 2 5 AUX BUSES aona pias dar ada 9 95908 2 5 System OVERVIEW 2144 uec cott caca de dos 2 6 USER INTERFACE 222 22222222 2 7 Station Console Features 2 8 Recorder Editor Display Features 2 11 Mixer Display Features 2 12 STARTING THE SYST
147. aker mute key and following the patching procedure described above NAMING EXTERNAL MONITOR SOURCES Alternative monitor sources may be given more meaningful names specific to the current installation Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Source Setup key next to the monitor level control Step 2 Press the define ExtSrc soft key Step 3 Press the ExtSrc soft key for the source you wish to name Step 4 Press the Name soft key Step 5 Enter the name using the PC keyboard and press the Enter key to complete the operation MONITOR FORMAT MONITORING The Station allows the operator to monitor a source in any format required For in stance a stereo source can be monitored in mono to check for compatibility Simi larly a 5 1 surround source can be checked in stereo By default the monitor format is the same as the current monitor set selected with the Monitor key If a different monitor format is then selected the monitor source signals are summed attenuated or distributed to be heard in the selected format The Format Alt key in the Monitor section is used to toggle between the default for mat for the current speaker set and the current i e most recently selected Alterna tive format The Format Alt key is illuminated when the alternative format is selected f 6 6 To change the current alternative format Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Format Setup key next to the Monitor Level Control Step 2 Select
148. al inputs to Bus or Link Group Insert Returns Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Enter the Insert Menu by pressing the Insert key Select the bus to be inserted by pressing a bus selection key or press the track key of any member of a link group to select the group or retain the existing selection To select a single member of a link group hold down the BLUE key and press the track key then follow the procedure above Press the Returns soft key Press the Patch soft key The Track Feed keys now show the physical inputs Press the ANALOG DIGITAL and AES MADI soft keys to select the desired input type Inputs that are available for patching are illuminated dim 5 8 Inputs of the selected type already assigned to the bus or feeds selected are brightly lit Inputs assigned to other feeds or returns flash between off and dim illumination Inputs that are not installed are not illuminated and cannot be selected Step 6 Bus elements and link group members are selected with the speaker mute keys Speaker mute keys corresponding to elements available in the cur rent bus or link group format are illuminated dim green The current element for patching is illuminated bright green Elements that are already patched to inputs flash off to dim green The current bus or group element is advanced automatically when an input is selected Press a track key to select the input for the current bus or group element The bus
149. al master values set and all Parameter Pad controls now act as master controls for all signal paths selected on the Selection Panel There may be no selec tion in Multi Trim mode which allows for the virtual master values to be adjusted to suitable positions before making a selection and applying values Applying Multi Trim Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 BUSES Edit Target Figure 2 The Multi Trim Key Press the Multi Trim key Press feed bus or fader group selection keys to toggle them in or out of the selection Select Absolute or Relative mode by pressing the Abs or Rel soft keys in the LCD menu Adjust the Master Fader or any controls in the Parameter Pad to control the group The mixer display will be updated to show the changes as they occur To update all parameters for all channels selected when in Abso lute mode press the apply values soft key Press the Multi Trim key to return to the previous mode or press another key to continue mixing or editing Buses share many features with link groups The method of independently adjusting the individual elements of a bus is similar to that employed with link groups Unfolding is not supported in DREAM software release 1 2 This information is in cluded for future reference Unfolding to Access Bus Elements Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Call the bus to the Master Fader by pressing the CALL key then pressing the bus selection key of the desired bu
150. al pan control The track ball position always represents the current pan position When the track ball is moved it begins offsetting the pan position in the direction in which it is moved Pan ON OFF The Pan ON OFF soft key immediately above the LR pan control bypasses the lev el control matrix of the panner and sends the signal path at unity gain to all desti nation bus elements The connection to individual bus elements may be turned on and off using stem as signment as described in Stem Assign on page 5 16 If the signal being panned is a Link Group all members of the group are sent to all bus elements Diverge Control The diverge control spreads the signal of an individual feed across more of the adja cent loudspeakers making the perceived size of the sound source larger The diverge control operates in one dimensional or two dimensional mode To switch between modes press the Diverge Mode soft key The fat channel pan dis play changes from a bar to a circle when divergence is added The boom or LFE channel is not included in diverge One dimensional Diverge One dimensional mode is useful for spreading a mono source across left right and centre speakers in a 5 1 bus for example without allowing the signal to move into the surround loudspeakers The divergence control range is 0 to 10096 At 096 the panner behaves as if the signal were a single point source When the signal is panned to front centre at 7096 divergenc
151. alog Outputs 25 amp 26 are named Main Mon L amp R respectively IO CONFIG 1 32 32 IO CONFIG 2 32 32 IO CONFIG 3 0 0 INPUT 1 1 DAT L INPUT 1 2 DAT R OUTPUT 1 25 Main Mon L 1 OUTPUT 1 26 Main Mon R 1 I O CONFIGURATION 39 13 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING Once the system has been started successfully you may refer to the chapters on op eration to record audio play back and continue to test and commission the system SIDECAR Station Sidecars come in two varieties Master and Slave The Sidecar is connected via the USB and Power cable part number AMIX119 A The 5 pin XLR Meter Sidecar connectors may be used for either Sidecars or External Meters The Slave Sidecar may be connected to the second connector on either the Station or the Mas ter Sidecar Cons con The Sidecar panel must be added to the Station console configuration This is achieved with the Cons con application Step 1 In the DREAM Start splash screen press Pause Break and type su Enter Pause Break to enter super user mode Step 2 Click on the Binnacle Cut key to launch Cons con Step 3 Select Station console type and click the Add Panel button to add panels one at a time Step 4 Select panel number Panel 22 then select FaderPanel type Click OK to add the panel This refers to the first six faders on the sidecar Step 5 Select panel number Panel 23 then select FaderPanel type Click OK to add the panel This refers to the second six faders on the sideca
152. alue REL ABS represents the absolute value of all Inputs REL represents a trim or relative offset value applied to all inputs Use the Jog wheel or keys to adjust the relative gain in real time or use the numeric keys to enter an absolute value and press Enter to complete To set input phase Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 First enter the Patch I O Menu by pressing the Patch I O key Select the feed or feeds whose inputs you wish to adjust Press the Phase soft key to toggle the phase of the selected inputs If the inputs to all selected feeds are in phase the phase soft key is illuminated green If the inputs to all selected feeds are out of phase the phase soft key is illuminated amber If the inputs to the selected feeds do not all have the same phase status the phase soft key flashes red Press the soft key to set all inputs in phase Patching Bus Elements to Feeds The individual elements of a bus may be patched to feeds for recording or other processing PATCHING AND ROUTING Figure 3 Bus Bus Element Keys 5 6 To select a Bus Element as the input for a feed Step 1 First enter the Patch I O Menu by pressing the Patch I O key Step 2 Select the feed to be patched to by using the Feed keys at the top of the Station or you can use the Feed keys already select ed Step 3 Press the Patch soft key Step 4 Choose the Main BLUE Aux or Sub Bus key instead of a physical input key Step 5 If the Main an Aux or
153. amily of products from Fairlight which mar ries together QDC processing with an ergonomic physical control surface in a com bination that has a significant impact on productivity and efficiency The DREAM Station interface incorporates a unique combination of dedicated ed iting and mixing features an advanced graphical user interface and powerful data base capabilities These tools allow the operator to work quickly and efficiently without impeding the creativity ofthe digital recording editing and mixing process ABOUT THIS MANUAL The DREAM Station Installation and User Manual provides all the information necessary to rapidly become proficient at operating the system in a professional au dio environment This manual is designed to familiarize sound editors and engineers with the facilities provided by the Station The terminology and concepts used in this manual assume a reasonable knowledge regarding audio principles and studio procedures Finding the Information You Need Read through the chapters in the order presented to learn all the features of the sys tem or use the T able of Contents or Index to quickly find the specific information you require The manual is divided into the following chapters each covering a spe cific topic Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 21 Solo and Mute Chapter 2 Station Overview Chapter 22 Track amp Takes Chapter 3 Projects Chapter 23 Go To Chapter 4 Tracks amp Transport Chapter 24 ADR GPI amp
154. analog outputs Check QDC1 Slot3 if AOI fitted allocate next set of 8 analog outputs 2 3 4 5 6 7 Check QDC1 Slot3 if AESI fitted allocate Ist set of 4 digital I Os 40 4 8 Check QDCI Slot4 if AESI fitted allocate next set of 4 digital I Os 9 Check QDCI Slot5 if AESI fitted allocate next set of 4 digital I Os 10 Check QDC1 Slot2 if AES1 fitted allocate next set of 4 digital I Os The engine continues checking QDC cards I O slots and allocating I O channel for all available cards I O Allocation Order Slot No Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Digital 1 0 Slot 1 AI 1 Slot 2 AO AOM AES 1 4 Slot 3 AO AES 4 1 Slot 4 AO AES 3 2 Slot 5 AO AOM AES 2 3 Slot 6 AI 2 Standard Configuration Channel Allocation Applying the method above we can determine that the connector channel allocation for the standard configuration shown above would be as follows Analog Inputs 1 8 Connector 1 Analog Outputs 1 8 Digital I Os 1 8 Digital I Os 9 16 Connector 2 Analog Inputs 9 16 Connector 3 Analog Outputs 9 16 Note that the order of I O daughter boards is reversed on connector 3 This al VA lows for a standard cable configuration to be used as described below AUDIO I O CONFIGURATION 40 5 Standard I O Cable Configurations The range of possible I O configurations shown in figure 7 above can be supported by four standard cabl
155. apshot and all the dynamic events gen erated during the mix An additional storage verification object is stored which is used to check the integrity of the project 25 20 Data Objects on Disk MT File Audio EDL Data Saved Mix 1 Preset Snapshot Console Fader Sets Settings Verify Error Check Preset Snapshot Console Fader Sets Settings Figure 3 Automation Data Map AUTOCUE The Auto Cue feature enables automatic dimming of the control room monitors when the transport is stopped or not locked to timecode This is achieved by auto matically turning on one of the talkback circuits This feature ensures that the faders are controlled by valid automation data before playing back an automated mix at full level To use Auto Cue without affecting normal studio communications use the second talkback circuit and de assign it from all destination buses To enable Auto Cue hold down a BLUE key and press a Talkback key Select Talk back 1 or 2 and press the Auto Cue soft key to toggle Auto Cue on and off AUTOCUE 26 1 NOTES Chapter 26 Project Management INTRODUCTION To further enhance Project Management within the Station the following features within the Project Menu are available Project Navigation Keys Figure 1 Project Keys ADDITIONAL PROJECT MENU ITEMS Press the Proj key then press the next key to reveal the extra menu items Password Protection Any S
156. are to turn red You may include the minus sign or not just as you prefer Crossfade from Zero This is used when you have set a crossfade that is longer than one of the clips in the overlapping region When ON is chosen the short clip will fade in such a way that it will reach a level of x at the edge of the clip even if the crossfade is not at an end When OFF is chosen the clip will fade in the normal way as dictated by the crossfade parameters and then it will stop playing at its end with the level still up Fade Def on Butted Clips This option allows you to decide whether fade defaults are used at butted clips It is generally a good idea to leave it switched off if the audio is continuous across your edits Distinguish Crossfades If this is set to ON crossfades are shown on the video screen using black shading Auto Update DL File Allows you to have Station create a Dubber file automatically whenever a Project is closed Options are NEVER ASK you will be prompted each time a Project is closed or ALWAYS Wave Menu Audio Format Allows you to choose whether Wave Menu operations Time Stretch etc produce new Master Recording in the original format of the clips being processed or in the current system bit depth Automatic Extension When ON causes a new file to be created automatically if the 4 Gigabyte maximum file size is reached while recording This file is an extension of the previously existing file and all cl
157. ary File List Filter A list of the current library files i e Projects from which the current Project is bor rowing clips can be displayed by typing BLUE L The list can be filtered to show only libraries that are offline which means they cannot be found on the network connected to this machine and therefore cannot be opened This filtered list is use ful because you can see immediately which files must be restored to the system be fore the borrowed clips in the Project will play properly Waveform List Filter A list of all Master Recordings Waveforms used by the current Project can be dis played by typing BLUE w The list can be filtered to show only waveforms which have no clips referencing them choose NOT USED with the mouse SYSTEM FILES 35 10 Meter Settings The Meter Calibration Law sets different curves for the channel meters There are two groups from 1 to 3 has a lower limit of 54 dB and from 4 to 6 has a lower limit of 72 dB Within each group the lower numbered curves devote more meter length to the higher levels You can change the meter calibration law at any time the meters are displayed by typing law number RETURN where number is the me ter calibration law you wish to use Meter Red Level allows you to set the level at which the meter elements are coloured red You can also change this at any time the meters are displayed by typing red number RETURN where number is the audio level where the meters
158. at the file occupied f delete files with no write permission p show file name and ask before deleting x delete files from execution directory z get list of file names from standard input z lt path gt get list of file names from lt path gt DELDIR Function Delete a directory Syntax deldir lt opts gt lt dir gt lt opts gt Options q delete directories without asking questions f delete files with no write permission z get list of directory names from standard input z lt path gt get list of directory names from lt path gt DF Function Print Disks Tape Drives Found and Mounted on The System Syntax df lt opts gt Options e Debug Listing t lt name gt Only display info with devices with file manager type lt name gt z Debug Enable FAIRLIGHT OS COMMANDS 35 19 SYSTEM FILES DIR Function Display directory contents Syntax dir opts dir names lt opts gt Options a show all files d show directories with a slash e extended dir listing n treat dirs like files r recursive dir listings r num recursive dir listing to depth num s unsorted dir listing u unformatted listing X directory is execution dir z get list of dir names from standard input z path get list of dir names from path DISKINIT Function Initialise a disk drive Syntax diskinit device lt size gt device device name size total sectors DD TOT
159. ation How AudioBase Recognises Text When you tell AudioBase to publish a text file it must match up the file and its con tents correctly with a Project It will do this automatically if the information is correct The File For AudioBase to recognise a text file it must have a name of the format XXX txt where XXX is any string of up to 15 characters not including illegal ones space amp 1 N B an underscore is shown as a space on the video screen The system recognises no difference between upper and lower case AudioBase has three ways to associate a particular text file with a particular Project Here they are in order of priority Project Identification number matches the one in the Project Project Name on the first line matches the Project Name this is unreliable if there is more than one Project in your system with that name AudioBase will choose the first one it finds The name of the text file is the same as that of the Project not counting the suffixes ditto If none of these conditions is true AudioBase will ask you to choose which Project goes with this text file at the time you start publication AudioBase has two ways to associate the text describing a particular clip with the same clip in the Project Here they are in order of priority The AudioBase number in the text file matches one in the Project file The Clip Name in the text file matches one in the Project file this is
160. ators Simple GRA ura a fud A PP DES SIP Defeat iure ans Slip Soft Key Function viri M DR Snap Shot ibi s E Xa Snapshots cw argu d beer bec onm Pr Soft Key Functions o MCN pM vU MP CDS Solo Call Follow Solo Clear Ln Solo Contrast sees Solo On Off Solo Safe o o o ooooooo o o Solo in Place vivre oda Sony 9 pin Cable ca Sony_ID File AAA 4 SOUTCE sspe rare Speaker Mutes ves seo ted Speaker Sets TXT 22 404 4 Speakers su sr een A ar 10 7 10 14 13 3 6 8 7 3 13 3 21 2 6 8 35 16 6 2 6 4 6 5 10 7 Split Range la uos 10 9 Spread Control 225 4 2245 8 9 Starting the System 39 3 StartUp sra dee ehe 39 6 Stereo Chips 22 cars 4 4 9 10 Sttete sinn 20 2 Sublrames eve dude ev ERA 4 6 o E A ON 35 5 Surround Control 13 6 Surround Pann r 2 4 2404 een 8 7 Swap ke dh dd PEN 22 2 a lis 9 3 30 4 Sync Conflict us uario se 30 7 Syne Point aeii Tesee as 10 14 SyviCSOutce 2 A s mug 9 3 30 4 Sy Blle aaa 6 8 35 16 System Files oos es aec oo acus 35 2 System Pape ne Lea e s eus e 35 9 System Ports 23444 2et ive bs 35 11 System_ Variables 2 serene 35 14 T gri pec EL 10 4 CA pot ot Sad aware a A and bas ad 4 3 Talkback rs ds os sn 15 2 Talkback Time Threshold 35 14 apa ae 9 7 TC FORMAT u 2222 E 9 3 30 2 TC LOCK WINDOW 35 14 Terminology ara 2 2 Threshold
161. ators are coloured as follows Green The signal level is above the threshold Yellow The signal level has fallen below the threshold Red The signal level has stayed below the threshold for longer than the HOLD time This means that the recording will be gated GATE MENU NOTE 1 The gating information gained during recording is based on the threshold and hold values set at the time of the recording If you change those values and then issue the gate command the audio will be re scanned 2 When you have armed tracks for recording and the meters are displayed a traffic light display shows you the gating activity 3 When COMMIT is toggled ON the system will ask you to confirm by pressing the Enter key before anything destructive happens While the computer is waiting for confirmation you may play the audio to check whether it is okay before pressing Enter To escape at this point press any soft key or mode key GATING DURING RECORD 20 1 NOTES Chapter 20 Time Compression amp Expansion INTRODUCTION The Station provides powerful DSP functions which can be found within the Wave Menu All of the WAVE functions create a new waveform on disk A new clip is cre ated and the original is not altered or erased Wave Key Figure 1 Wave Key PERFORMING TIME COMPRESSION EXPANSION Step 1 To enter the Wave Menu press the WAVE key Press the MODE soft key Step 2 Use the jogger wheel or and keys to select
162. be UPPERCASE ENABLE ENGINE YES Use NO if you wish to boot the surface without an engine Use UPPERCASE QDC_IPADDRESS 192 200 150 14 192 200 150 14 is the IP Address of the QDC engine MSAT IPADDRESS LOCAL Default setting Connects to MSAT running on PC running FMC MSAT IPADDRESS 192 200 150 34 192 200 150 34 is the IP Address of MSAT running on a separate machine optional FMC APP NAME FMC 74 exe FMC exe is the name of the app to run in the path below Note Beta releases of FMC may be given names such as FMC 86 exe either change the name of the FMC release software to FMC exe or edit the FMC APP NAME entry in the DREAM bat file to refer to the new file FMC Command Line Options FMC command line options are listed below It should not be necessary to modify the settings in DREAM bat Option Description b cmdline C CONSOLE INSTALLATION Run cmdline when FMC exits lt cmdline gt may include a path E g the following will run dream start note spaces are accepted bc projects mixers dream start Run MSAT on the same machine as FMC ignoring the p set ting Run without dsp i e mix surface does not use TCP IP to communicate with the QDC engine Run without editor emulator inhibits editor and keyboard comms to the QDC engine Run without graphics Hi res mode 1600 x 1200 otherwise runs 1280 x 1024 Lo res mode 1024 x 768 Enable mix automation 39 1
163. brary menu to select equaliser presets Dynamics A library of 100 dynamics settings is provided Each dynamics preset stores all the parameter settings of the dynamics section on the signal path currently called to the Master fader Press the DYN soft key in the Library menu to select dynamics presets Channel A library of 100 channel settings is provided Each channel preset stores all the pa rameter settings on the signal path currently called to the Master fader excluding I O patching ALL CONSOLE A library of 100 console settings is provided Each console preset stores all mixer pa rameters for all feeds and buses All patching routing and name settings are also stored INTRODUCTION 12 3 Default Console Template A special console library file named default is used to store the default setup of the console on power up You may overwrite this file with any setup that suits your requirements SAVING A PRESET Follow these steps to save a preset Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 LOADING A PRESET Call a signal path to the Master fader by pressing the Call key and then pressing one of the feed or bus selection keys Adjust the parameters you wish to store Press the Lib key to display the library menu Press the EQ DYN CH or ALL CONSOLE soft keys to select the type of preset you wish to store Press the Save soft key and type a new name for the library pre set The previously ent
164. but they can be accessed by un folding the Bus Master from the Central Fader Mapping Link Groups Ifa member of a link group is selected to map to a fader only the link group master is mapped This also occurs if link group members are selected within a multiple se lection See Link Groups on page 11 2 for more details on link groups FADER SETS Holding Faders To temporarily retain a selection of channels in their current fader positions when recalling a new fader set simply touch and hold the faders while pressing a fader set key The existing channels will temporarily replace those in the new fader set Press the fader set key without holding a fader to resume the normal fader set METER BRIDGE A Sidecar may be fitted with an optional meter bridge This includes one meter for each of the faders on the Sidecar Meters on page 14 2 DUAL SIDECARS If two Sidecars are attached to a Station system various functions behave as follows Fader Sets If a Fader Set was created with two Sidecars present and there is currently only one present the first twelve signal paths in the Fader Set are placed on the existing Side car If a Fader Set was created with one Sidecar present and there are currently two present the first twelve signal paths in the Fader Set are placed on the first Sidecar and the faders of the other Sidecar are unused until the Fader Set is changed Two Master Sidecars SIDECAR OPERATION If
165. by Fairlight s DaD Dubber product The file will be named XXX DL where XXX MT is the name of the currently open Project File Exchange Exports an ML3 file to the root of the current disk drive which can be read by Fairlight s File Exchange partners The file will be named XXX ML where XXX MT is the name of the currently open Project WAV Export Opens the WAV Export sub menu used for turning Station audio into WAV files EXPORT 29 9 WAVE Export AUDIOBASE JAME y IMPORT EXPORT The WAV Export function may use either the red clips under the cursor or if a Range is present clips that are wholly included Real time audio features such as EQ level and fades are ignored only the raw wave form data is exported All exports from the WAV Export Menu are in BWF format FEK EXPORT MENU _ Export WAV Files m SAMPLE RATE AE Figure 4 Wave Export To export clips to a Broadcast WAV File Step 1 Select the clip or clips to be exported Ranges of clips can also be selected with each clip entirely within the Range being ex ported to a Broadcast Wav file Step 2 Press the Export key on the console and select WAV EXPORT soft key Step 3 A menu will appear in the top of the video screen prompting for the destination and name of the Broadcast WAV file that will be created Use the Up arrow and Down arrow keys on the console to move the cursor up and down the list Use the and keys on the console or arrow
166. c is present To select the sync source Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press Digi Step 2 Press the SYNC soft key Step 3 Use the jogger wheel to select the desired sync source Step 4 Press Enter or if INPUT is selected press a specific track key to select the input The sync sources are as follows INT Internal sync uses internal crystals to generate the clocks AES The sync is taken from the AES sync input on the back of the QDC Engine WCLK The sync is taken from the WORD CLOCK input on the back of the QDC Engine VIDEO The sync is taken from the VIDEO input on the back of the QDC Engine INPUT The sync is taken from a DIGITAL INPUT selected with the track keys Input Sync Auto The INP SYNC soft key in the Digi Menu is available for all sync sources other than INPUT Select INP SYNC to automatically sync to the lowest numbered armed digital input When no tracks are armed the system reverts to the main sync source The AUTO mode is used to automatically sync to an external input that is not locked to house sync synchronisation Manual selection of INPUT sync ensures that the operator is al ways aware of the current sync source For more information on synchronisation issues see Synchronization on page 30 5 f This mode should be used with caution as it is easy to lose the integrity of system Project Frame Rate The frame rate timecode format can be changed at any time but should be set to the local s
167. cally switch that bus in to the monitoring chain whenever the Faders To key is pressed Faders to Aux While BLUE Faders To is active any of the Aux bus selection keys may be selected and the Aux key will be illuminated All channel faders now control the level at which their signal path is sent to the selected Auxiliary bus Bus Master faders are excluded The MUTE key now controls the aux send ON OFF control If the selected Aux bus is wider than mono the soft pot allows the panning of the aux send to left and right bus elements The mute pan and fader controls may be automated and will record data for the aux bus send level pan and ON OFF parameters Use the enable keys next to the Master fader to enable these parameters for automation Fader To Input While BLUE Faders To is active the Input soft key may be chosen All track feed faders now control the level prior to the disk recorder This can be used to control the level going to disk during recording Note that live feed faders are inactive when Faders To Input is selected The fader control can not be automated Faders to Direct Output While BLUE Faders To is active the Direct Output soft key may be chosen All channel faders now control the direct out level The Mute key toggles the direct output ON and OFF The fader control may be automated and will record data for the direct out level pa rameter Use the enable key next to the Master fader to enable
168. cause undue stress on the connector or cause the connector to partially disconnect which can damage the serial drivers When fitting or reconnecting the cable ensure that power is off at either the Engine or the Console Ethernet 100BaseT Cable ENGINE INSTALLATION The ethernet cable connects the Station to the QDC engine The ethernet connec tion is required for automatic software configuration of the console If no network is present the console can be connected to the engine with a cross over cable Oth erwise the ethernet connection can be made via a hub or other network infrastruc ture The maximum length for the ethernet cable is 90 metres Sony 9 pin Cable The 9 pin cable connects the Engine to a Sony 9 pin protocol machine The recom mended maximum length for this cable is 30 meters The Engine is supplied with a 5 meter cable Again it is recommended that the power be switched off at one end when connecting to protect the drivers VGA Cable The video cable connects the VGA output from the Engine to the attached disk re corder Monitor It is a 15 way shielded RGB and sync 75 Ohm cable with high den sity D type connectors at each end A maximum length of 20 meters is typical The QDC Engine is supplied with a 10 meter cable which has been found to be suitable for the majority of monitors Analogue Audio Cable Standard shielded pair audio cable is suitable Digital Audio Cables Digital audio cables connected to the Engi
169. ce which may restrict the flow of air As with all computer systems the DREAM Station will operate more reliably if stat ic generating floor coverings are avoided EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED 37 5 INSTALLATION Do not fit the QDC Engine into a closed environment except where ducted cool air is forced through the Unit Do not run the unit whilst it is on or near the ground as it will accumulate dust which may eventually cause a failure Please Avoid Fitting the QDC Engine or Console where air circulation will be restricted Installing QDC Engine or Console close to heat source Installing in dusty or damp area Installing in area subject to vibration Installing in area with strong magnetic or electric fields 3mm hex key 37 6 ENVIRONMENT 38 1 NOTES 38 2 Chapter 38 Engine Installation MECHANICAL INSTALLATION The QDC Engine unit takes up 8 RU when fitted into a 19 rack It operates from either 100 120v or 200 250v 50 60Hz with the mains inputs being auto switch ing At least two people are required to fit the Engine into a 19 rack as the unit weighs approximately 31kg If available it is suggested that a third person guide the Engine into the rack from the rear The Engine should be fitted so that there are no restrictions to the ventilation at the rear of the unit If external SCSI devices are to be connected it is recommended that these be placed on a rack tray above or below the Engine
170. ck se lection keys to toggle feeds in and out of the selection The currently muted feeds are illuminated Step 3 Press the Mute key again to return to the previous mode While any signal path is muted the Mute key flashes An alternative way of using the Mute key is to hold it down make a selection of signal paths then release it This causes immediate return to the previous operation mode The disk recorder mute functions are available from the Mute key at the top of the console The While the Mute key is held down or while its menu is active the soft key menu offers a number of additional functions Mute On The On Off soft key toggles the entire set of muted channels Off on and off The Fold Key DREAM software release 1 2 does not support Fold This information is included for future reference MASTER FADER 7 6 The Fold Key can be used whenever a group of signal paths has been selected to the Central Fader This could be a Link Group a Fader Group or a Bus Master Pressing the Fold key causes the members of the Group to be represented by the speaker mute keys From this position they can be individually called on to the Fad er and the Parameter Pad Pressing the Fold key again causes the speaker mute keys to resume their normal function For more information on grouping see Grouping on page 11 2 Automation Mode Selection The AUTO key places the selected signal path in automation record Fader Dis
171. cks may be derived from an external WCLK or AES sync that is running at either the system sample rate 0 5 or 2 0 x system sample rate Thus the system may be run at 96kHz locked to a 48kHz refer ence or at 48kHz locked to a 96kHz refer ence for example SRC O P sample clocks may be independ ently locked to any of the available refer ences except digital inputs Where O P sample rates are exactly 2 0 or 0 5 x system sample rate the output rate is automati cally sample locked to the system rate 40 30 DIMENSIONS WEIGHT AND POWER REQUIREMENTS CAUTION Double pole neutral fusing Disconnect power before changing fuse or servicing A DREAM Station Width 669 mm 26 Depth 525 mm 20 7 135 mm 5 3 Keyboard Draw Extension Height at Front 40 mm 1 6 Height at Rear 131 mm 5 2 Net Weight 3lkg Supply Voltage 100 120 200 240 VAC 50 60Hz auto ranging Power Consumption Fuse DREAM Station Sidecars 150 Watts Fuse 3 15A 20 x 5mm Quickblow F Glass or Ceramic 250V UL only Width 569 mm 22 4 Depth 525 mm 20 7 Height at Front 40 mm 1 6 Height at Rear 131 mm 5 2 Net Weight 13 kg Supply Voltage 85 264 VAC 47 63Hz Power Consumption 150 Watts Fuse DREAM QDC Engine Fuse 3 15A 20 x 5mm Quickblow F Glass or Ceramic 250V UL only Width 485 mm 19 Rack Mounting Depth 460 mm 18 1 Height 360 mm 14 2 8 RU Supply Voltage 85 275 VAC 49 63Hz Weight
172. clockwise performs the same function as the key GO TO A MARK The GO TO MARK function locates the transport at a mark For details on entering and editing marks see Marks on page 27 2 Step 1 Press the GO TO key Step 2 Press the MARK soft key Step 3 Stored marks are listed on the video display Select the desired mark using the jogger wheel and keys or type the mark number on the numeric keypad Step 4 Press Enter FAST MARK LOCATION Step 1 Press the GO TO key Step 2 Press one of the track keys It is possible to quickly locate to the first 24 marks using the track keys GO TO LAST Locates the transport to last place you located to using the Go To Menu GO TO CLIP NAME The GO TO CLIP NAME function locates the transport to the head of the desired clip It also incorporates an alphanumeric search function to help sort through clips by name Step 1 Select GO TO Step 2 Select CLIP NAME Step 3 Clips are listed on the video display Select the desired clip us ing the jogger wheel or by typing the name of the clip using the alphanumeric sort facility described below Step 4 Press Enter GO TO A MARK ALPHANUMERIC SORTING Go To When the GO TO CLIP NAME soft key is pressed the display lists all clips in the Project If you start typing letters on the alphanumeric keyboard the list is short ened to show only clips starting with matching letters The name you type appears in the upper console di
173. cted feeds Patching to Insert Returns Patching procedures for feed and bus insert returns are similar to the procedures just discussed Insert patching is done from the Insert menu PATCHING INPUTS PATCHING AND ROUTING Patching Feed Insert Returns To patch a physical input to a track or live feed Insert Return Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Enter the Insert Menu by pressing the Insert key Select the Feed to be inserted or retain the existing selection Press the Returns soft key Press the Patch soft key The Track Feed keys now show the physical inputs Press the ANALOG DIGITAL and AES MADI soft keys to select the desired input type Inputs that are available for patching are illuminated dim Inputs of the selected type already assigned to the Feeds select ed are brightly lit Inputs assigned to other feeds or returns flash between offand dim illumination Inputs that are not installed are not illuminated and cannot be selected Select the input by using the Track Feed keys at the top of the Station If a signal path already has an insert return input choosing an other one will replace it while choosing the current one will unpatch it Press Insert to return to the previous mode or press an edit mode key or other menu key to continue mixing or editing Patching Bus and Link Group Insert Returns For more information on Link Groups see Grouping on page 11 2 To patch physic
174. d Please contact your local Fairlight office or Distributor 38 14 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 39 1 NOTES Chapter 39 Console Installation MECHANICAL INSTALLATION The Station console provides a control surface to allow an engineer to work quickly and efficiently The console should be placed on a level horizontal surface Ensure the location of optional Station Sidecars and associated control and processing equipment is within easy reach NOTE VA Care should be taken to provide the operator with a comfortable seating posi tion This will reduce fatigue improve efficiency and minimize the possibility of strain injury Figure 1 Station Console INTERCONNECTING THE CONSOLE AND ENGINE Figure 2 Station Console Rear Panel Connections MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 39 3 On the rear of the console make the following connections 1 Connect the controller cable D9 connector to controller port cable part no ASE1221 A 2 Connect the ethernet cable to the ethernet port If connecting to a 100BaseT ethernet hub this should be a standard straight RJ45 shielded CATS cable If connecting directly to the QDC engine use the CAT5 cross over cable supplied cross over cable part no JAA3643 3 Connect an IEC mains power supply cable to the power supply inlet port The Control Cable The control cable connects the console to the QDC engine unit The cable carries RS2
175. d above existing clips the clips become layered one above the other Only the top clip is heard during play back The left most end of the clip is known as the head The right end is the tail Clips also contain information about the original timecode location of the audio data when recorded and the current timecode location of the displayed clip Ifa clip shows only a portion of the associated audio data on disk it may be trimmed to show more 4 4 Layered clips only exposed portions are heard Figure 4 Layered Clips Mono and Stereo Clips DREAM systems support the playback of both mono and stereo clips Mono clips are output only on the track upon which they appear Stereo clips are displayed on a single track but are output with the left channel on the track where the clip is dis played and the right on the next track For example a stereo clip on track 3 will have its left output on track 3 and its right output on track 4 Stereo clips can be identified by the black line along the centre of the clip This line separates the left waveform on the top and the right on the bottom Stereo clips are created by recording to a stereo link group see Link Groups on page 11 2 for more details Mono Clip Stereo Clip Figure 5 Mono and Stereo Clips SELECTING TRACKS AND FEEDS The Station has 48 dedicated Track Feed selection keys and 8 Live Feed selection keys The feed selection keys perform different funct
176. d for automa tion recording Step 3 Press the track selection keys to toggle the enable state of the tracks you wish to record automation on You can also use the soft switches above the faders on the Sidecar to enable the signal paths associated with those faders LINKING AUDIO AND MIX RECORD WITH PRIME 25 13 Step 4 Press the Enable key to enter the Enable menu Press the Fader soft key to enable recording fader mix data only on the selected paths You can enable any parameter you wish to record Step 5 Arm the tracks you wish to record This step is not necessary to enable automation Step 6 Press the PLAY and REC transport keys to drop in to record Note that the enabled tracks enter Write Step 7 Press STOP or PLAY to drop out of record The enabled tracks return to Read The selected parameters return to the previously recorded values over the Glide Out time specified in the Utils menu PREVIEWING MIX MOVES AUTOMATION Preview is used to temporarily isolate parameters from playing back previously re corded mix data This can be used to establish and audition a new mix on selected feeds and parameters before dropping this new mix data in to replace the previously recorded mix data Entering preview is similar to entering automation record using either touch enable or the AUTO keys However while the Preview key is lit data can only be written by pressing the In key or automatically punching in over an In Out range
177. d press RETURN Respond by pressing RETURN until you get the 4 options A B C and D as above Choose D Type RETURN to restart the QDC engine and it should now boot from the external PCI card To return to booting the internal boot disk follow the procedure above and select the appropriate disk DRIVE FORMATTING 36 4 BOOTING FROM EXTERNAL DISK DRIVES 37 1 NOTES Chapter 37 Installation INTRODUCTION The Station is part of a new family of products from Fairlight which marries togeth er QDC processing with an ergonomic physical control surface in a combination that has a significant impact on productivity and efficiency The Station interface incorporates a dedicated editing and mixing console a unique graphical user interface and powerful database capabilities These tools allow the op erator to work quickly and efficiently without impeding the creativity of the record ing editing and mixing process ABOUT THIS MANUAL The purpose of this manual is to provide all the technical information required to design a suitable installation for the Station console and QDC engine and to fit and connect the units It is assumed that the installer is familiar with both analog and digital audio systems and professional installation techniques Full operating instructions specifications and connection details are included in the User Manual which can be found in Adobe Acrobat pdf form on the Documenta tion and Upgra
178. d to start the edit the right hand is used to change the track selection or transport position then the target key is released to paste and finish the edit A one handed edit is performed by pressing and releasing the target key to copy then pressing the Enter key to paste Undo and Redo Station provides 64 levels of undo and redo Pressing the Undo key once will undo the last edit Pressing the key multiple times will allow you to progressively step backwards through previous edits Use the Redo key to reinstate edits that you have undone Redo is only available immediately after an Undo Undo is not possible after any SPACE MENU functions the NUMBERS function in the Track Menu or the KEEP function in the Import Menu EDITING 10 5 Single Track or Multitrack Editing Editing may be performed on single or multiple tracks Multitrack edits are per formed on all selected tracks When pasting from the clipboard the number and or der of tracks is retained Selecting a different destination track moves the entire selection Clip Layers When clips are recorded or pasted on top of each other they become layered one above the other Only the top clip is heard To move a clip from a lower layer to the top use the POP TAKES function by pressing the Takes key See Takes Menu on page 22 3 for more details Transport and Selection Keys The Binnacle includes several keys located within easy reach of one hand designed for fast tra
179. de CDROM included with your Station The User Manual is locat ed in the DOCS directory of the CD which also contains the Adobe Acrobat Reader installation file for Microsoft Windows Acrobat reader may be installed on any computer to view or print the User Manual as required The User Manual is also available as onscreen help by clicking on the Help key on the Dream Start splash screen Engine Installation Chapter 38 contains complete instructions for the physical installation of the QDC engine This chapter also includes instructions for configuring external SCSI storage devices Station Console Installation Chapter 39 contains complete instructions for installing the console and starting the system This chapter also covers setting up networking on both the console and the QDC engine Specifications Chapter 40 includes details of all electrical and physical properties and connector pin assignment details Trouble shooting See Trouble shooting on page 4 17 of this chapter for help if the installation does not proceed as expected Operation For full operational instructions please refer to the Station User Manual The User Manual is available as onscreen help by clicking on the Help key on the Dream Start splash screen The manual is also included in Adobe pdf form on the CDROM in cluded with your Station INTRODUCTION 37 3 SYSTEM OVERVIEW The Station is made up of four interconnecting components Station
180. dec or hex Options a lt number of allocated sectors gt b Search for bad blocks before initialization That might take few hours on larger disks c lt sectors cluster gt default 1 d lt min sectors in root dir gt initializes partition as FAT32 Only options c b e and n from the above list can be used with f ff As f above but format fixed disks as if they were removable media i lt device gt is image file m lt max sectors in bit map gt n volume name gt default Blank p lt partition start sector gt dec or hex q quiet do not prompt user r do not read device s do not display parameters v logical block size in bytes gt x do not use old DD parameters z read DD TOT from scsi drive w initializes partition as FLFS gt 4 Gb Only options n q s from the above list can be used with w 35 20 ED Function Edit a file Usage ED opts lt filename gt options t disable TABS h enable hex math d enable tvt debug output ERRMESG Function Translate error message usage errmesg options errorcode lt errorcode gt options errmesg num num where num num is two decimal numbers errmesg num where num is a single decimal number If a single number is prefixed by 0x then that number is used as a full 16 bit HEX error code The program can be made to exit with the supplied error code with x ESPFIND Function Searches directory struct
181. dedicated macro keys and fader set selection keys Each fader strip includes a motorised touch sensitive fader LCD legend panel channel status indicators mute and solo keys a call key auto mation enable key and an assignable soft switch and motorised touch sensitive soft pot A Station system may also include one Slave Sidecar The Slave Sidecar includes twelve fader strips only The Slave Sidecar can only be added to a system which al ready includes a Master Sidecar Figure 1 Station Master Sidecar USING THE SIDECAR The Fader Set keys page through the available signal paths in banks of twelve by default For example to access the fader for track feed 14 press the Fader Set 2 se lection key and move the second fader from the left The feed or bus name is dis played in the LCD above each fader Press the CALL key next to the fader to call the feed to the Parameter Pad See Fader Sets on page 13 7 for details of user definable fader sets The fader MUTE and SOLO key all perform their respective functions as described below The soft pot defaults to L R pan control FADER STRIPS Twelve fader strips are provided each one able to control a signal path Each fader strip includes the following hardware components INTRODUCTION Signal Path Indicator The signal path indicators display if a fader is assigned to one of the four Sub buses or the Main Bus or when controlling a track feed if the track
182. dit hit the edit target key to copy or cut then hit enter to per form the paste To do a two handed edit hold down the edit target key to copy or cut then release it to perform the paste as described in the steps above Cut Copy with Range On Targets Range Clip Copies all clips or parts of clips within the Range into the clip board When Enter is pressed the range is pasted with the cur sor positioned at the copy point Head Copies all clips or parts of clips from the beginning of the Range to the current cursor position into the clipboard When Enter is pressed the range is pasted with the cursor positioned at the end of the range Tail Copies all clips or parts of clips from the current cursor posi tion to the end of the Range into the clipboard When Enter is pressed the range is pasted with the cursor positioned at the beginning of the range CUT AND COPY EDIT MODES 10 9 BINNACLE EDITING Range Soft Key Functions When the Cut Copy or Erase keys are selected on the Binnacle and a RANGE is selected the following additional LCD soft key options are available Split Range Fill B FWD Fill Overlap Bounce Fill The FILL function is used to automatically repeat a section of audio to fill a Range on a track to create background fills or buzz tracks The audio used for the fill is the clip currently on the clipboard from the last CUT or COPY function The OVERLAP Splits clips at the beginning and the
183. drives can be downloaded from http www fairlight net FORMATTING A DRIVE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 OR OR Step 5 Attach the new disk drive to the system with the power OFF Its SCSI address must be different from that of any other disk or tape drive already attached Note its SCSI address Power on the QDC Engine and console Check that the disk is seen when the SCSI bus is scanned If necessary type quit to return to the hash prompt To initialise a disk in RBF format type at the prompt diskinit tdXY v 1024 c 128 z RETURN Y is the SCSI address of the drive X is the PCI bus O inter nal 1 external bottom PCI slot To initialise a disk in FLFS format necessary if the drive is larger than 4 GBytes type diskinit tdXY w RETURN Y is the SCSI address of the drive X is the PCI bus O inter nal 1 external bottom PCI slot To initialise a disk in FAT32 format for compatibility with Microsoft operating systems diskinit tdXY f RETURN Y is the SCSI address of the drive X is the PCI bus O inter nal 1 external bottom PCI slot You will be asked to verify that you wish to go ahead with this operation If you confirm the initialisation takes only a few seconds A reboot is necessary after initialisation FORMATTING OPTICAL DISKS Formatting optical platters is exactly the same as formatting hard disks INTRODUCTION 36 3 MAKING A NEW SYSTEM DISK A new system disk may be setup usi
184. e Step 1 Press the OFFSET key Step 3 Enter the offset value or press the CAPTURE soft key POSITION The fifth soft key toggles between offset and position modes The position mode displays the actual position of each ma chine This allows you to enter known timecode references rather than calculating offsets SONY ID CONFIGURATION Refer to The Sony_ID File on page 35 8 for details machine specific configura tions d NOTES ie The position of any machine when online is defined as Station s position plus offset So if for example you give a machine a 30 second offset it will immediately locate forward 30 seconds unless it is the Master in which case all the other machines will locate backwards by 30 seconds The Station will display the time Master minus Master Offset when the Master is online Only positive offsets are allowed so if you want a minus one hour offset put in a 23 hour one Or CLEAR the Numeric Register type the number press the minus key and then Enter To capture an offset between a Sony machine and the disk recorder first move the Sony machine to a timecode and take the disk Offline by Disk Now move the Sony machine to another timecode Select the Offset Menu then Disk and press the Capture soft key to produce a new offset for the disk which keeps it in sync with the Sony machine s current position SONY ID CONFIGURATION 32 1 NOTES Chapter 32
185. e Space Menu move the transport so that Clip A is touching the cursor and press COMMIT Now erase Clip B and it can be seen that the part of Clip A that was un derneath Clip B has been removed This part of the data on disk has now been re moved minus the Handle This time do the same thing but make a copy of Clip A on another track After committing the original Clip A and erasing Clip B Clip A has now been trimmed as before but can still be extended using the TRIM command This is because when ever there is a clip anywhere in the Project that references the same Master Record ing even partially the Master Recording will not be touched allowing the uncommitted clips to be trimmed out to their fullest possible extent RECOVERING WAVEFORMS The W Display To see a list of all the unreferenced master recordings type BLUE w The top section of the video display changes to show a list of waveforms which have no clip refer encing them You can scroll up and down the list using the jog wheel The display shows the size birthday and clip name The birthday is the timecode at which the recording was originally made The Recover Waveform Command If you have found a master recording that you think is the one you want type RW number Enter where number is the waveform number printed at the left end of the line The RW stands for Recover Waveform This command will place a clip using the full length of the master recording on your curr
186. e M1 offline Step 3 Locate the transport so the cursor lies on the sync point of the clip Step 4 CUT or COPY the clip to the clipboard Step 5 Place M1 online the transport will relocate to the video at the desired frame Step 6 Press lt Enter gt to paste the clip It is also possible to CUT or COPY the clip before locating to the desired frame THE OFFSET MENU MACHINE CONTROL Each machine on the system can be given an Offset This is the amount by which its timecode position exceeds the Station console s dis played time When the disk recorder is offset its position which is shown on the video screen will differ from the Console position which is normally shown in the upper right of the LCD There are two ways of entering offsets One is to specify a machine s offset and the other is to specify its desired position A toggle in the menu allows you to choose which you prefer In this menu the upper portion of the LCD shows the current position or offset of all the machines in the system Restore Restores the machine s offset to the value it had before it was selected for changing effectively UNDO ing an offset change Capture Makes the offset equal to the current position relative to the Master time display The device being offset must be offline during this process or it would always locate to its existing offset Step 1 Press the OFFSET key Step 2 Select the soft key for the desired machin
187. e Master Fader The members are now represented by the Speaker Mute keys Press the CALL key then press a Speaker Mute key to call an indi vidual feed to the Master Fader Link group members may be called and their parameters or faders adjusted in turn Press the Fold key again to re group the feeds and return the Speaker Mute keys to their normal function Ifany other feed or mode is selected the link group will return to its folded state If the optional Station Sidecar is available individual link group members are unfolded to the first eight faders See Sidecar Oper ation on page 13 2 for more details on Sidecar operation Follow these steps to access a link group member by selecting Step 1 Step 2 Press the CALL key prior to calling any path to the Master Fader Hold down the BLUE key and press the feed selection key of any member of a link group Double press to uniquely select a track feed for editing Once the BLUE key has been pressed it can be released as long as one or more selection key is held down This enables multiple selections to be made with two hands FADER GROUPS Fader Groups are not available in the DREAM 1 2 software release but are included here for future reference Fader Groups are similar to other VCA or DCA grouping schemes and allow one fader or parameter control to control a group of signal paths Fader Groups can in clude any number of members A feed may belong to only one fader group
188. e On Stop Mix menu item to determine what data is written after the transport stops Automatic Automation Punch In You can drop in and out of automation record at pre defined In and Out points Automation is only recorded on enabled paths and parameters as described above Step 1 Step 2 AUTOMATION Press the Mix key to enter the mix menu Move the transport to the required In point and press the From Binnacle key to capture the In point The In point timecode loca tion is displayed in the Mix menu 25 12 Step 3 Move the transport to the required Out point and press the To Binnacle key to capture the Out point The Out point is displayed below the In point in the Mix menu Step 4 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Active In key to make the automation In point active The In key flashes blue when active Step 5 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Active Out key to make the automation Out point active The Out key flashes blue when active Step 6 Move the transport to a location before the In point and press PLAY The selected parameters on the selected feeds will enter WRITE or TRIM when the transport moves past the In point and return to READ when the transport moves past the Out point The Active In and Out points become inactive once the system has dropped in or out The selected parameters return to the previously recorded values over the Glide Out time specified in the Utils menu Active IN and Active OUT When th
189. e compression ratio This sets the gain reduc tion ratio input to output applied to signals which rise above the threshold level The control range is 1 0 1 to 10 1 FEED Forward Back The second soft key on the left of the Parameter Pad toggles the detector sidechain signal source before or after the gain reduction element This feature is not yet im plemented Compressor Attack Rate The third rotary control adjusts the attack rate time constant of the sidechain detec tor The control range is 0 to 100mS Compressor Hold Time Press the Hold Rel soft key to toggle the fourth rotary control between Hold and Release Hold time controls the delay between applying gain reduction and com mencing release of gain reduction Compressor Release Rate Press the Hold Rel soft key to toggle the fourth rotary control between Hold and Release The Release control adjusts the release time constant of the sidechain de tector The control range is 0 03 to 4 03mS Compressor Bypass The Comp IN OUT soft key bypasses the compressor section Gain Makeup The last rotary control on the left hand side of the Parameter Pad adjusts the gain makeup This gain element is used to compensate for the overall gain reduction caused by reducing the dynamic range of the signal Delay The last rotary control on the right hand side adjusts a look ahead delay for the sidechain which applies delay to the entire signal path This feature is not yet imple men
190. e difficulty starting the sys tem you may need to check the QDC network settings See QDC Network Setup on page 38 7 for complete details QDC Login Settings To ensure the systems starts up without intervention it is necessary to set the QDC engine up to login automatically on start up This is achieved with the following steps Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 CONSOLE INSTALLATION Power on the QDC Engine Station console and video monitors Log in if necessary by pressing Enter typing m x and then press Enter At the prompt type be login mfx Enter Now each time the system is powered up the user is logged in automatically To revert to the original state where a user has to login and manu ally launch the application repeat steps 1 and 2 and at step 3 type be login Enter 39 12 I O CONFIGURATION The I O Config txt file specifies what I O hardware is fitted in your QDC engine This file must be edited to allow the Console to properly address the physical I O hardware The I O Config txt file is stored in C Projects Mixers FMC Data direc tory Open the file with the Notepad text editor define the physical I O as described in the file You can also name individual I Os which will then bring their names up on the FAT channel when you patch them To determine the I O configuration of an installed QDC system quit to the MFX prompt and type qdcinit 1vv The screen will display a complete list of I O components and p
191. e enabled for automation record press any feed or bus selection key to toggle its enable status This selection is also referred to as the mix mask The Enable Matrix The enable matrix is the selection of which parameters are enabled to enter automa tion record These parameters are the intersection of the selected signal paths and the enabled parameters Track Track Track Track 1 2 3 4 Live Live Live Live Bus Bus Fader E NEN Mute EQ HF Gain 1 EQ HF Freq 1 EQ HF Shape 1 EQ HF Gain 2 EQ HF Freq 2 Dyn Comp Thresh Dyn Comp Ratio Aux 1 Gain T Aux 1 Mute Aux 1 Pre Aux 1 Pan Aux 2 Gain AUTOMATION BASICS AUTOMATION Parameter Status Mixer parameters can be in one of five states Read Write Trim Isolate and Pre view The current state of each parameter is displayed by coloured illumination sur rounding all rotary encoders illumination in the bottom half of all switches and text indicators next to each fader Note that the text indicators next to the faders display the status of the fader level parameter not the status of the entire signal path The five parameter states are described below Read When parameters are in Read the automation system takes control of the parameter values and the physical position of the pots and faders Controls ar
192. e following controls the four sends are arranged from top to bottom on the Parameter Pad Level The level control adjusts the amount of signal sent from the selected feed to the aux iliary bus The control range is OFF to 10dB Send ON OFF Press the send ON OFF soft key to toggle the feed to auxiliary bus assignment on or off This control has the same effect as bus assignment via the bus assign menu Pan If the selected bus is configured with a stereo format the pan control adjusts the amount of signal sent to the left or right bus element If the bus is mono the pan control has no effect The control range is 100L to 1L CNTR 1R to 100R Pre Post Press the Pre Post soft key to derive the auxiliary bus send level from before or after the feed fader MULTI TRIM The Multi Trim key allows the controls in the Parameter Pad to affect multiple signal paths at the same time While Multi Trim is active all controls on the Parameter Pad temporarily act as vir tual master controls for all signal paths selected on the Selection Panel For example you may select Track Feeds 19 23 then increase the Band 1 gain for all of them The fader and rotary controls offset existing settings while the switch controls are absolute i e the first press of any switch puts all selected signal paths into one state while subsequent presses change all of them to the other possible state See Multi Trim on page 11 7 for more details MULTI TR
193. e illuminated green when in Read A parameter is in Read whenever any automation data has been recorded for that parameter anywhere in the project and the transport is in PLAY Mix On must be engaged for a parameter to be in Read The parameter can be taken out of Read by engaging one of the other modes Write Trim Parameters must be explicitly placed in Write or Trim Mix On must be engaged for a parameter to be in Write or Trim The Write Trim key must be toggled to the Write or Trim position WRITE automation is armed for record and absolute values are written for the se lected parameters Indictors are illuminated red TRIM automation is armed for record and relative values are written for the selected parameters In trim mode moving a control applies an offset to the values already recorded for the selected parameter For example in trim mode increasing a fader level by 10dB will add 10dB to the previously recorded fader levels retaining all the relative changes in the previously recorded data In trim mode indicators are illu minated amber In Trim mode the control continues to move as it follows the previously recorded data As soon as the control is touched it becomes stationary and any changes made to the control s position are written as offsets to the underlying data If the control is touched but not moved no changes are made If the control is moved then re leased when not in Touch Snap the system continues to playbac
194. e input monitoring options cover all recording requirements The are five monitor modes for armed tracks are summarised below REW FF STOP PLAY REC JOG SH INPUT Input Input Input Input Input Track AUTO Input Input Input Track Input Track RECORD Mute Mute Mute Track Input Track MUTE Mute Mute Mute Track Mute Track REPRO Mute Mute Mute Track Track Track These setting support the following example applications INPUT Track feed always monitors input Studio monitoring is fed through headphones or recording is not from a Microphone and the desire is to punch in cued from source material rather than playback material Use INPUT AUTO Track feed monitors input on record and track on playback Studio monitoring is fed through cans voice over recording or over dubs Choose AUTO to allow cueing of source or monitoring of Studio Mic RECORD Track feed monitors input on record and track on playback and mutes when stopped Use when monitor system handles mutes to the studio when system is in Record but input monitoring is required in the control room However input must be muted when system is in STOP to avoid feedback Use RECORD MUTE Track feed only monitors track on play back muted in all other states Studio is fed through speakers Recording is from microphone Therefore we never want input to be monitored Choose MUTE Mod
195. e the quality of your final product by using sample rate conversion at the moment it leaves Station for the last time You should make these choices at the very beginning of the Project and then you may use any other combination that suits your purposes temporarily during the re cording and editing process Control of Sony Machines Sony machines are those conforming to the Sony 9 pin transport protocol Station can control one of these machines which should be connected to 9 pin Port A or B It is best if that machine is being referenced by the same house sync signal as the Station normally video If this is not possible the Station and the Sony machine are essentially free wheeling and the Station will relocate if a relative drift of more than one frame occurs This will cause a dropout in the audio SYNCHRONIZATION 30 7 Conflicting Sync Sources If Station is being told to synchronise to one of its digital inputs see Selecting A Sync Source on page 9 3 and is also being told to chase LTC there is a natural conflict If this condition ever arises the Station will issue an error message TIMECODE SETUP 30 8 SYNCHRONIZATION 31 1 NOTES 31 2 Chapter 31 Machine Control INTRODUCTION Station can communicate with industry standard Sony 9 pin serial controlled ma chines with a timecode reader installed providing control over external video or audio machines directly from the console Machine
196. e the signal is sent at equal level to left centre and right loudspeakers The divergence control approximates an equal loudness contour as it adds signal to more loudspeakers As the control moves beyond 70 signal is removed from the centre loudspeaker or the loudspeaker closest to the pan target and progressively added to the other loudspeakers At 10096 divergence there is no THE SURROUND PANNER 8 9 signal in the centre loudspeaker and the signal is distributed equally to left and right loudspeakers Two dimensional Diverge Two dimensional mode is useful for quickly spreading a signal to all loudspeakers or for contracting an effect from all loudspeakers down to a single speaker Two di mensional diverge includes front and surround loudspeakers As the divergence is increased towards 70 the signal is distributed to all loudspeakers Beyond 70 the signal is removed from the loudspeaker closest to the pan target For Link Groups divergence is applied to all members individually When a link group is created with default pans divergence is set to minimum The Spread Control The spread control is only available when a link group is selected The spread con trol adjusts the perceived size of a surround mix The spread control range is from 0 to 10096 At 0 the display reads POINT meaning point source At 100 the display reads FULL meaning full surround At FULL spread the LR and FB pan controls have no effect as each member of
197. e to a new READ value discontinuously as when dropping out of RECORD or when merging one mix into another this value is used to define a ramp from the previous data to the new data Press the Glide Out soft key and use the jog wheel numeric keys or keys and press Enter to change the Glide Out val ue Saves the following system settings to the following files Monitor Sources TXT patching and formats of external monitor sources Speaker Sets TXT patching and formats of all speaker sets Setup Variables TXT Call Follow state and console bright ness Follow these general steps for using Multi Trim Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Press the Multi Trim key Press feed bus or fader group selection keys to toggle them in or out of the Multi Trim selection Select Absolute or Relative mode by pressing the Abs or Rel soft keys in the LCD menu In absolute mode the values of the indi vidual member s parameters are set to the position of the virtual master control In relative mode changes made to the virtual mas ter controls are applied as offsets to the values of the member s parameters Adjust the Master Fader or any controls in the Parameter Pad to control the group The mixer display will be updated to show the 25 18 changes as they occur No changes are made until the master con trols are changed To update all parameters for all channels selected when in Abso lute mode press the apply values
198. e to prevent feedback e REPRO Track feed monitors track on record and play back The desire is to record onto tracks that are already being monitored e g record 5 1 Mix onto tracks that already have source material on them or the console includes Track Group switching facility Use REPRO Assigning Track Feeds to Buses Track feeds must be assigned to a bus to be monitored through the studio monitors Step 1 Press the Bus Assign key Step 2 Press the bus selection key of the destination bus to which you want to assign track feeds This can be the Main Bus or any Sub or Aux Bus The selected bus key will light and so will all the Track and Live Feed keys associated with feeds already assigned to that bus Step 3 Press any Track Feed key to toggle its assignment on or off Press the A11 Feeds soft key to assign all feeds to the select ed bus Press the deassign all soft key to deassign all sources RECORDING 9 9 RECORDING Step 4 To complete the assignment process press the Bus Assign key to return to the previous state or select any other mode Ensure that the track feed fader is up by checking the screen display If the fader level is down press the CALL button and then press the track selection key to call the feed to the fader Selecting a Monitor Source Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Source Setup key next to the Monitor Level control Step 2 Press the bus selection key of the bus you have as
199. e transport passes over the Active In point the automation system will drop in to Write or Trim on enabled parameters When the transport passes over the Ac tive Out point the automation system will drop back in to Read Once the transport has moved over the In or Out point they are made inactive and must be made active again by holding down a BLUE key and pressing either the In or Out key This means you can quickly audition the changes you have just recorded by pressing the Play Again soft key in the Play Menu without having to first dis able automation Punch Once the In and Out points are made active use the Punch key to preroll five sec onds before the In point and play through an automation pass dropping into Write or Trim at the In point and dropping back into Read at the Out point The trans port continues to play after the Out point LINKING AUDIO AND MIX RECORD WITH PRIME Use the Prime key to enter automation record on the selected feeds when the disk recorder enters record Prime mode supports all ADR record features as well Use Prime to drop in and out of automation record each time you drop in and out of record on the disk recorder mixing as you record and doing two jobs at once Step 1 Press the Mix ON key to enable mix automation Step 2 Press the Mix or Enable key to display the Mix or Enable menus When the Mix or Enable menus are active the illuminated selec tion keys display the signal paths currently enable
200. e types AVAO 8 x Analog Inputs QDC 50 Pin I O 8 x Analog Outputs DIO DIO 4 x Digital Inputs 4 x Digital Outputs QDC 50 Pin I O 4 x Digital Inputs 4 x Digital Outputs DIO AO 4 x Digital Inputs 4 x Digital Outputs QDC 50 Pin I O 8 x Analog Outputs AO AO 8 x Analog Outputs QDC 50 Pin I O 8 x Analog Outputs Two other cable types containing only eight pairs are possible although it is advis able to fit all connectors with a complete set of sixteen pairs to allow for future op tions NONE AI 8 x Analog Inputs QDC 50 Pin I O NONE DIO QDC 50 Pin I O 4 x Digital Inputs 4 x Digital Outputs SPECIFICATIONS QDC I O Connector Description Audio I O 16 balanced pairs digital or analog Connector 50 Pin D Female GND Pair 17 33 50 Pair 1 16 32 49 Pair 2 15 31 48 Pair 3 14 30 47 Pair 4 13 29 46 Pair 5 12 28 45 Pair 6 11 27 44 Pair 7 10 26 43 Pair 8 9 25 42 Pair 9 8 24 41 Pair 10 7 23 40 Pair 11 6 22 39 Pair 12 5 21 38 Pair 13 4 20 37 Pair 14 3 19 36 Pair 15 2 18 35 Pair 16 Standard I O Cable Pinouts Al AO GND Channel 17 33 50 Analog Input 1 16 32 49 Analog Input 2 15 31 48 Analog Input 3 14 30 47
201. eaker Mute keys to toggle destination bus elements on and off Multiple signal paths may be selected at the same time If any bus elements are enabled in all of them their Speaker Mute keys are solidly illuminated and may be toggled off If any bus elements are enabled in some but not all the select ed signal paths their Speaker Mute keys flash Pressing any flashing key enables that bus element in all the selected signal paths Press again to remove the bus element Bus elements that are not enabled in any of the selected signal paths are dimly lit and may be toggled on for all selected signal paths Stem Assign Soft Key Options Press connect all to connect the selected feeds to all bus elements Press disconnect all to disconnect the selected feeds from all bus elements Press boom only to disconnect the selected feeds from all bus elements except the Boom element Press all but boom to connect the selected feeds to all bus elements except the Boom element Stem Assign Group Members If a Link Group is chosen as the source the individual elements are all stem assigned identically If it is desired to change the group or bus members individually the bus is first selected then hold down a BLUE key and double press the member feed se lection key See Link Groups on page 11 2 for more details Main Bus Aux buses cannot be assigned to the Main Bus 5 18 ASSIGNING SIGNALS TO BUSES 6 1 NOTES 6 2 Chapter 6
202. ectory z get list of dir names from standard input z lt file gt get list of dir names from lt file gt MOVE Function Move Data from one Folder to another Syntax MOVE pathlist source pathlist destination PD Function Display current directory Syntax pd RENAME Function Rename a file or directory Syntax rename opts path name lt opts gt Options 35 22 x path starts from execution dir SCSIDM Function Test Sectors on a disk Syntax SCSIDM SCXO This test can take up to 45 minutes depending on the size and content of the drive The time resting and percentage are displayed once the command is executed SETIME Function Set system date and time Syntax setime opt yy mm dd hh mm ss am pm Options d dont display time s setime for battery backed up clocks TCOPY Function Copy an entire folder Syntax TCOPY Name of the Source folder Name of the des tination folder gt UPGRADE Function Utility to Install an MFX release from File or Tape Version 1 15 Syntax upgrade lt options gt Options f file Absolute Pathlist to MFX3 Software Image d lt device gt Search Root of lt device gt for release files n name Name to Give new disk if and when it is formatted default MFX3 t Use tape device default mt0 s Dont sort release files when browsing g Dont OS9GEN don t make disk bootable disk FAIRLIGHT OS COMMANDS 35 23
203. ed track selection key To select a range of tracks press and hold down the first track select key and double click the last track selection key you wish to be active All other selections will be deselected To select a single track double click on the desired track selection key All other se lections will be deselected Selecting a track which is a member of a link group will select all tracks in the link group To select an individual member of a link group hold down the BLUE key and press the track selection key The track selection may also be changed by holding the Track Sel key to the left of the jog wheel and turning the jog wheel or pressing the or keys This is useful for moving selections from one track to another Figure 6 Feed Selection Keys 4 6 TIME SCALE AND DISPLAY ZOOMING The track display represents 24 hours The timescale can be zoomed from a six frame display to an eight hour display The blue time scale graduations above the tracks give a reference in hours minutes seconds frames At all times the cursor position indicates the current play point II OOO DE AN 00 00 00 00 00 00 45 00 Figure 7 Time Scale Display Step 1 Hold down the Zoom Binnacle key Step 2 Turn the jogger wheel to zoom in and out Sub frames can be toggled on or off by holding down the BLUE key and pressing the SUBF key on the numeric keypad Track display selection and zooming is possible while playing and recording
204. elected tracks under the cursor The current clips that will be affected are highlighted in RED on the video screen Range when RANGE is on the target consists of all clips and parts of clips on selected tracks lying inside the Range The current clips and parts of clips that will be affected are highlighted in RED on the video screen Head if RANGE is off the target consists of the parts of the clips on the selected tracks touching the cursor and lying to its left If RANGE is on the target consists of the clips and parts of clips on the selected tracks lying between the Range start and the cursor In both cases the pieces that will be affected by the command are the RED parts lying to the LEFT of the cursor Tail if RANGE is off the target consists of the parts of the clips on the selected tracks touching the cursor and lying to its right If RANGE is on the target consists of the clips and parts of clips on the selected tracks lying between the cursor and the Range end In both cases the pieces that will be affected by the command are the RED parts lying to the RIGHT of the cursor One and Two handed Editing The Binnacle allows Cut Copy and Trim operations to be performed with one hand or two depending on the operators preferred style and the details of the par ticular edit Each edit is described in both modes below A copy edit is a two handed edit when the target key is pressed and held with the left han
205. emes and allows one fader or parameter control to control a group of signal paths Fader Groups can include any number of members SUMMARY OF GROUPS Link Group Live Feed Link Group Select any Yes Yes Master level member in m equal to first Selection Track Feed member Panel Fader Live Feed Fader Group Fader No No Group Master Group menu key Track Feed and soft key LINK GROUPS Link groups allow the control of up to eight feeds with one fader Link groups can only include track feeds or live feeds not a mixture of both Link groups can be cre ated in any standard multichannel format Link Group Format When alink group is created the number of members determines the format of the link group When a link group is created you have the option of retaining the cur rent pan setting of each member or using default pan settings for the chosen format If default pans are selected each member of the group is panned to one element of the bus in the following order If 2 Feeds are linked they are panned LR If 3 Feeds are linked they are panned LCR If 4 Feeds are linked they are panned LCR S If 5 Feeds are linked they are panned L C R LS RS If 6 Feeds are linked they are panned L C R LS RS B If 7 Feeds are linked they are panned L C R LS CS RS B INTRODUCTION GROUPING If 8 Feeds are linked they are panned L LC C RC R LS RS B The panner of each member is panned hard to one Bus Element
206. emitones Step 5 Press Enter Range The STRETCH and VARI functions can be activated by defining a target Range for the clip The function is performed as soon as FIT RANGE is selected The FIT RANGE soft key appears when a Range is defined Step 1 Define a Range for the destination clip with the From and To keys Step 2 Locate the cursor over the source clip this does not have to be in the Range Step 3 Press the FIT RANGE soft key STRETCH AND VARI 20 5 PITCH The PITCH function can be activated by entering the pitch shift in semitones and cents hundredths of a semitone The function is performed as soon as the pitch is entered Adjust the Algorithm and Scale as described above Step 1 Locate the cursor over the source clip Step 2 Press the SEMITONES soft key Step 3 Enter the pitch using the jogger wheel or numeric keypad Note Holding down the BLUE key and pressing the and keys will increment in whole semitones Step 4 Press Enter NOTES G The audio format for the new Master Recordings created by the Wave Menu may be chosen on the System Page The options include processing in the clips original bit depth or in the current Project bit depth TIME COMPRESSION amp EXPANSION 20 6 PITCH 21 1 NOTES Chapter 21 Solo and Mute INTRODUCTION The Station provides two independent solo and mute systems The solo and mute features described in this chapter are integrated into the disk rec
207. en rr mc dn 16 2 RENAMING A PROJECT 16 2 NAMING TRACKS eta Lx uA o 16 2 NAMINGELIPS soc dica aaa 16 2 SEED NAMES nt E 16 3 NAMING FEEDS AND BUSES 16 3 Chapter 17 Clip Level INTRODUCTION 08 17 2 Applying a Level Change 17 2 LEVEL SOFT KEY FUNCTIONS 17 2 SOU us vus e SION e URS Bee IY NEA 17 2 MV zcv ci trieste io haie lth on esto d 17 3 Mode Veritas a rdener hel demi 17 3 Ino tdeo itm ure PEA 17 3 Ranges rn nn ea Um 17 4 Chapter 18 Clip Equalisation INTRODUCTION aud see e ems 18 2 Applying EQ Senn cd ur e epa 18 2 EOHDISPLAY 23 cm rnt a gi 18 3 Selecting Shell 2er leu P adi hend 18 3 Numeric EDtby en R0 o e e pert on 18 3 New or Old asus staaten 18 3 Inor QUE tias rt 18 3 Copying an EQ uso rer 18 4 Chapter 19 Gate Menu INTRODUCTION cut e agit e n 19 2 GATING GEIR Sx ea citant o ann 19 2 GATING DURING RECORD 19 3 Chapter 20 Time Compression amp Expansion INTRODUCTION 2 23 a RR 20 2 PERFORMING TIME COMPRESSION EXPAN SION 3 ie ota eat 20 2 STRETCH AND VARI llle 20 3 Selecting an Algorithm 20 3 Selecting the Scales sexa nr 20 3 PEPE e 20 3 Target IANS cart anes TNCS DEN 20 4 Pitch using Varispeed 20 4 Range ond orita dia 20 4 PUT N ee 20 5 Chapter 21 Solo and Mute INTRODUCTION aic dtes oa ee ate te 21 2 SOLOING TRACKS 2 4 302 Ran 21 2 SOLO FOLLOWS EDIT 402000
208. end of the Range If no clips lies at a Range end then no split is performed at that point Uses the current contents of the clipboard to fill the current Range A Backward Forward Fill is performed using the contents of the clipboard to fill the current Range Defines the amount of Overlap to be used to auto fade the loops in a Fill operation Bounce mixes audio from all clips in a Range and creates a new clip on a destination track which you are prompted to enter Bounce includes EQs levels and fades To interrupt a bounce once started press CTRL Q parameter can be set to cross fade the clips Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 COPY or CUT the desired audio to the clipboard The cur sor s sync point will be maintained Create a RANGE encompassing the area to be filled Press the OVERLAP soft key and enter a value in frames Press the FILL soft key B F Backwards Forwards FILL Pressing the B F FILL soft key will fill the Range as per the normal FILL function except every second clip will be reversed 10 10 Cut Copy with All Layers Overlapping clips are arranged in layers When the All Layers key is selected after pressing either the Cut or Copy keys the target will consist of all clips on all layers When range is off and you press All Layers or Razor a range is created that encloses the selected clips if any This range is bounded by the head and tail of the top clip under the cursor If there is no cl
209. ent Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Figure 1 GPI ADR and Preroll Keys USING THE ADR FUNCTIONS Arm the desired tracks Press the ADR key Set the IN and OUT points using the From and To keys Select the desired mode Press the CYCLE soft key The soft keys function as follows REHEARSE Selects REHEARSE mode When CYCLE is pressed the trans port loops continuously between the Preroll and Postroll points Armed tracks will switch to input between the IN and OUT points RECORD PLAYBACK toggles between the following modes RECORD PLAYBACK When CYCLE is pressed the transport locates to the preroll point and does one pass to the postroll point with the trans port dropping in and out of record at the IN and OUT points When CYCLE is pressed the transport locates to the preroll point and plays to the postroll point Both of the above modes return the transport to the Preroll point on completion INTRODUCTION 24 3 CYCLE Starts the transport in one of the above modes PREROLL Locates the transport to the preroll position MORE Toggles to a second soft key Menu The second soft key Menu functions as follows EARLY IN The transport drops into record as soon as this key is pressed This enables dropping in during the Preroll period REC OUT Selects between one of the following modes PROG The transport drops out of record at the OUT time OPEN Recordings continue until stopped by the opera
210. ent track with its head at the cursor position You can now play the clip to find out whether it was the one you wanted RECOVERING WAVEFORMS 26 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Recovering Stereo Clips If the master recording is a stereo recording it will have two waveforms and you will often see them on consecutive lines They will have the same numbers in their birthday size and space fields Occasionally due to the dispose command the two waveforms will not be at consecutive positions in the display To recover both sides into a stereo clip type RW numberl number 2 Enter using both waveform numbers You cannot create a stereo clip out of two original mono recordings You can make a mono clip from one side of a stereo waveform but this will prevent it from subse quently being made into a stereo clip By typing the two waveform numbers in re verse you can reverse the right and left sides of the waveform Return to Birthday To get a clip back into sync with the position it was originally recorded highlight the clip and type the Return to Birthday command RTB Enter The Waveform Show Command If you wish to show all the Master Recordings in the project type WS a Enter This stands for Waveform Show ALL Each referenced Master Recording will show you the name of the first clip that references it If you want to return to a display of only the UNREFERENCED master recordings type WS Enter NOTES Disposing and Commit
211. er these unnecessary seeks are avoided In addition any files that are being passed to the DaD will play much bet ter if this parameter is set to 16 or more samples THE SONY_ID FILE The Sony ID file tells the system about the characteristics of different 9 pin devices such as how many analog and digital tracks the device has The file also contains de vice ID entries for the Fairlight products which are reported to external master ma chines when the Fairlight product is connected as a slave Device ID Delay Jogsh When Station is connected as a slave 9 pin device it replies to the controlling ma chine with a device ID Normally this is set to the official Fairlight ID which is FA However some editors or synchronisers may not recognise this device name It is therefore useful to be able to give a device name that is familiar to the editor or other controller To open Sony ID for editing first QUIT then type ED DD USR SYS SONY ID RETURN to open the file in a text editor on the QDC engine Towards the end of the file you will see the entries for Fairlight products To change the system s device name edit the following line OxFA OxA2 Fairlight Digital Audio Workstation QDC Engine 24 fps The Fairlight QDC ID is oxFA 0xA2 Change this ID to the ID for any Sony de vice that the controlling machine recognises All the Sony devices listed in this file have their corresponding ID at the beginning of the line wh
212. er as detailed below Select the type of machine that will come on line when M1 or M2 is pressed Choic es are Sony A or Gives you control over any Sony 9 pin transport It is always Sony B the timecode Master see options below LTC A or Causes Station to chase the timecode coming in either LTC LTC B port or B 9 pin Rem Station emulates a Sony 9 pin slave machine and can be con trolled from the 9 Pin Slave port Lace Unlace Press the soft key to toggle between Lace and Unlace This determines if video machines will remain in shuttle or unlaced wind when a FASTWIND FFwd Rew command is issued When Lace is ON the REW and FF commands send shuttle at maximum speed This keeps the picture on the heads during rewind or fast forward for some machines which would otherwise unlace e g Sony 9800 When Lace is OFF the machine is given a REW or FF command which will cause the tape to unlace in some machines In other machines however e g BetaCam SP these commands do not unlace the tape but give a very fast shuttle in the desired direction When issuing a GO TO command to the machine if the distance over which it is to be shuttled is greater than this time the machine is given a REW or FF command regardless of whether Lace is ON or OFF Setting this time to zero guarantees that the slave will be given a goto Lace Time Lock MACHINE CONTROL Press the Lace Time soft key use the jog wheel or numeric keys a
213. ere the GPO stays on until the transport stops Fires a GPO immediately for testing purposes If pulse is set to held the GPO switches on and off as the key is pressed and released Type CUE MUTE Description Can be set ON or OFF independently for the PREROLL and POSTROLL periods of the ADR Menu Examples Controls whether the original track is heard during each stage of the ADR recording Ahead If toggled ON GPI is ON during the Preroll section IN If toggled ON GPI is ON during the record section Fire Fires a GPO immediately for testing purposes If pulse is set to held the GPO switches on and off as the key is pressed and released NOTE PA When a GPO is set to the BEEPS type Station can also output audio beeps from one of its channels This is controlled from a configuration file called mdr cfg which is discussed in The MDR Configuration File on page 35 6l SETTING LOOP MODE The Loop Menu places the transport in a continuous loop The transport will repeat the loop until Stop or another transport key is pressed Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Press the Loop key Set the loop start and end points using the From and To keys on the Binnacle Press the Enter key The Loop should now begin To end the Loop press the Stop key SETTING LOOP MODE 24 9 ADR GPI 8 LOOP 24 10 SETTING LOOP MODE 25 1 NOTES Chapter 25 Automation INTRODUCTION The optional DREAM automation sys
214. ered name is displayed by default Press Enter to save the preset or press the Cancel soft key to can cel the operation Follow these steps to load a preset Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 DELETING A PRESET Call the destination signal path to the Master fader by pressing the Call key and then pressing one of the feed or bus selection keys Press the Lib key to display the library menu Press the EQ DYN CH or ALL CONSOLE soft keys to select the type of preset you wish to store Turn the jog wheel to scroll through the list of available library presets for the selected type Press the Load soft key then press the Yes soft key to confirm the operation Unwanted library presets can be deleted by following these steps Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 LIBRARY Press the Lib key to display the library menu Press the EQ DYN CH or ALL CONSOLE soft keys to select the type of preset you wish to delete Turn the jog wheel to scroll through the list of available library presets for the selected type Press the Delete soft key then press the Yes soft key to confirm the operation 12 4 DELETING A PRESET 13 1 NOTES 13 2 Chapter 13 Sidecar Operation INTRODUCTION The Station Master Sidecar expands the real time control capabilities of the Station system by adding twelve extra fader strips and an upper section comprising joystick panner soft pot and soft switch function selection panels
215. ery clip has a small fade at the head or tail to make it sound smoother This is called the default fade and you can control its length One way is to type FDEF n RETURN on the PC keyboard where n is the length you want in sub frames This method lasts only during the current session and is not remembered by the Project or the machine Creating Level Changes By pasting a copy of a section of a clip onto itself you are able to change the level of the copy to create a level change If the copy is cross faded with the original a smooth level transition results When using the COPY and PASTE functions be sure to be in STOP otherwise a slight movement of the jogger wheel may result in phasing during the fades FADES EDIT MODE 11 1 NOTES 11 2 Chapter 11 Grouping INTRODUCTION Grouping is a fast and convenient method of controlling more than one signal path from a single fader or parameter control There are two types of groups Link Groups and Fader Groups Link groups are designed for controlling groups of feeds in multichannel formats Link groups simplify many tasks associated with working in surround formats and share many of the operational features of surround format buses Link groups can include up to eight members The simplest link group has two members and fulfils the function of a stereo channel Fader groups are not available in DREAM software release 1 2 Fader Groups are similar to other VCA or DCA grouping sch
216. es To enter a seed name first select GLOBAL or TRACK then select the SEED soft key and enter the name The descriptions for these modes are as fol lows GLOBAL The global seed name is given to every new recording in the Project followed by an incremental number For example ifa global seed name Voice Over is entered the first recording will be named Voice Over 1 The numeric suffix will incre ment automatically for each recording i e the next recording will have the name Voice Over 2 If more than one track is recorded at the same time the recordings on each track will have an incremental number TRACK In the track mode each track can be given an individual seed name This is done by selecting a track key before entering the name When in the track mode recordings on tracks with seed names will be given the track seed name followed by an incremental number If a track has no seed name it will be given the global seed name NOTES y 1 The system defaults to a null GLOBAL seed name This results in recordings being given names with numbers only 2 To clear seed names select the desired name function then type a new seed number and press Enter 3 To start recording at a specific number edit the seed name s numeric suffix 4 Use only the following characters in names A Z a z 0 9 _ underscore 5 Ifa Range has been created all clips that are wholly inside it can be named with one command NAMING F
217. es complete specifications and connection details for the DREAM Station System ABOUT THIS MANUAL 2 1 NOTES 2 2 Chapter 2 Station Overview INTRODUCTION Station is the latest generation digital audio workstation from Fairlight offering ex ceptional power and speed for recording editing and mixing Configurable with up to 48 disk recorder tracks 48 digital I O and 48 analog I O the Station integrates full recording and editing capability with a fully featured fully automated mixing engine capable of delivering final mixes in any format up to 7 1 surround A highly intuitive work surface enables fast ergonomic access to all of Station s many features These include 6 band EQ full dynamics processing and compre hensive grouping of faders and buses Station is also equipped with Fairlight s new Binnacle editor Designed to offer a natural transition for existing MFX users the Binnacle presents the key editing functions in a new and highly optimised layout centred around the jog wheel While Station is a complete solution for the smaller studio undertaking full produc tion and mixing of the majority of short form commercials and radio work it is also part of the DREAM Family of products and is the ideal partner to the Satellite a digital audio workstation and DREAM Console as part of a multi room production system in a larger facility Station comes in two different configurations as detailed below TERMINOLOGY
218. esigned to accept one internal 3 5 drive plus two 5 25 drive bays which can be used for fixed hard disks removable drive enclosures or an Exabyte tape drive The system is supplied with one system disk which contains the Operating System and DREAM software With a second optional SCSI Controller installed within the Engine an additional seven SCSI devices can be attached externally Wi M N EH BB 0 0 2 5609502020 75000 0 020 909909095 00090990909909200000 9 b 0005500 E 5 EB A Kingston or Exabyte Drive Bays System Boot Drive Figure 4 Configuring Disk Drives Internal SCSI Bus The internal SCSI bus is a wide Ultra SCSI single ended bus with 68 pin connectors Only wide SCSI devices should be fitted internally SCSI ID s of internal devices can be set to 0 through to 6 SCSI ID 7 is reserved for the SCSI controller Typically tape drives should be set to ID 5 when connected on either SCSI bus Optical based devices should be set to ID 3 when connected on either SCSI bus The last device on the SCSI chain should be terminated with an active terminator External SCSI Bus The optional PCI external SCSI interface provides an Ultra 2 wide SCSI bus sup porting both low voltage differential LVD and single ended drives The external interf
219. eters A path may be a single mono live feed or a multichannel surround format link group Track Feeds Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track A Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 8 Track 9 Track 10 Track 11 Track 12 Track 13 Track 14 Track 15 Track 16 b dan eec uaa Aux Nux Aux Aux 12 3 4 Live Feed Buses Track 1 seur ww d JE M D Signal Path Display Figure 4 Mixer Monitor Graphical Display Track Feeds Each Track Feed is represented with the track name EQ pan dynamics display fad er level signal meter enable indicators for EQ dynamics solo and mute Live Feeds Each Live Feed is represented with the feed name EQ pan dynamics display fader level signal meter and enable indicators for EQ dynamics solo and mute Buses The main bus and auxiliary buses are displayed with fader level and signal level me ters Signal Path Display The signal path display represents the configuration of the selected path The signal flow is shown in the order it is configured Signal paths may be simple mono live or track feeds or multichannel surround format Link Groups which can be selected and modified from a single set of controls USER INTERFACE STARTING THE SYSTEM Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Figure 5 The DREAM Start Splash Screen Power on the QDC engine first press the switch on the rear of the Engine to the right a red light will appear Next press and hold the button on
220. ext Export 28 13 Chapter 29 Import Export INTRODUCTION Gaia an 29 2 IMPORTING CLIPS 1 a dies oa 29 2 Opening a Project as a Library 29 2 Importing a Single Clip 29 3 Importing a Range of ClipS 29 3 LOCKING A LIBRARY TO PICTURE 29 4 IMPORTING WAVE FILES 29 4 Importing a Single WAV File 29 4 Importing Multiple WAV Files 29 5 Search Options visera PES 29 6 Broadcast WAVE ande 29 6 Importing Other File Formats 29 7 ENPCIRT S 1 cesso seq dote d ito aca me 29 8 WAVE EXPO d sanos rt 29 9 File Export Options 25 53 s ocio 29 10 File Exchange s i eere eds 29 10 COMPATIBILITY WITH MFX2 AND MFX3 29 11 Backwards Compatibility 29 11 Chapter 30 Timecode Setup INTRODUCTION 2 2 22 22222 30 2 Setup Menu Options i24 04 30 3 Project Sample Rate caves ts 30 4 Selecting A Sync Source 30 4 Input Sync Auto 4 3 ardid tl 30 4 SYNCHRONIZATION sese 30 5 Position suis bep beer aha a a 30 5 MOON eia ete Ce lea 30 5 How Station Synchronises 30 5 Digital Synchronization Conflicts 30 5 Pull up and Pull dowN 30 6 Control of Sony Machines 30 6 Conflicting Sync Sources 30 7 Chapter 31 Machine Control INTRODUCTION 222 31 2 M1 AND M2 SETUP 31 3 IYpes ass nee dape 31 3 Lace Unlace
221. eys Moving past the left of all sample rate buttons turns them all off meaning there is no limitation and files of all sample rates will be found FORMAT Allows you to limit the search to only mono or only stereo files Use the Left and Right arrow keys to change the set tings Moving past the left of all buttons turns them all off mean ing that both mono and stereo files will be found Broadcast WAVE Broadcast Wave files include a timecode location contained within the file Import ed BWFs can be placed at their sync time on the timeline Importing a Single Broadcast WAV File If the imported file is detected as a BWF file the user can select to either import it to its sync position as defined in the BWF s timecode reference or to the current cursor position When the software determines that a file selected for import is a BWE a dialog pops up Place broadcast wave at sync time Press Y or N The name of the resultant imported clip is derived from the BWF s description field truncated to 24 characters if necessary If the imported file is a normal WAV file it will be placed on the track selected with the head of the clip at the cursor position IMPORTING WAVE FILES 29 7 Importing Multiple Broadcast WAV Files When the first BWF is encountered the following popup box will appear on the video screen Place broadcast waves at sync times Yes BWF only to be placed at its sync time subsequent BWEs will
222. fader mix data 25 10 Step 3 Press the Mix key to display the Mix menu Press the Touch AutoEn soft key Touch Auto Enable allows the mixer to record mix data for any enabled parameter on any path that is touched The parameter must be enabled in the Enable menu Step 4 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Utils key to display the Mix Utils menu Press the Glide Out soft key and turn the jog wheel or use the numeric keys to enter a glide out time in frames The range is from 0 to 99 Enter a value of 25 and press Enter or the Exit soft key to enter the value The glide out time smooths the transition from newly recorded mix data to the previously recorded moves This relates to drop ping out of record from touch write or by pressing the AUTO key or the Out key Step 5 Press the Touch key to select Snap In Snap mode the parameter enters record when touched and returns to read when released In Latch mode the parameter remains in record when released Step 6 Press PLAY and move the fader as required to modify the previ ously recorded mix Notice that when you touch the fader the automation indicator changes to WRITE to show that you are currently recording mix data The indicator returns to READ when the fader is released Enable Pan Mute or any other group of parameters and use touch write to record new mix data PROTECTING MIX DATA WITH ISOLATE AND SAFE Automation Safe You can protect all or part ofa mix from accidental c
223. figuration 40 10 STATION WIRING AND CONNECTION DE TAUSCH Ne eterni es eed 40 13 Meter USB coat ent 40 13 Sidecar USB d usse qued sra 40 13 Controllev Engine 42 s de 40 13 Talkback c edu ee 40 14 USB sia ara enr Bee tout 40 14 GPO esd hbode eger a hen 40 15 Pl gins lS canal wade 40 15 QDC WIRING AND CONNECTION DETAILS Kudos ete RV Ee ere t ub SE e AE Ane 40 16 General Purpose Interface 40 16 MUSEE ou a o pu at o 40 17 opel MORE ai de 40 17 Ethernet A ga ettet tee di 40 22 PEE e euch od doe mede ae o do 40 22 OPIN Aes deo Ri AA aii ES 40 23 O cree reed 40 23 OPIO SIave Lava opi v RIT en 40 23 geom ET 40 24 Serial Porta dod 2343 edv RE qub ES 40 24 MIDO ra sn 40 25 AES Syne NO Lusso erre da hed dne 40 25 Moden o si up 3 wear a 40 26 VGAl oi e een 40 26 Word Clock In vis idos rada 40 26 Word Clock Out 2 222 222 40 27 Video Sync IN iecore ndo ret 40 27 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS o oo 40 28 Analogue Inputs and Outputs 40 28 AES EBU Inputs isis re 40 28 AES EBU Outputs 000 dar 44 oa 40 28 Synchronisation suos 2a ES 40 28 DIMENSIONS WEIGHT AND POWER REQUIRE MENTS ui md TIMENS 40 30 DREAM Station ae d 40 30 DREAM Station Sidecars 40 30 DREAM ODE Engine ns 44 5065 ree 40 30 Station Drawings 2 cry En 40 31 INDEX 2 ee etu emu INDEX II xvi TABLE OF CONTENTS NOTES 1 2 Chapter 1 Introduction INTRODUCTION The DREAM Station is part of a new f
224. file with all layers for import by an MEX3 type filex a Enter ML4 To export an ML4 file that can be read by Media Magic and AVTransfer type filex n Enter COMPATIBILITY WITH MFX2 AND MFX3 Any Project created under MFX2 MFX3 MFX3plus MFX3 48 can be loaded into the Station where it will be converted to a Project with full facilities Backwards Compatibility IMPORT EXPORT MEX3plus systems can load 24 track projects via file exchange export as described above Other systems are not back compatible 29 12 COMPATIBILITY WITH MFX2 AND MFX3 30 1 NOTES 30 2 Chapter 30 Timecode Setup INTRODUCTION The Setup Menu is used to configure the Project s timecode format The Digi Menu is used to select the sync source and the sample clock rate The frame rate timecode format can be changed at any time but should be set to the local standard Setup Key Digi Key Figure 1 Setup and Digi Keys Follow these steps to change the frame rate Step 1 Press the Setup key Step 2 Press the TC FORMAT soft key Step 3 Turn the jogger wheel to select the desired timecode format Step 4 Press Enter Step 5 Select Non Drop or Drop Frame if applicable INTRODUCTION 30 3 Setup Menu Options Display Choose units for displaying time timecode TC Feet and timecode Frames in 16mm format F F16 Feet and Frames in 35mm format F F35 or Hours Feet and Frames at either film for mat H F F 16 and H F F
225. ft key Type the first letter of one of the options displayed on the screen as detailed below Deletes the record highlighted at the top of the list from the database Deletes the record from the displayed list but not from the da tabase Deletes all the displayed records from the database Aborts the DELETE operation To deleting all the records from a particular Project follow the steps below Step 1 Press the AudioBase key Step 2 Press the FILE soft key Step 3 Press the PURGE soft key Step 4 Use the jogger wheel or and keys to select the desired Project Step 5 Press Enter GUIDE TO AUDIOBASE2 AudioBase2 is the optional networked version of AudioBase In most ways its oper ation is exactly the same as AudioBase but its installation is very different This is beyond the scope of this manual but is covered in the AudioBase2 Installa tion Manual While AudioBase runs inside the Station computer AudioBase2 runs on a MediaLink server using a commercial database called Microsoft SQL Server The AudioBase2 SQL database can be accessed directly from an HTML browser running on the MediaLink Server or any PC connected to the network Several HTML pages provide functions to search and edit clips and files Several clips may be amended or deleted at the same time These functions eliminate the need to export the database as a text file modify it with Excel and re import it as with AudioBase 1 To export an existing
226. ft key and press Pause Break Step 2 Type Q Y and wait for the hatch prompt to appear Editing a Configuration File Type ED filename RETURN where filename is the name of the file you want to edit Move the cursor around the file using the arrow keys To add text move the cursor to the desired location and start typing Text is always inserted never overwritten To remove text use the DEL or BACKSPACE key Type ESC to view the command options Saving Changes to a File When you have the file exactly the way you want type ESC zY This will close the file and save your changes If you want to abandon editing without saving changes type ESC QY To return to the Disk Recorder program use the trackball to click on the Start key on the DREAM Start splash screen INTRODUCTION QDC NETWORK SETUP SYSTEM FILES The default network settings are suitable for installations where the console is direct ly connected to the QDC engine with the CAT5 cross over cable supplied If the QDC engine is connected to a Fairlight Medialink network the network configu ration of the system may need to be modified Network configuration requires the following changes 1 Edit the nvr setup file on the QDC engine Modify the engine IP address host name network domain name and console IP address Modify the DNS server and domain settings to enable internet access if necessary Modify the Audio Base server address if necessary These setti
227. function is selected the original name appears in the upper console display You can then use the BACKSPACE key to edit the original name Name Key Figure 1 Name Key Step 1 Press the NAME key Step 2 Select the required name function by pressing a soft key Step 3 Edit the name in the upper console display with the PC key board d Step 4 Press Enter RENAMING A PROJECT To rename a Project whilst it is open select the PROJECT soft key in the Name Menu then enter the new name NAMING TRACKS The track names of a Project can be changed to help organise Projects Select the required track and press the TRACK soft key in the Name Menu Enter the new name NAMING CLIPS All clips in a Project can be given an individual name A clip can be copied and given a different name to the original Different clips can also be given the same name To name a clip locate the transport so the cursor lies over the clip selecting the appro priate track if necessary then press the CLIP soft key in the Name Menu Enter the new name on the PC keyboard INTRODUCTION 16 3 SEED NAMES Seed names are given to all new recordings in a Project You will notice that record ings are given an incremental number for each new clip Seed names allow you to enter a name that will be given to each new recording which will include an incre mental numeric suffix In the Name Menu the last soft key allows you to toggle between GLOBAL and TRACK seed mod
228. g a Fader Set To load a Fader Set press one of the numbered keys in the Fader Sets section Mapping a Fader Set To change the mapping in a Fader Set Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Select the Fader Set to be changed by pressing a Fader Set key on the Sidecar Press the Map key The left most fader amongst the Sidecars is now ready to have its signal path reassigned and its CALL key will flash Select the desired signal path from the Selection Panel You may choose a Track Feed Live Feed Bus Master Main Sub or Aux Once you have assigned the first fader the second fader be comes ready for assignment If you want to start assigning elsewhere on the surface press the CALL key for the fader you want to assign After assigning it the selection will move to the right as be fore To accept the current assignment for a fader immediately without making any selection press the CALL key of the next fader to the right You may assign a range of signal paths to a range of faders Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 SIDECAR OPERATION Select the Fader Set to be changed by pressing a Fader Set key on the Sidecar Press the Map key Press the CALL key next to the first fader of the range you wish to assign Select the range of signal paths by holding the first selection key and double pressing the last key in the range 13 8 The paths selected will replace the paths previously assigned to the sequence of
229. gnal path is a bus the level is taken after the insert point if any and the Bus Master fader just prior to output The signal indicator shows green when there is signal present below the standard operating level of the system At and above the operating level the LED shows orange At full digital level the LED shows red USING GROUPS The inherent bus structure associated with multiformat work is handled seamlessly through the use of Link Groups These aspects of the DREAM system are discussed fully in Grouping on page 11 2 NAMING FEEDS AND BUSES Feeds and buses can be named from the Call menu Step 1 Press the Call key to access the Call menu Step 2 Press a track live or bus selection key to call a path to the master fader Step 3 Press the name soft key and type a name on the PC keyboard Step 4 Press Enter to store the name The name will now appear on the fader LCD and on the mixer display Press the Tab key to enter the name and step to the next feed Hold the Shift key and press Tab to move to the previous feed CONTROLLING THE SIGNAL PATH Parameter Pad Once a feed or bus has been called to the Master Fader all the elements of the signal path may be controlled from the Parameter Pad See Parameter Pad on page 8 2 for complete details on using the EQ Pan Dynamics and Auxiliary sends Input Gain and Phase Input gain and phase controls are accessed from the Patch I O menu Step 1 First enter the
230. h gain reduction occurs The control range is from 50 to OdB Gate Hysteresis Press the Thrsh Hyst soft key to select gate hysteresis for the top right rotary con trol The gate hysteresis sets the difference between the level which must be exceed DYNAMICS ed to open the gate and the level below which the signal must fall to close the gate The control range is 0 to 12 5dB Gate Range The second rotary control on the left hand side controls the gate range This sets the maximum amount of gain reduction that will be applied when the signal falls below the gate threshold When the signal falls below the level determined by the gate threshold minus the gate range no gain reduction is applied The control range is from 0 to 60 2dB AUXILIARY SENDS Each feed in the Station includes four auxiliary bus sends The auxiliary send signals are derived immediately before or after the feed fader Each auxiliary bus may be configured as mono or stereo Hold down the BLUE key and press the Format Main bus selection key to set the auxiliary bus formats See The Format Menu on page 5 14 for more details To control the auxiliary bus master level CALL the bus to the Master Fader by selecting it from the bus selection keys Press the Aux key at the bottom of the Parameter Pad to select the auxiliary send section Mix Parameters Figure 6 The Auxiliary Sends Page Auxiliary Send Controls PARAMETER PAD Each auxiliary send has th
231. h not a Binnacle editing function the NUDGE function is closely related to SLIP The NUDGE function slips clips by a predetermined amount of time NUDGE can operate on one or many tracks affecting clips that lie under the cursor or within a Range NUDGE can operate in fixed steps of plus or minus one frame or in variable steps from 1 to 99 sub frames a sub frame is 1 80th of a frame The Nudge key is located to the left of the LCD display Using Nudge Step 1 Press the Nudge key to the left of the LCD Step 2 Locate the cursor over the clips and select the appropriate track s Step 3 Press the Variable or One Frame nudge soft keys to slip the clip s by the selected amount When there is no Range selected only the top layer of clips highlighted under the cursor is nudged Nudge with A Range Follow these steps to perform a NUDGE with a range selected Step 1 Press the Nudge key to the left of the LCD Step 2 Use the From and To keys to select a Range that includes all clips to be nudged Step 3 Press the Variable or One Frame nudge soft keys to slip the clip s by the selected amount When a Range is selected all layers of clips within the Range are nudged including those which are completely buried NUDGE 10 17 BINNACLE EDITING NOTES Nudging is possible while the transport is in play It is possible to nudge the sync of clips by holding down the Shift key and press ing the Nudge key The Nudge Menu wi
232. h the failure of Java technology could lead directly to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage Sun Microsystems Inc has contractually obligated Fairlight ESP s Software Suppliers to make this disclaimer No Liability for Certain Damages EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW FAIRLIGHT ESP S SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS SHALL H AVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFT WARE THISLIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REM EDY FAILSOF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL FAIRLIGHT ESP S SOFTWARE SUP PLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U S TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS U S 250 00 Limitations on Reverse Engineering D ecompilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS You may perma nently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is of US origin You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE including the U S
233. hanges by making selected feeds or buses Safe Safe paths can not record new mix data Step 1 Press the Safe key Currently Safe signal paths are illuminated on the selection panel Step 2 Press any selection key to toggle the selected feed or bus in or out of safe mode Step 3 Press the Safe key again to return to the previous mode The Safe key flashes when any feeds have safe enabled Automation Isolate When a feed or bus is isolated it does not respond to any stored automation data An isolated feed can be manually controlled but cannot record or play back mix au tomation Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Isolate key Isolated signal paths are illuminated on the selection panel Step 2 Press any selection key to toggle the feed or bus in or out of isolate mode Step 3 Press the Isolate key again to return to the previous mode PROTECTING MIX DATA WITH ISOLATE AND SAFE 25 11 PUNCHING IN AND OUT OF AUTOMATION RECORD The In and Out keys can be used to enter automation record The keys can be pressed while the transport is in STOP or PLAY to manually drop in or out of Write or Trim on the selected feeds and parameters Alternatively timecode In and Out points can be captured and when the In and Out points are made active the system will automatically drop in and out of automation record when the transport passes over these timecode locations Manual Punch In Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step
234. he QDC Engine VIDEO The sync is taken from the VIDEO input on the back of the QDC Engine INPUT The sync is taken from a selected DIGITAL INPUT Input Sync Auto The INP SYNC soft key in the Digi Menu is available for all sync sources other than INPUT Select INP SYNC to automatically sync to the lowest numbered armed digital input When no tracks are armed the system reverts to the main sync source The AUTO mode is used to automatically sync to an external input that is not locked to house sync This mode should be used with caution as it is easy to lose the integrity of system Ye synchronisation Manual selection of INPUT sync ensures that the operator is al ways aware of the current sync source Read below for more information on INTRODUCTION 30 5 SYNCHRONIZATION Station can track the position and motion of external transports such as a video tape recorder timecode striped audio tape or a timecode generator The disk recorder will play in time with the Master Timecode source so that sound and picture coin cide Position Motion This is an absolute location reference to a sequence of pictures or audio It is used to determine whether the disk recorder is playing the right part of its Project For video position reference is usually provided by 9 pin Sony protocol from an RS 422 port For audio tapes LTC is normally used though 9 pin is also a possibility The motion of an external machine is a measure of its
235. he equaliser is in circuit DYN The dynamics section is in circuit INS The insert is in circuit LINK The fader is a member of a link group Macro Bank 10 DREAM software release 1 2 does not support the Macro keys this information is included for future reference The Macro Bank keys provide instant access to the macro functions stored in Macro Bank 10 See Macros on page 33 2 for complete details on recording and using macros SURROUND CONTROL SECTION The Surround Control section provides motorised joystick panning for the current ly selected signal path i e the one controlled by the Central Fader and the Parameter Pad Press the CALL key on a fader strip to apply the panner to that signal path If two Master Sidecars are installed the joystick on a secondary master sidecar is only active if the currently called signal path appears in the faderset associated with that sidecar To use the joystick on either sidecar press the CALL key next to any fader on the sidecar The joystick now controls the pan for that signal path MACROS FADER SETS Fader Sets Figure 2 Sidecar Fader Set Keys A Fader Set is an assignment of signal paths to faders across the Sidecar or two Side cars if present Fader sets are stored along with the preset snapshot in each project In addition separate fader set setups are stored in each automated mix that is saved Ten Fader Sets can be loaded using the numbered Fader Sets keys Loadin
236. he netmask The numbers that coincide with 0 in the net mask are the machine specific part of the IP address The engine can only receive messages from other devices in the same subnet In the IP address example above the netmask is 255 255 0 0 and the engine address is 192 168 0 11 The engine will only see messages from devices in the 192 168 x y subnet Medialink devices must be in the same class C subnet therefore the first three numbers in the IP address of QDC engines and Medialink servers must be the same The VISIBILITY entry when set to PUBLIC means that other machines can see your machine across the network When set to PRIVATE your machine can see other ma chines on the network but no one else can see this machine Specifies what version of AudioBase to run 1 or 2 if set to 2 then the SERVER entry specifies the name or address of the machine which should be the AudioBase 2 Server Specifies the name or address of an AudioBase 2 Server Only required if VERSION is set to 2 This section determines the TCP IP parameters for editor commandis sent across a network Editor commands are sent via the RS422 serial link by default Enables editor commands sent over TCP IP this entry must be set No Enter the IP address of a Satellite console connected to the QDC engine to enable the ftp transfer of emu raw on start up Must be set to 2727 Must be set to 2727 Enables development debug Must be set to 0 This sec
237. he search Step 9 A list will appear of all the WAV files found by the search Se lect either Borrow or Keep and the clips will be imported into the current open Project NOTES VA When importing multiple WAVE files a clip is created for each file These clips are arrayed down the selected tracks and if there are more clips after that they are placed at the tails of the already placed clips No more than 249 borrowings can occur for any Project IMPORT EXPORT Search Options SEARCH IN Determines which disk drive and optional subdirectory is the place to begin the search Use the Up and Down arrow keys to switch between the drives in the QDC system If you want to add a subdirec tory to the search criteria type a forward slash after the disk drive name and then the name of the subdirectory INCLUDE Determines whether subdirectories of the search start point will be searched or not Move to this field and use the Up and Down arrow keys to toggle the switch on and off If you choose to search subdirectories the search may take much longer FILENAME You may narrow the search by specifying a match string that ends a restricted set of files All the AudioBase search characters may be used see Searching for Sounds on page 28 3 SAMPLE RATE Allows you to search for files with only one sample rate This field is automatically set to your current Project sam ple rate To change it use the Left and Right arrow k
238. hoice of destinations Before starting the process AudioBase will ask you for the destination You have four choices File Macintosh e PC Unix These are chosen by typing the first letter of the choice If you choose File the text file will be saved to the same hard disk where the Project is located Its name will be the same as that of the Project except for its txt suffix If you choose any of the computer types the text file will be sent out of the modem port using Z Modem protocol to any computer that is connected To make this happen you must have your computer connected via a serial cable between one of its communications ports and the QDC Engine modem port The computer must be running a terminal program and be ready to receive data You will be asked to confirm that this is the case before the command starts Import Importing is similar to publishing a text file except that first the file is brought in from another computer After issuing the command you will be asked to identify which Project will be published with this text file You may choose either Browse to find the file in the usual way Auto to tell Station that the required identification data can be found in the text file you are sending in or C to Cancel Once this situation has been clarified you will be asked to choose the type of computer that will be sending the data and to confirm that your com puter is ready to transmit data After confirmi
239. hreshold Fran Spread EQBand1 f EQBand2 Boom Lever Di A EQ Band 6 EQ Band 3 Delay Hysteresis oom Level iverge EG and Vol C N i Geom PRE POST 1D 2D J Band 6 Gain d EQ Band 5 Threshold Ratio Boom ON OFF Pan IN OUT A Band 6 Freg_JH Band 5 Gain Ratio Depth K JJ JIG EE Band 6 Shape JH Band5Q Attack Attack Gi AC E insert IN OUT Direct IN OUT Main Assign d Bande Shape Hold Hold E Direct Level Sub 1 Assign AG Band 5 Range IN OUT IN OUT Sub 2 Assign lt Q Band 5 IN OUT YY Sub 3 Assign Sub 4 Assign A 25 4 Figure 2 Parameter Enable Map Signal Path Enables Enabling signal paths for automation allows the operator to limit the range of paths on which automation may be recorded Signal path enables are only effective when recording automation using manual or automatic Punch in Prime mode or when using Touch Write or Trim when the Mix menu Touch AutoEnable item is not selected These methods are all dependent on the signal path enable selection and are described in detail below It is possible to record parameters on signal paths that are not enabled by using the AUTO key next to any fader or by using Touch when the Mix menu Touch Au toEnable item is selected Signal paths can be selected and enabled for automation only when the Mix menu or Enable menu is active Press the Mix key to activate the Mix menu Feeds or buses which are illuminated when the Mix menu is active ar
240. ically adapt setenv MADI96K LEGACY If SET and SR 96k then the MADI frame will be 56 channels long carrying 28 channels of 96K audio Each 96K channel uses two consecutive MADI channels MADI96K_HIGHDENSITY can also be set to get a 64ch frame with 32ch of 96k setenv MADI96K 24PER If SET and SR 96k then the MADI frame will be 28 channels long carrying 24 channels of 96K audio A second MADI card will carry I Os 25 48 MADI96K_LEGACY can also be set to get a 56ch frame with 24ch of 96k This allows two separate 24 track MADI machines to be connected to an MFX with two MADI cards at 96K 40 12 MADI Channel Numbering Note that the AES10 MADI specification defines MADI channels with numbers from 0 to 55 For improved useability the Fairlight interface numbers MADI chan nels from 1 to 56 or 1 to 64 It is essential to know what channels are on what connector to establish correct op eration with devices to which they are connected Note that the user interfaces in Satellite and Station only allow access to the first 48 I O regardless of what mode is in use At 44 1 or 48kHz all I O appears on the first card in the system When two MADI cards are installed in a system running at 96kHz the channel numbering depends on both the MADI96K 24PER and MADI96K HIGHDENSITY variables as shown below MADI Card 1 MADI Card 2 Neither variable set I O 1 to 28 I O 29 to 56 limited to 48 by UI MADI96K_HIGHDENSITY I
241. ich can be used to re place the Fairlight ID The system automatically modifies the last two bits in the ID to indicate the current frame rate This feature may not be supported by some systems To prevent the sys tem from doing this you must edit the following file dd usr sys tcs cfg Remove the asterisk at the beginning of the following line eSETENV SONY OLDID The delay modifier is used to declare the number of frames ahead of a drop in point the record command should be sent down the 9 pin wire when using ADR cycle record For most devices the default of 3 is correct It can be altered for ma chines that are slower or faster at dropping into record It can also be used to offset drop points on a remote machine Add delay to the end of the device definition you wish to modify where is the delay in frames The jogsh modifier is used to modify the behaviour of the Station transport when acting as a master controlling slave 9 pin devices in jog or shuttle mode The default setting is jogsh 1 When jogsh 0 the Station sends jog commands to the slave and then reads and chases the slave s timecode This provides uniform picture jogging but in some cases may cause excessive variations in audio jog speed THE SONY ID FILE 35 9 When jogsh 1 the Station sends jog commands to the slave the slave then reads and chases the Station s timecode This provides uniform audio jogging but in some cases may cause excessive variations in
242. ight office or distributor for further information regarding the maximum inputs and outputs which can be con figured within the system Please refer to the Audio I O Configuration on page 42 2 for further details on the Audio I O and System I O Panels Once the mechanical installation of the Engine is complete a number of cables must be connected Some of these connect various components together and may have been supplied with the system others provide connection to external studio de vices The following information gives specific wiring details and highlights any special re quirements however as with all equipment not supplied with the system it is the installer s responsibility to ensure that these cables comply fully with the applicable safety and EMC regulations External Cable Length Considerations The interconnecting cables supplied as standard may not be long enough for your installation in which case you must provide longer cables Refer to the descriptions below for guidance on maximum cable lengths See Wiring and Connection De tails on page 42 23 for connector pin outs Controller Cable The Station Control Cable connects the Console to the Engine The cable carries RS232 and RS422 signals and is limited to a maximum length of 30 meters pro viding correct attention is paid to signal pairing using twisted pair cable Ensure suf ficient slack is left at the Console end to ensure movement of the Console does not
243. ight products in cluding the cost of recovery of such data Product features and specifications are subject to change without notice Fairlight ESP reserves the right to change any part of this document without notice The warranties remedies and disclaimers above are exclusive and take precedence over all others oral or written express or implied to the extent permitted by law in the geographical area of the product s use No employee of Fairlight ESP agent distributor or employee of an agent or distributor is au thorized to offer any variation from this policy Copyright O 2002 Fairlight ESP Pty Ltd Unit 2 1 Skyline Place French s Forest NSW 2086 AUSTRALIA Telephone 61 2 8897 9999 Fax 61 2 8897 9900 END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT You have acquired a device DEVICE which includes software licensed by Fairlight ESP from one or more software licensors Fairlight ESP s Software Suppliers Such software products as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE INSTEAD PROMPTLY CONTACT FAIRLIGHT ESP FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE S FOR A REFUND ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
244. in connection data See Audio I O Configuration on page 40 2 for more details System Ports Ifan I O attribute 1 is added to an output that output is reserved for use as a control room monitor output and will only be displayed as available for patching in the Monitor Setup menu This prevents operators from inadvertently patching signals direct to the power amplifier inputs The file contents are similar to the following I O configuration There are three types of I O 1 is Analog 2 is AES 3 is MADI TE db db db out First define the number of different types of I O 4 IO CONFIG type inputs outputs where IO_CONFIG 1 16 8 IO_CONFIG 2 32 16 IO CONFIG 3 0 0 would configure the system with 16 analog IPs 8 analog outputs 32 digital IPs 16 digital OPs and no MADI M a These ports are then define one by one using a number of statements like these INPUT type index name attibutes OUTPUT type index name attibutes Note that the index counts from 1 and that the name must be less than 12 characters long The attribute can be omitted a value of 1 specifies the port to be a system port p C M This system has 32 analog IPs 32 analog outputs 32 digital IPs 32 digital OPs and no MADI Analog Inputs 1 amp 2 are named DAT L amp R respectively An
245. in preview mode a parameter can be placed into Write by dropping in manually with the In key or automatically using the Active In and Out points Recording Mix Data The AUTO key next to any fader is illuminated whenever any parameter on that sig nal path is recording automation data in Write or Trim or if any parameter on the signal path is in Preview Mix data is recorded as discrete events Each event occurs at a specific timecode lo cation and relates to a specific parameter on a specific signal path When a new mix is started there are no events recorded and all controls will remain static as the project is played Once mix data is recorded it is played back or read when the trans port runs past the timecode at which the event is recorded If the transport is located to any point in the project the mixer state will reflect the result of all the events that have occurred from the start of the project to the current timecode The static snapshot recorded with every mix preserves the basic setup and balance of the mix Dynamic move events can be added to this to create the final complete mix Entering Automation Record There are four methods of entering automation record 1 Press the AUTO key next to any fader Enabled parameters on the channel are put into record irrespective of the signal path enable mix mask 2 Use Touch mode and move any fader pot or switch That parameter is put into Write or Trim if it is enabled If Touch
246. ing if they are all detected Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Ensure that the Engine is completely reassembled and that there are no loose cables Power up the Engine and Console Press the Space Bar once a gray display is seen If you miss the time window during which the Space Bar must be pressed simply reboot and try again At the displayed prompt select a boot method from the Menu From the prompt type SCAN Enter Observe that all SCSI devices are detected You may need to run this command a couple of times as some drives are much slower to boot than the Engine Ifa SCSI device is not seen power down the system and check all SCSI ID s and that the SCSI and power cables are connect ed 38 12 SETTING UP REMOVABLE MEDIA DEVICES To set up optical drives for use on the system initialise the media by running the following command DISKINIT tdXY w n name X is the PCI slot number 0 internal 1 external bottom PCI slot Y is the SCSI ID of the device This command must be run from the shell so you will need to quit from the main application to the shell See Drive Formatting on page 36 2 for more details on formatting storage devic es When media is not in use it is strongly recommended that the media is ejected from the drive to ensure that the media has not deteriorated due to the level of heat in the drive itself CAUTION KEEP MEDIA AWAY FROM STRONG MAGNETIC FIELD
247. ing se eet leal 24 3 Keyboard Focus 35 11 L LATCH vr ue Mor ath ed pra 13 5 AA ed 25 10 LCD Legend Window 13 3 ESTI ANA 33 2 a AAA 17 2 Level Meters ces 14 2 Mib key ut 12 3 Library s soene nee 12 2 item ds A a ONS 8 12 Threshold tt 522345 8 12 Linear Jog 2 713228 02a pers 4 7 Link Group Format 11 2 Link Group Selection 11 5 Link Groups 2 2 2221 42240444 11 2 Link Indicator 7 6 13 6 Live Feed oss sn E 5 3 Locking Automation to Video 35 14 Pide 24 8 Loop Jog iix oe be dda kate oes 4 7 Loudspeakers ico ran 6 2 low pas u a na 8 4 A RN requie etes 31 2 M Mist ratas 31 2 MAS La OSA 31 2 MACS a5 are nt 33 2 Macro Pause War aaa 33 2 Macros Saar ee 13 6 MADI Configuration 40 10 MADI Connector Options 40 12 Maintenance ooooooo o oo 38 13 Mapping sse eri TERES 13 7 Mark Beats ernennt ders 27 3 Mark Go To ss 23 4 Marks GPI cs 24 8 Master Fader e dianas as 7 2 MasterFader 7 2 Match ouo 2 voee cede 28 3 MIR re ee ade 35 6 Mechanical Installation 38 2 Meter Settings uve eee as 35 10 Metering ns UE ES na 9 6 Meters aetan ri Teraa eaS 14 2 MEX e eS O AASEN 29 11 MEXXI asta RA 29 11 NES AS ouaaa ea net 29 11 MFEX3pl s A e paasa cra a 29 11 MIDD eiei n ee ei 31 2 MinSegmentDuration 35 7 Mo amp D ta ss dei laos Dad 25 19 Mix Menu zu evens tides deen 25 16 MON GEAR ee 25 2 Mode
248. ions depending on the current mode of operation The selection keys are used for selecting tracks for editing or mixing creating groups arming tracks and enabling automation The Station is in an Edit mode when any of the Binnacle edit functions COPY CUT ERASE TRIM SLIP FADE are selected In these modes the selection keys select tracks for editing Feeds are selected or called to the master fader and Parameter Pad for mixing by pressing the Call key then pressing the feed selection key Patching sources and destinations is achieved by pressing the Patch I O key Tracks are ena bled for automation by pressing the Mix key These functions and several others uti lising the selection keys are described in detail later in this manual In GROUP mode feeds may be grouped and linked in various formats Selecting the Group Master or a member of a Link Group will select all members of the group See Grouping on page 11 2 for more details on group behaviour SELECTING TRACKS AND FEEDS 4 5 TRACKS amp TRANSPORT A Fon H AM In FOLLOW mode the master fader selection follows the most recent edit track se lection FOLLOW is selected from the CALL menu by pressing the Call key This is described in detail in Master Fader on page 7 2 Master Fader on page 7 2 In the edit modes selected tracks are highlighted on the video display and the track keys are illuminated To add a track to the current selection press the desir
249. ip on the selected track the Range will be set to zero width and an error will result if you try and execute a cut or copy command Range Clip Copies all layers from the beginning of the Range to the end of the Range into the clipboard A ghost of the uppermost clips is presented The cursor may be moved and completing the edit causes the contents of the clipboard with all its layers to be pasted at the new location Head Copies all layers from the beginning of the Range to the cur rent cursor position into the clipboard A ghost of the upper most clips is presented The cursor may be moved and completing the edit causes the contents of the clipboard with all its layers to be pasted at the new location Tail Copies all layers from the current cursor position to the end of the Range into the clipboard A ghost of the uppermost clips is presented The cursor may be moved and completing the edit causes the contents of the clipboard with all its layers to be pasted at the new location Cut Copy with Razor On Edits performed with Razor On insert or remove time from the selected tracks em ulating a tape edit performed with a razor blade When the Razor On key is selected after pressing either the Cut or Copy keys the following will occur Cut With Razor On Audio is removed from the selected tracks and inserted at the cursor Audio after the Range is then moved in time to the start of the Range Paste With Razor On The conte
250. ips marks and names are carried forward into the new file Super Trim When ON is selected the user is shown when the full length of a clip when trim ming See the Binnacle Editing Chapter earlier within this manual THE SYSTEM PAGE 35 11 WORKING WITH CONSOLE SYSTEM FILES SYSTEM FILES It is necessary to access the console computer operating system in order to modify console system files To access the Windows operating system you must exit the EMC mixer application running on the console and the disk recorder application running on the QDC engine Quitting FMC automatically quits the disk recorder application To quit the FMC application hold down the Shift key and press the Pause Break key on the PC keyboard to switch the keyboard focus to the console computer then type Q then Y The Windows desktop will now be displayed System files are stored in the C Projects Mixers FMC Data directory Use Windows explorer or use the trackball to click on My Computer on the desktop to navigate through the file system Use the Notepad text editor to edit files Keyboard Focus When running FMC the keyboard output can be directed either to the console computer or to the QDC engine Keyboard output is directed to the QDC engine by default To switch the keyboard focus to the Station console computer hold down the Shift key and press the Pause Break key on the PC keyboard To change the keyboard focus back to the QDC engine press the Pause
251. ire EQ section with a range of 18dB The soft key at the bottom right bypasses the entire equaliser The Q Page Press the Freq Q soft key on the right hand side of the Parameter Pad to enter the Q Page Mix Parameters Figure 2 The EQ Q Page In the Q Page the rotary control on the right of each band provides control of the Q of the band pass reject filters with a range of 0 3 to 10 All other controls remain the same To quickly flatten an EQ band hold down a BLUE key and press the band IN OUT soft key to set the filter gain to OdB To flatten the entire EQ section hold down a BLUE key and press the EQ IN OUT key This will set the entire EQ section to a default flat set up with low shelf low mid and high mid parametric and high shelf filters 8 6 Navigating the Filter Page Press the EQ Filt soft key to enter the Filter Page Mix Parameters Figure 3 The EQ Filter Page The two filter sections are displayed one above the other in the Parameter Pad The graphic icons in each band display the current filter type for each band The soft keys at the left ofeach band are used to switch the band IN or OUT and to select the filter type Press the SETUP soft key on the right of the Parameter Pad to select the func tion of the soft key on the left of each band Pressing the SETUP key once enables selection of the filter type The filter icons flash Press the soft key on the left of the band to select the filter type
252. is armed for recording LCD Legend Window Fader The LCD legend window displays information about the signal path that the fader is controlling with the following lines of text System N ame displays the track or feed name of the current path Current Parameter displays the currently selected parameter on the Parameter Pad or soft pot Username displays a user defined feed name The touch sensitive motorised fader controls the level of the signal path being controlled by the fader strip The behaviour of the fader is the same as that of the Master Fader on the Station with the excep tion that there is no Fold key and no Master key Folding and unfold ing is carried out from the Central Fader only Soft Pot Solo SIDECAR OPERATION The soft pot controls the left right pan parameter of the signal path DREAM software release 1 2 does not support other soft pot func tions This information is included for future reference The soft pot can be assigned to any continuously variable parameter available to the signal path The soft pot selection keys on the Master Sidecar allow the function of the soft pot to be set to one of five preset controls or any custom control selected from the Parameter Pad Selecting Soft Pot Function To select a preset function for the soft pot press the Pan LR Pan FB Boom Input Trim or Direct Level Key in the Soft Pot keys section on the Station Master Sidecar To select a custom functi
253. is not necessarily shown in proportion to its duration Instead it depends on the space needed to dis play all the clip information start timecode name and end timecode plus the space needed to show other clips that start or end while the first one is playing If many clips start or end during a clip s playback that clip will be very long in the printout SETTING PRINTER CHARACTERISTICS 32 5 NOTES G 1 Dubbing chart printing always takes a Range 2 Dubbing charts print only the selected tracks The durations of clips on the non selected tracks are however taken into account so you can print 12 tracks in one pass and the other 12 in another pass and the two prints will join side by side to make one large display This may spread your dub chart more than desired so to prevent this from happening deselect and disable the tracks that you do not want involved in any way in the print process 3 To stop printing type Ctrl Q Then press the Kill Que soft key 4 To split the name of a clip include an ellipsis in its name The first part will print at the top of the clip and the second part at the bottom PRINTING 32 6 SETTING PRINTER CHARACTERISTICS 33 1 NOTES Chapter 33 Macros INTRODUCTION Macros are used to replay sequences of key strokes on the console Macros can record any keys but not the jogger wheel Macros can be used to automate often repeated command sequences for common studio tas
254. ive conductor is fused for over current protection Systems that have both current carrying conductors live with respect to ground such as phase to phase in multi phase systems are not recommended as power sources It is recommended that both the Engine and Console are connected to the same electrical supply or ring main which ideally should be regulated and smoothed If the power source is likely to be unexpectedly cut then both the units should be fed from a backed up power source such as a UPS Refer to Dimensions Weight and Power Requirements on page 40 30 for more details on power requirements 38 4 ENGINE REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS The Engine rear is split into two distinct sections the System I O Panel located to the right and the QDC Card Audio 1 O section located to the left 2000500 c 900 0 co 3X IG IE dodo ge ga co ooo ococc x E MOL e coc i 0 9 amp O CD C amp 5 amp 2 amp D D D O S Qo 2o o Milo 7 inscia Refer service fo OLMO Foinohf pararme O o o 00 h PCI Slot 3 PCI Slot 2 PCI Slot 1 o 29000011 DA 80000 Ou90000N e 982000 Il ve 0 0 0 0 o o o e 1 800001 3 mM 2 gt 4 RN System I O Panel Figure 3 QDC Engine Rear View System I O Panel The System I O Pa
255. k from disk on the Station While playing start recording by pressing the RECORD and PLAY buttons together To drop out of Record press the PLAY STOP JOG REW or FF buttons You can drop in or out on individual tracks whilst recording by pressing the track keys Each time you enter Record you will create a new clip on each armed track These clips are placed over any other clips that they encounter on the same tracks The monitoring switches from recorded material to live as you enter Record exactly as though you were erasing the existing audio Clips covered by new recordings may be retrieved by POPPING the clip stack in the Takes menu see Takes Menu on page 22 3 for more details Automatic Drop in Pre determined drop in and drop out points may be activated using the Machine Control section of the console See Using the ADR Functions on page 24 2 for further details RECORDING STEREO CLIPS Stereo clips may be recorded by creating a stereo link group with two adjacent track feeds Arm the tracks by pressing either track feed selection key while in the arm menu Clips recorded into the link group will appear in the first of the two tracks See Grouping on page 11 2 for more information on creating and using link groups RECORDING STEREO CLIPS 10 1 NOTES 10 2 Chapter 10 Binnacle Editing INTRODUCTION Binnacle Editing introduces a new and more ergonomic editing control panel for increased efficiency a
256. k the original moves at the offset or trimmed level If the system is in Touch Snap the system drops back into Read There are four methods for engaging the Write or Trim state for any parameter see Recording Mix Data on page 25 6 below Isolate When parameters are Isolated the user can manually control them The controls have no illumination All parameters are isolated when the Mix ON key is not illu minated When the Mix ON key is illuminated and no data has been recorded for a parameter the parameter remains isolated and can still be manually controlled A signal path can be manually isolated by pressing the Isolate key and selecting the path with the selection keys When a feed is in Isolate all parameters on that feed ignore previously recorded automation data and can be manually controlled Isolat ed parameters do not display illuminated automation indicators Preview Preview is used to audition new mix settings over existing automation data and then replace the existing automation by dropping in to record Preview state is engaged on enabled parameters by first pressing the Preview key and then arming parameters using Touch Latch for individual parameters or the AUTO key next to a fader to arm all parameters on the selected feed In Preview parameters are isolated and will ignore previously written data Param eters can be manually controlled When armed in Preview parameters are illumi nated in flashing red Once
257. ks Station has the ability to store up to 100 Macros arranged in 10 Banks of 10 macros each A dedicated LCD display offers access to the Macro system This display has 10 soft keys 5 below and 5 above which actually fire the Macros and plus two keys called Bank and Edit Macro Macro Pad Figure 1 Station Macro Pad RECORDING A MACRO Step 1 Press the Edit Macro key Step 2 Select the Macro key you wish to define Step 3 Press the LEARN soft key Step 4 Press Enter Step 5 Perform the functions to be recorded any keys except the jog ger wheel The console beeps as each key is recorded into the macro Step 6 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Edit Macro key to stop recording the macro Inserting a Pause While recording a Macro a pause may be inserted between keystrokes To insert a pause hold down the Ctrl key on the PC keyboard and press a number key on the numeric keypad Press 1 to add a one frame pause press 2 for a two frame pause and so on Press 0 for a ten frame pause Multiple pauses may be added by pressing a number key more than once INTRODUCTION NAMING A MACRO Macros can be given names to allow identification when in the Edit Macro Menu If not already in the Edit Macro Menu press the Edit Macro key Step 1 Select the desired macro key Step 2 Press the NAME soft key Step 3 Type the name Step 4 Press Enter SELECTING A MACRO Normally the Macro LCD displays the name of the current bank
258. l fields can take up to 24 characters The lines listing USER 3 and USER 4 have asterisks in front which deactivate the fields Removing these will activate them but not put them on the screen There is also an area for the titles of these user fields which you may edit The last section contains the screen layout Each line lists the fields that will be dis played A field beginning with F is from the first section while one beginning with U is a user field You may change what is displayed on each line but please remem ber that only 80 characters will fit on to the screen If you ask for more the extra ones will simply not appear To save the file and return to work press the BLUE key and then Z on the keyboard or Esc Z AudioBase Text Export The ABTEXT command reads an ABF file i e abase master abase srch or abase2 srch and writes two output text files one containing the clip data and the other the file data These files are tab delimited text files with PC eol format and are suitable for import to external spreadsheets and AudioBase 2 This facility therefore provides a utility to transfer existing AudioBase 1 databases to AudioBase 2 All three files must be specified type abtext from the shell for details 28 14 PUBLISHING WITH TEXT FILES 29 1 NOTES Chapter 29 Import Export INTRODUCTION Station has a number of features to allow the import and export of audio clips and Projects I
259. lace within a Project unwanted audio clips can start to take up valuable disk drive space Unwanted audio can be audio that has been erased from clips audio that has been trimmed from clips audio that is covered over by another clip The Space Menu is used to remove and delete unwanted audio clips from the Project Hold the BLUE key and press the Space key to access the SPACE menu Space Key Figure 2 Space Key Dispose DISPOSE removes waveforms that have no clips in the Project If any part of a waveform is used by a clip the waveform will not be affected Wave forms will have no clips if they have all been erased or if the UNDO key was pressed after a recording If DISPOSE is used immediately after a recording has been undone the next recording will use this free space NOTE PA After DISPOSE you will not be able to recover the waveform with the RW Re cover Waveform command See Recovering Waveforms on page 26 6 Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Space key Step 3 Press the DISPOSE soft key Step 3 Press the Enter key Commit COMMIT removes sections of waveforms that are not heard and clips that are buried Only clips under the cursor or highlighted in a Range on selected tracks are com mitted MANAGING DISK SPACE 26 5 Pack Underlying clips except for sections used in crossfades are removed A waveform may be broken up into smaller waveforms if sections of it are unused
260. lded across the fad ers of the Sidecar for quick access Follow these steps to access fader group members by unfolding Step 1 Press the Group key Step 2 Press one of the fader group soft keys on the Macro Pad to select a fader group Step 3 Press the Fold key next to the Master Fader The fader group members can now be controlled by the faders next to the Master Fader Each member can be called to the Parameter Pad by pressing the CALL key on each fader Press the Fold key again to return the faders to the previous fader set MULTI TRIM GROUPING Multi Trim is a convenient method for making temporary groups to adjust the pa rameters of an arbitrary set of signal paths Multi Trim operates by employing a vir tual master with its own settings for all switches and control values for an entire channel strip The values for these controls are initialised to zero or unity on power up after which they remember their last settings Multi Trim may act in relative or absolute mode In relative mode the Multi Trim group member s parameters will be offset by the amount the master control is moved In absolute mode the member s parameters follow the absolute value of any control that is adjusted To change every parameter on all the selected paths set the master controls on the Parameter Pad or Master Fader and press the apply val ues soft key When Multi Trim is selected the Master Fader and rotary controls move to show the last virtu
261. lections across tracks therefore no op tions are available Range On RANGE ON is not supported in Trim Mode Layers On ALL LAYERS ON is not supported in Trim Mode Razor On RAZOR ON is not supported in Trim Mode TRIM EDIT MODE 10 15 SLIP EDIT MODE SLIP mode moves clips to a new time location Slipping the head moves the head of a clip to the cursor while maintaining the position of the tail Slipping the tail moves the tail of a clip to the cursor while maintaining the position of the head These com mands alter the length of the clip Using Slip Step 1 Press the Trim Slip key and then the S1ip soft key if not in SLIP mode Step 2 Select the desired track s If only one track is to be edited double click its tracks key to ensure no other tracks are selected Step 3 Locate the transport so the cursor lies over the desired edit point clips that will be edited are highlighted in red Step 4 Hold down the required edit target key Range Clip Head or Tail on the left hand side of the Binnacle Step 5 Locate the transport so the cursor lies over the destination edit point Step 6 Let go of the selected edit function to trim the clip s Binnacle editing allows SLIP to be achieved as a one handed or two handed edit To perform a one handed edit hit the edit target key to SLIP move the cursor if nec essary then hit Enter to slip the clip Hitting Enter again will trim the clip again To perform a two handed
262. les because each one s presence on the network must be verified each time you search for it other wise someone else might have deleted it since the last time If the value Any is entered in the Line field before the search the verification time will be saved and the search results will arrive quickly When the records are audi tioned any that are offline will not play and an error message will be displayed NOTES 1 With AudioBase2 running the Import and Export soft key Menus have been removed from the AudioBase Menu These functions are performed using a separate HTML browser such as Internet Explorer using an MediaLink Server 2 In AudioBase 1 the colour of an active field when you put search criteria into is either grey or blue In AudioBase2 they are always blue 3 A new value ANY has been added to the criterion LINE When selected the search routine does not check whether the files containing the clips matching all other criteria are On Line i e on machines which are on line at the time of the search or Off Line It is recommended to use this option if you know that the files containing the clips returned by the search are on line as a search may take tens of seconds just to check the file On Line status This option is also available in AudioBase 1 PUBLISHING WITH TEXT FILES AUDIOBASE AudioBase can work with text files in two ways 1 During publication it can take data from a text file and place it in
263. les are stored in the C Projects Mixers FMC Data directory Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Utils key to enter the Utils menu Step 2 Press the Update Sys File soft key to store the system set tings This information is stored in the following files Monitor Sources TXT patching and formats of external monitor sources Speaker Sets TXT patching and formats of all speaker sets Setup Variables TXT Call Follow state and console brightness WORKING WITH CONSOLE SYSTEM FILES 35 17 FAIRLIGHT OS COMMANDS The Station QDC engine runs on the high performance multi user multi tasking real time Fairlight operating system Station systems are supplied fully configured It is not usually necessary to operate the system at operating system level However during installation configuration or upgrade the advanced user may need to mod ify the configuration files described above CAUTION A The following Fairlight OS command details are included to assist the advanced user or systems administrator Modifying aspects of the operating system setup may cause your system to become unstable or inoperative If not confident do not proceed Call your Fairlight distributor for assistance Most commands will provide help on syntax and options by typing the command name followed by the option ATTR Function Display or change file attributes Syntax attr lt opts gt lt path gt lt opts gt permi
264. lish the text file Select the Project where you recorded the CD and press En ter Example 2 The task here is exactly the same but this time we will allow Station to create a text file which is then merged with the supplied database information 1 Record sound into Station 2 Using the GATE function or by editing divide the recording into individual sounds 3 If you want the clips named in the Project name them exactly as on the supplied database If you will only ever access the sounds through AudioBase there is no need to name the clips as long as they have been recorded or edited into the same order as they appear in the supplied database 4 Go to the AudioBase Menu press File then Export Choose PC as the export type making sure the PC is running its terminal program and is ready to receive The Project will be published and the text file will be transferred to the PC 5 Once the file is on your PC load it into Excel as a text only file with tab delim iters You will now be able to edit the Clip Record information 6 Load the information from your supplied database into the same Excel file To do this will require first loading it into a different Excel file then copying the infor mation across to the first file 7 Arrange the information so that the data from the received database lines up with the data from AudioBase This would mean that each line other than the first con tains two clip names which must
265. ll follows solos on or off Press the MUTE key to mute the output of the signal path FADER STRIPS Call Press the CALL key to call the path controlled by the fader to the Parameter Pad and the Master Fader This also assigns the joystick on this sidecar to control the pan of this feed or group Soft Switch Auto The soft switch is not supported in DREAM software release 1 2 this information is included for future reference The soft key can be assigned to any switch function available to the signal path The soft key function selection keys on the Master Sidecar allow the function of the fader soft keys to be set to one of five preset controls or any custom control selected from the Parameter Pad Selecting Soft Switch Function To select a preset function for the soft switch press the Comp In L E G In EQ In Insert In or Arm Track key in the Soft Switch function section on the Station Mas ter Sidecar To select a custom function for the soft switch press the Custom key in the Soft Switch function section on the Station Master Sidecar Assigning a Custom Soft Switch Function To define a custom function for the soft switch follow these steps Step 1 Adjust the Parameter Pad to display the function you wish to con trol by pressing the EQ Pan Dyn Aux or Plug In key and any page soft key as necessary Step 2 Hold the BLUE key and press the Custom key in the Soft Switch function section on the Station Master Sidecar
266. ll then nudge the waveform within clips without affecting heads and tails Hold down the Shift key and press the Nudge key to return to normal operation When nudging a Range clips not wholly within the Range are not affected However since the Range itself is also nudged it is possible for the Range to move so as to wholly enclose a clip in which case the clip will then be nudged with the rest of the Range 10 18 FADES EDIT MODE The Fade key on the Binnacle allows fades to be applied to the heads and tails of clips The fades are performed by the system in real time as the audio is output from the machine Applying a fade to a clip does not affect the waveform on disk Fades are applied from the cursor position to the head or tail of clips on selected tracks If a level has been applied to a clip the fade will start or finish at this level All clips have small default fades to prevent clicks These can been seen at the heads and tails of clips at Zoom 16 Fades are shown as shaded ramps on the clips Fade In Cross fade point Fade Out xx VADE MENU k Set Fades amp Cros PROJECT FRAI SAMPLE RATE 00 07 00 1 Fade displayed on clip Figure 2 Fade Display Using Fade Step 1 Press the Fade key Step 2 Locate the transport to the fade point and select the desired tracks Step 3 Use the soft keys and jog wheel to set the fade parameters if required Step 4 Press the required edit target key Range Clip Head
267. llows Selection The fader selection can automatically follow the most recent signal path selection for context sensitive level control Press the CALL key and press the Follow soft key to select the follow mode Follow can be set to one of the following states Follow The Master Fader controls the most recently selected signal Edit path in edit mode Follow The Master Fader controls the most recently selected signal Mix path in mix mode Follow The Master Fader controls the most recently selected signal All path in either mix or edit mode Follow The CALL button must be pressed to assign the Master Fader off to a signal path The Master Fader does not follow any other selections Call by The Master Fader controls the most recently soloed signal Solo path in mix mode This refers only to mixer solo engaged by pressing the SOLO key next to a fader The Master Key Solo MASTER FADER The Master Key allows the Main Bus level control to quickly be called to the Master Fader and Parameter Pad Press the Master key again to return to the previous se lection The DREAM Station offers two solo systems disk recorder solo and the mixer solo Mixer Solo Individual feeds may be soloed in the monitoring system There are three solo modes which may be entered by pressing the SOLO key next to any fader These are solo in place or SIP after fader listen or AFL and pre fader listen or PEL SIP mutes or reduces the level of all un
268. lluminated fully and all other selection keys are extinguished Only one signal path may be selected at a time in Call mode however this may in clude multichannel link groups or buses Pressing the Call key again exits Call mode and returns the system to the previous mode of operation The selection of elements that existed in that previous mode is restored with the signal path selected in Call mode remain ing on the Master Fader The Call key may also be pressed and held while calling a sig nal path to the Master Fader In this case releasing the Call key returns the system to its previous mode and selection im mediately Pressing the Call key on any fader on a fader panel will call that signal path to the Master Fader and Channel Panel Call Follow enables the current edit or mix selection always be called to the Master Fader This provides context sensitive control for fast intuitive mixing control The last signal path selected will be the current Master Fader selection Press the Call key to access the Call Follow menu Call Follow has four options Edit Mix All When in Edit mode any path selected is called to the Master Fader When in Mix mode Mix key lit any path selected is called to the Master Fader Any selection in Mix or Edit mode is called to the Master Fader INTRODUCTION 8 3 Off The Call key must be pressed before selecting a signal path for control by the Master Fader and Parameter Pad S
269. lso by pressing the PLAY key on the Binnacle See Editing on page 10 3 for more details LOOP JOG AND LINEAR JOG TRACKS amp TRANSPORT Pressing the JOG key when stopped enters the Jog mode Holding down the JOG key brings up a menu on the lower console display The val ue for each parameter can be changed by pressing its soft key and turning the jogger wheel or typing a value on the numeric keypad The menus function as follows LOOP LINEAR Loop Jog repeats a section of audio before and up to the cursor at play speed This has the effect of providing jog ging at constant pitch Linear Jog behaves like a tape machine when scrubbing au dio WIDTH The width of the loop when in Loop Jog Usually set to 1 frame Range 1 50 frames FACTOR The gearing between the jogger wheel and the track dis play A high value will give a lively feel while a low value will be slower Range 1 16 This is also linked to the zoom factor Pressing Zoom and Jog together at the same time sets the Factor number equal to the Zoom number DIMMER The attenuation applied when in Loop Jog Loop Jog can be irritating at high levels This is usually set at around 10dB Range 0 99dB To activate the jog function at any time just press the JOG key The system will re main in jog until another transport key is pressed Use STOP to mute the machine in Loop Jog Jog mode can also be accessed by pressing the Play Jog key on the Binnacle
270. m in the usual manner 26 8 In order to open a 48 track project on a 24 track system the project must be exported as an ML file See Export on page 29 8 for more details on exporting An ML file can be imported into a 24 track system and will allow editing on the first 24 tracks only ML file exchange is available with the optional connectivity software package ML export is only available with the optional connectivity software package 24 AND 48 TRACK PROJECT COMPATIBILITY 27 1 NOTES Chapter 27 Marks INTRODUCTION A mark is a stored time location in a Project indicated by a yellow pointer on the timescale The Station can store 1000 marks with each Project including 0 and 999 which automatically indicate the area you have worked in i e the head and tail of the Project Marks can be given names and can be used as location points for scenes and sync points or beats and bars Mark Key Figure 1 Mark Key CREATING A MARK To create a mark locate the transport to the desired point and press the Mark but ton Marks are shown as yellow indicators on the timescale EDITING MARKS To edit a mark hold down the BLUE key and press the Mark button The selected mark is highlighted in the upper video display showing mark informa tion e Mark number e Mark name e Timecode When in the EDIT MARK mode the console soft keys perform the following func tions NUMBER Press this key and use the jogger wheel
271. maining elements available is displayed on the LCD ASSIGNING SIGNALS TO BUSES Feeds must be assigned to buses in order to route their signals to outputs or to mixes for recording Feed signals are routed to Main Sub and Aux buses via a panner ele ment in each signal path Sub Buses may also be assigned to the Main Bus if they are used for sub mixing or as separate stems An alternative to normal bus assignment is Stem Assign Stem Assign allows the out puts of the panner to each bus element to be disconnected This is useful when add ing a pre mixed stem to a mix Each element of the stem may be assigned only to its corresponding bus element Assigning Feeds to Buses To assign signal paths to buses Step 1 Press the Bus Assign key Step 2 Press the bus selection key of the destination bus to which you want to assign signal paths This can be the Main Bus or any Sub or Aux Bus The selected bus key will light and so will all the Track and Live Feed keys associated with feeds already assigned to that bus Step 3 Press any Track or Live Feed key to toggle its assignment on or off Press the A11 Feeds soft key to assign all feeds to the select ed bus Press the deassign all soft key to deassign all sources Step 4 Press the Bus Assign key to return to the previous mode or select any other mode PATCHING AND ROUTING A Note once the Main Bus is selected as the destination bus Sub buses can be add ed to the sou
272. marks 3 Whenever Mark is selected on a soft Menu or the Edit Marks Menu is entered the Marks display is shown on the video screen You can also display it at other times by typing BLUE 9 or lt esc gt M When the transport is in motion the marks display automatically scrolls to show the last mark reached Marks are not the best way to create edit points on the fly if the edit is to be done immediately The best way is to use the From and To keys see Edit ing 5 Marks 0 Project head and 999 Project tail cannot be deleted GOTO MARK 28 1 NOTES Chapter 28 AudioBase INTRODUCTION AudioBase is a clip database which allows you to search for sounds across all devices in a Station system Once a sound clip has been found it may be auditioned and then imported into the current open Project AudioBase2 allows searches to be made in a network environment using a Medi aLink server AudioBase creates and maintains a central database of clips from many Projects AudioBase Key Figure 1 AudioBase Key CREATING A DATABASE Before a clip or Wav file can be used in AudioBase it must be published Publishing a Project adds the details of all its clips to the database which is stored on the system It is possible to publish individual files or all the Projects and Wav files contained within a directory Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Press the AudioBase key Press the FILE soft key P
273. mode can not have a Range Also in Manual Mode pressing the current Mode key again toggles the Range on and off keeping the last timecode values that it had NOTE VA Always set the correct sample rate and frame rate before making your first record ing this will avoid problems later TIMECODE SETUP 30 4 Project Sample Rate The sample rate for a Project is fixed after the first recording is made It is therefore very important to check this before recording Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Digi key Step 2 Press the RATE soft key Step 3 Turn the jogger wheel to select the desired sample rate Avail able rates are 32 44 056 44 1 48 and 96 kHz Step 4 Press Enter Selecting A Sync Source The Station s sample rate clock can be referenced to one of several sync sources The current sync source is displayed at the top right of the track menu The sync indica tor turns red if no sync is present To select the sync source Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press Digi Step 2 Press the SYNC soft key Step 3 Use the jogger wheel to select the desired sync source Step 4 Press Enter or if INPUT is selected press a specific track key to select the input The sync sources are as follows INT Internal sync uses internal crystals to generate the clocks AES The sync is taken from the AES sync input on the back of the QDC Engine WCLK The sync is taken from the WORD CLOCK input on the back of t
274. mode or system mode is selected The most recently pressed edit mode key is illuminated in amber Select an Edit Mode from the six Edit Modes available These are Copy Cut Erase Trim amp Slip on one key and Fade Set the options on the Option keys on the right hand side of the Binnacle These are Range On All Layers and Razor On Execute the edit using the Target keys on the left hand side of the Binnacle These are Clip Range Head and Tail In Copy Cut Trim and Slip modes there are two stages to this step e g Cut and Paste Erase and Fade mode edits are finished with just one key stroke Copy copies the selection to the clipboard Cut cuts the selection to the clipboard Erase erases the selection Trim amp Slip on one key trims or slips the selection Fade fades or cross fades the selection red for slip mode The selection of a Binnacle edit mode causes the LCD to switch to a display con taining soft key functions relevant to that mode Pressing an edit mode key twice will toggle between Range on and off if it is rele vant to that mode on page 4 10 for information on setting ranges 10 4 Edit Targets The target for a Binnacle command is the set of audio clips or parts of clips that are going to be affected by the command Pressing the target key executes the edit com mand The possible targets are Clip when RANGE is off the target consists of all clips on s
275. mport Key Figure 1 Import Key IMPORTING CLIPS It is possible to import clips from other Projects on the system with the same sam ple rate as the main Project Opening a Project as a Library Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press Import Step 2 Press the BROWSE soft key Step 3 Select the desired library Project using the file navigation keys and Jog wheel Step 4 Press Enter Once opened the Project will stay open as a library until another library is opened Pressing any editing key will return you to the main Project but returning to the Import Menu will display the last library from which a clip was imported The import menu gives you the option of KEEP or BORROW when importing clips Importing clips does not affect the library Project in any way BORROW BORROW places a clip in the Project that references the wave form from the library When the clip plays it actually plays from the library Project For your Project to play correctly the library Project must be present KEEP KEEP copies the waveform from the library into the Project This makes it a permanent part of the Project as if it was re corded in using disk space in the process INTRODUCTION 29 3 It is possible to keep clips that have previously been borrowed by using the Space Menu described in Managing Disk Space on page 26 4 Importing a Single Clip Step 1 Locate the transport so the cursor lies at the point you want the clip to go
276. n Event Parameters currently in Write or Trim return to Read when the STOP key or Mix ON key is pressed In this case the data that is written after the parameter returns to Read is determined by the On Stop menu item in the Mix menu If On Stop Hold is selected all events after the system enters Read are deleted leaving the last written value in force over the remaining duration of the project Ifon Stop Return is selected the parameter returns to the previously recorded value over the Glide Out time If On Stop Event is selected the last written value remains in force until a pre viously recorded event is encountered At this point the parameter value ramps to the new value over the Glide Out time Read to Write Trim 25 8 Preview Glide In When a parameter is punched in to Write from Preview the parameter ramps to the newly recorded value prior to the drop in point over the Glide In time set in the Utils menu Touch Current When a Touch enable parameter enters Write or Trim its value is always the current Read value therefore there is no transition Punch In Current When a parameter is punched in to Write or Trim by pressing the In key or passing over an Active In point its value is always the current Read value therefore there is no transition AUTO Current When a parameter enters Write or Trim by pressing the AUTO key its value is al ways the current Read value therefore there is no transition
277. n edited Using Trim Step 1 Press the Trim key Step 2 Select the desired track s If only one track is to be edited double click its track key to ensure no other tracks are selected Step 3 Locate the transport so the cursor lies over the desired edit point clips that will be edited are highlighted in red Step 4 Hold down the required edit target key Range Clip Head or Tail on the left hand side of the Binnacle Step 5 Locate the transport so the cursor lies over the destination edit point Step 6 Let go of the selected edit function to trim the clip s Binnacle editing allows TRIM to be achieved as a one handed or two handed edit To perform a one handed edit hit the edit target key to TRIM move the cursor if necessary then hit Enter to trim the clip Hitting Enter again will trim the clip again To perform a two handed edit hold down the edit target key to Trim move the cur sor then release the target key to trim the clip When trimming the head or tail of a clip pressing the target key once executes the TRIM Move the cursor and hit Enter to TRIM the head or tail again if required Trim Edit Targets BINNACLE EDITING The result of a TRIM edit is determined by the target key pressed Range Clip Moves the head and tail of the selected clip s while maintain ing the position of the waveform The clip moves in sync with the cursor while the waveform re mains fixed This exposes a different section of
278. n the Recorder Editor video monitor Power on the Station console by pressing the switch on the rear of the unit Assuming the system is properly configured once the console has booted up it will automatically launch the DREAM Start applica tion Use the trackball to click on the Start button on the DREAM Start Binnacle display This will launch the FMC mixer applica tion which in turn will launch the disk recorder application on the QDC engine See Automatic Start up on page 39 6 for complete details of the start up process SYSTEM SHUTDOWN Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Hold down the Shift key and press Pause Break on the PC key board to switch the keyboard focus to the Station Console com puter Type Q then Y to quit the FMC application The mixer display will return to the DREAM Start splash screen Use the trackball to click on the Shutdown DREAM key on the DREAM Start Binnacle display This will power down the QDC engine and shut down the Windows operating system Once Windows has shut down turn off the power to the Station Console by switching of the switches on the rear of the console CONSOLE CALIBRATION Console calibration is necessary whenever the Station is installed To calibrate your pots fader and touch sensors run FMC Hold down the Shift key and press the Pause Break key then type U Shift Pause Break switches the keyboard focus to FMC Press Pause Break when calibration is completed to switch the
279. n the Title was saved ePlayInhibitThreshold 24 When you are recording a large number of tracks at once Station may sometimes have difficulty keeping up with the disk playback bandwidth requirements Turning on this function by setting it to the number of tracks you are recording tells the Station not to try to load playback buffers on the tracks you are recording This means when you exit Record there will be no audio loaded to provide playback but this would have happened anyway if you are recording a lot of tracks simulta neously for more than about 10 seconds This parameter does not normally need to be altered unless you are doing a lot of recording with more than 16 tracks armed eBeepsTrackNumber If you are using the ADR Menu and you have set one of the GPIs to BEEPS you will also get audible beeps from one of the outputs This parameter allows you to choose the track that the beeps will output It may be the track you are recording on if you want eBeepsVolume Sets the audio level of the beeps Set it to 99 if you do not want any beeps BeepsFrequency Sets the frequency of the beeps in Hertz MinSegmentDuration 0 Sometimes a large amount of editing can result in lots of tiny clips sandwiched be tween larger ones These clips are played but not really heard and can absorb a lot of disk bandwidth by requiring a single disk seek to fetch only a few inaudible sam ples By setting this parameter to a non zero numb
280. n use the Fade Menu to create fades at ei ther end of the clip This will cause it to crossfade with the source clip under neath which will be playing at the original level LEVEL SOFT KEY FUNCTIONS 18 1 NOTES 18 2 Chapter 18 Clip Equalisation INTRODUCTION Station provides clip based four band parametric Equalisation plus shelving which can be applied to a single clip or range of clips within a Project EQ is performed by the system in real time as the audio is output from the Station therefore applying an EQ change does not affect the audio data on disk The clip based EQ is inde pendent of the track feed mixer EQ For mixer EQ functions see Equaliser on page 8 3 EQ Key Figure 1 EQ Key Applying EQ Step 1 Press the EQ key Step 2 Locate the cursor over the clip or define a Range of clips Step 3 Press the EDIT soft key Step 4 Use the numeric keypad to select the appropriate EQ param eter Step 5 Adjust the parameter using the jogger wheel Step 6 Press Enter Each equalisation band has three parameters you can change They are centre fre quency of the band gain cut or boost at that frequency and Q factor sharpness of the band or whether it is a high or low shelf INTRODUCTION EQ DISPLAY EQ Parameters Level Overload pK EQ MENU kkk Set SAMPLE RATI 100 In Out Old New Figure 2 EQ Display Frequency The centre frequency of each band Q or Shelf This displays the Q
281. nalog Output 5 4 20 37 Analog Output 6 3 19 36 Analog Output 7 2 18 35 Analog Output 8 SPECIFICATIONS AO AO GND Channd 17 33 50 Analog Output 1 16 32 49 Analog Output 2 15 31 48 Analog Output 3 14 30 47 Analog Output 4 13 29 46 Analog Output 5 12 28 45 Analog Output 6 11 27 44 Analog Output 7 10 26 43 Analog Output 8 9 25 42 Analog Output 9 8 24 41 Analog Output 10 7 23 40 Analog Output 11 6 22 39 Analog Output 12 5 21 38 Analog Output 13 4 20 37 Analog Output 14 3 19 36 Analog Output 15 2 18 35 Analog Output 16 40 8 Pin Connections for Standard QDC Configuration To clarify the channel allocation information above the following table describes the pin connection data for a QDC card with a standard configuration AUDIO I O CONFIGURATION 16 Analog Inputs 16 Analog Outputs 16 Digital 1 Os 1 QDC Card 40 9 Analog Inputs QDC Con A Out 1 A Out 2 A Out 3 A Out 4 A Out 5 A Out 6 A Out 7 A Out 8 A Out 9 A Out 10 A Out 11 A Out 12 A Out 13 A Out 14 A Out 15 A Out 16 Analog Outputs QDC Con Digital Inputs QDC Con D in 1 2 D in 3 4 D in 5 6 D in 7 8 D in 9 10 D in 11 12 D in 13 14 D in 15 16 Digital Outputs QDC Con D out 1 2 D out 3 4 D out 5 6 D out 7 8 D out
282. ncorporates the following Description lt clipname gt from track no in Project name Origination Date and OriginationTime The time and date of export Originator Fairlight Name of the machine performing the Export gt e Originator Reference The name of the current open Project from which the Export was made Time reference of the exported BWE is derived from the current timecode of the head of the original clip File Exchange A new open file exchange program has been initiated with the introduction of the MLA file exchange format ML4 and ML3 are both supported by the external file conversion software packages Media Magic and AV Transfer Fairlight are actively moving towards use of PC based software for file format conversion for speed of both operation and updates and users requiring file format conversion should access information on these packages through their respective websites Media Magic for Apple Macintosh www darkmatterdigital com AV Transfer for Microsoft Windows www avtransfer net Contact your Fairlight distributor for more information ML3 EXPORT 29 11 Press the File Exchange soft key to export an ML3 file to the root of the current disk drive This format can be read by Fairlight s File Exchange partners such as AKAI The file will be named XXX ML where XXX MT is the name of the current ly open Project The ML3 file contains only the top layer of clips To export an ML3
283. nd ease of use It is common to all of Fairlight s DREAM fam ily of products It is designed to achieve the following Universal availability no matter where the you navigate to in the system the basic editing functions are always available on dedicated keys This allows a user to learn the keystrokes like a musical instrument and achieve phenomenal speed e Two handed operation Allows the user to employ both hands thus increasing efficiency and speed The term Binnacle is a reference to the compass housing on the bridge ofa ship On a Station console it refers to the area which includes the Jog wheel and the surround ing keys as illustrated below SHUT PLAY REC Play Edit Options Edit Targets Figure 1 The Binnacle The Binnacle is designed so that a user can have one hand operating the Jog wheel and the surrounding keys while the other hand can roam the console INTRODUCTION 10 3 EDITING There are three basic steps to a Binnacle edit sequence Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Edit Modes The six Binnacle edit modes are selected on the outer ring of keys Edit Options The Binnacle options are Range ON All Layers and Razor ON The options have an influence on what happens when a Binnacle command is issued This varies ac cording to the edit mode and target of the command Refer to Selecting a Range BINNACLE EDITING Once an edit mode is selected it remains current until another edit
284. nd press Enter to adjust the Lace Time If a JUMP or GO TO command is issued that requires the transport to locate further than the time shown video machines will unlace the tape from the heads and go into fast wind Press the Lock soft key to toggle between Chase and Run Arm Master LOCK offers two modes CHASE The Station continuously tracks the timecode from the 9 pin machine RUN The Station gets the location from the 9 pin machine and then runs from the selected sync source Changes in timecode are then ignored Press the Arm soft key and use the jog wheel or keys and press Enter to select the type and range of 9 pin machine tracks to arm Use the track selection keys to arm the tracks This allows you to arm tracks on the 9 pin machine using the track keys The menu can scroll to arm analog tracks 1 4 or digital tracks 1 48 Only tracks available on the current 9 pin machine can be armed The 9 pin machine will go into record when the Station transport is placed in record It is not necessary to have any disk recorder tracks armed Note Be careful not to inadvertently leave the 9 pin machine armed as this can re sult in accidental erasure of tapes When a track on a 9 pin machine is armed a red box with a V is displayed above the Track 1 label on the track display The Master option appears only when M1 M2 is an LTC machine If switched on the system Master Clock will be driven by the incoming timecode when M1
285. nd press the Gap From Binnacle key to set the start of the range Step 2 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Gap To Binnacle key to set the end of the range Range Menu To access the Range menu options press and hold either the From or To key and select the desired menu option by pressing the associated soft key The following functions operate the same for both From and To TIME Enter a timecode value using the numeric keypad and press Enter MARK Select a mark by turning the Jog wheel and press Enter LAST The last FROM or TO point is used NEXT GAP Sets the FROM or TO points to the next points of silence before and after the cursor respectively SELECTING A RANGE PROJECT Sets the FROM or TO points to the Project Head or Project HEAD TAIL Tail marks Setting Range Modes There are two options for range behaviour as described below Stepl Press the Set Up key Step 2 Press the Range soft key to toggle between the functions list ed below Range Ranges are automatically cleared when an editing mode key is AUS selected unless the function must have a range to operate Pressing the Range On key turns the last Range on or off Range Ranges are retained when selecting edit mode keys unless the function cannot use a Range Pressing the key again will tog gle the Range on or off Double clicking the key will select the menu without a Range MANUAL Jumping to To and From Points Holding down the BLUE key and pres
286. nd press the MUTE key next to the Master Fader or on a Sidecar to prevent the selected feed from being muted when other feeds are put into SIP This feature is useful for keeping reverb returns live when channels feeding them are soloed SIP Defeat feeds are shown with a grey solo indicator on the mixer video display SIP Defeat is sometimes referred to as Solo Safe Call Follows Solo Call follows solo is only useful if used in conjunction with the optional Station Side Car The current feed called to the Channel Panel and Master Fader can follow the cur rently soloed feed Call follows solo is enabled in the Call menu Step 1 Press the Call key to display the Call menu Step 2 Press the Call by Solo soft key to toggle call follows solos on or off Disk Recorder Solo To solo a random selection of tracks use the Solo key located in the upper set of function keys This function is not included in mix automation Indicators next to the track numbers on the track display show red for soloed tracks and blue for muted tracks Step 1 Press the Solo key located in the upper set of function keys Step 2 Select the feeds that are to be soloed by pressing the feed se lection keys to toggle feeds in and out of the selection The currently soloed feeds are illuminated Step 3 Press the Solo key again to return to the previous mode While any signal path is soloed the Solo key flashes An alternative way of using the Solo key is to hold it
287. ne system must be 110 Ohm shielded pair digital audio cable CONNECTING THE SYSTEM COMPONENTS Once cabling issues have been dealt with the various system connections need to be made 1 Connect an IEC power lead to the back of the Engine 2 Connect the 15 way D connector of the video cable to the VGA 1 connector on the system I O panel on the rear of the Engine 3 Connect the console controller cable to the D25 connector on the system I O panel located on the rear of the Engine 4 Connect the ethernet cable to the PCI ethernet card on the system 1 O panel If connecting to a 100BaseT ethernet hub this should be a standard straight RJ45 CAT5 cable If connecting directly to the Station use the CAT5 cross over cable supplied 5 Connect any external SCSI drives to the external SCSI card if fitted and ensure that the last device is terminated Ensure that the SCSI ID s are not in conflict with each other See Internal and External SCSI Devices on page 38 8 below for more details 6 Connect all synchronization cables such as LTC Word Clock Video Sync etc 7 Connect all audio input and output cables to the QDC cards located on the rear of the Engine See Audio I O Configuration on page 42 2 for details on con nector channel allocation CONNECTING THE SYSTEM COMPONENTS ENGINE CONFIGURATION Once the physical installation of the QDC engine is complete move on to the con sole installation section of this manual Cons
288. nel contains all the synchronization facilities needed to allow communication with external devices including 9 Pin RS 422 Machine Control for external VTRs etc Word Clock I O for synchronisation Video Sync In for synchronisation Longitudinal Time Code I O for synchronisation AES Sync I O for synchronisation The System I O Panel also contains 3 X PCI slots Controller for connection to the Station console PCI 100BaseT Ethernet for connection to the Station console Optional PCI external SCSI bus General Purpose I O for connection to tally lights and ADR systems Serial port for connection to serial printers and other serial devices SVGA Output for connection to a video display unit ENGINE REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS Audio I O CABLING The Audio I O Section can contain up to a maximum of four QDC cards which perform all analog and digital I O connections and processing The QDC cards can be configured with a variety of analogue and digital I O options Each QDC card can contain a maximum of e 16 analog inputs and outputs and 16 digital inputs and outputs 32analog outputs and 16 digital inputs and outputs 8 analog inputs and outputs and 32 digital inputs and outputs e 16 analog inputs and 32 digital inputs and outputs e 16 analog outputs and 32 digital inputs and outputs Depending on what configuration is ordered the system can allow for more QDC cards to be configured Please contact your local Fairl
289. nes what type of event triggers it The first eight track keys on the console represent the eight GPOs when the GPI Menu is active Only one can be selected at a time Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Type OFF Description Type ON Description Examples Type Simple Description Examples Time Pulse Copy Fire Press the BLUE key and then the GPI key on the console to ac cess the GPI Menu Select which of the eight available outputs you wish to use via the track keys Press the first soft key turn the Jog wheel and press Enter to select one of the 12 possible GPO types Depending on which is chosen additional soft key settings will be displayed GPO is inactive GPO is always ON Example Recording session in progress tally light GPO fires at a given timecode Starting a device Timecode when the GPI fires Sets the length of time the GPO remains ON May be set to a number of milliseconds or set to HELD where the GPO stays on until the transport stops Copies the value in the TIME field to the numeric Register where it may be used for another operation Fires a GPO immediately for testing purposes If pulse is set to held the GPO switches on and off as the key is pressed and released GPI MENU 24 5 Type Record Description Examples Timecode Pulse Fire Type PREROLL ADR GPI 8 LOOP Description Examples Timecode Pulse Fire GPO remains on while the tran
290. ng crimp housing optional optional Farnell P N Farnell P N 865 722 865 722 Signal RS232 Signal RS422 Signal RS232 Signal RS422 CN2 CN3 COM 1 CN6 COM2 CN9 PIN 5 232 CON TX PIN 3 PIN 2 PIN 3 232 CON RX PIN 5 PIN 3 PIN 1 232 GND PIN 9 PIN 5 PIN 11 CON TX 422 POS PIN 4 PIN 7 PIN 24 CON TX 422 NEG PIN 2 PIN 6 PIN 10 CON RX 422 POS PIN 3 PIN 2 PIN 23 CON RX 422 NEG PIN 1 PIN 1 shell Shield PIN 9 PIN 5 QDC WIRING AND CONNECTION DETAILS 40 21 MFX to QDC Controller Adapter Cable Description Adapter cable for systems upgrading from MFX to QDC engines Connector 24 pin Centronics Female cable mount 25 pin D Female cable mount SPECIFICATIONS 24 Pin Centronics MFK Signal DREAM Signal Pair 25 Pin D Type Connector Connectors PIN 5 RS422 Tx POS CON Tx POS 1 PIN 10 PIN 17 RS422 Tx NEG CON Tx NEG 1 PIN 23 PIN 6 RS422 Rx POS CON Rx POS 2 PIN 11 PIN 18 RS422 Rx NEG CON Rx NEG 2 PIN 24 PIN 11 QWRTY 232 Rx CON Tx 3 PIN 2 PIN 14 GND GND C 3 PIN 9 PIN 23 MEX 232 Tx H_Rx DATA 4 PIN 20 PIN 8 MFX PRESENT GND C 4 PIN 7 PIN 12 MEX 232 Rx H_Tx DATA 5 PIN5 PIN 24 RS 232 IN CON Rx 5 PIN 3 PIN 1 GND GND Drain PIN 1 40 22 Ethernet Printer Description 100BaseT ethernet interface to console or network Use CAT shield ed twisted pair cable and shielded RJ45 connectors Connector RJ45
291. ng soft key parameters are as follows GATE Executes the gating function THRESHOLD This is the level the signal has to fall below for gating to occur Range 99 to 1dB Use the Jog wheel or numeric keypad to enter the value HOLD The duration in frames that a signal must remain below the threshold before gating will occur Range 0 to 999 frames Use the Jog wheel or numeric keypad to enter the value HANDLE The length in frames the clip will be extended at the head and the tail to allow for slow attack and decay Range 0 to 99 frames Use the Jog wheel or numeric keypad to enter the val ue INTRODUCTION 19 3 COMMIT Turning COMMIT on will give you the option of permanently removing the gated audio from your Project This process is described later in the Space Menu The COMMIT process can be performed at any time later so leave this turned off for now Once a Gate has occurred the clips can be trimmed using the TRIM command to adjust the hands and tails Original Clip Clip after Gating Figure 2 Gating GATING DURING RECORD Using the GATE function described above will take time to scan the clip s It is pos sible to set the gate parameters prior to making a recording so the gate is instanta neous if used after the recording is complete The threshold and gate indicators are displayed on the level meters These can be turned off by setting the THRESHOLD to 99dB Figure 3 Gate Meter Display The indic
292. ng the upgrade command Quit to the hash prompt Type upgrade at the hash prompt Follow the on screen prompts to select a target device and initialize if necessary See Upgrading System Software on page 35 23 for more information BOOTING FROM EXTERNAL DISK DRIVES It is possible to boot the QDC engine from an external bootable system disk To enable this the NVRAM settings must be modified Follow this procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Restart the QDC and at the autoboot countdown press any key Type rc RETURN You will be asked Do you want to use the recommended NVRAM configuration Y N Q Type n RETURN You will be presented with 4 options A Reconfigure All of NVRAM B Reconfigure Booting Preferences C Reconfigure System Setup D Quit this menu and reboot Type c RETURN Press RETURN until you see the option SCSI Controller Slot for Boot 0 On Board SCSI 000 003 000 Once you see this option you then have to type in the PCI SLOT NUMBER that you want to boot from You must have a SCSI card in this SLOT PCI slot zero is the onboard SCSI and as a general rule if you have an extra PCI SCSI card it should be in PCI slot 1 which is the bottom PCI slot on the rear of the engine Network interface cards should be in slot 2 or if you have TWO external PCI SCSI cards put the NIC in slot 3 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Enter the PCI slot number you want boot from an
293. ng you should start the transmission from your computer After the transfer is complete AudioBase will attempt to match itto the appropriate Project and if successful the publication will proceed as usual Afterwards the imported text file is removed from your hard disk Using Text Files Example 1 Sometimes you might want to put a CD Library or other stored sounds into the Sta tion and there may be some database information supplied already In this situation you will need a computer running some kind of software that handles databases or tables For the sake of this description we will describe the use of Microsoft Excel on a PC 1 Record the sound into the Station 2 Using the GATE function or by editing divide the recording into individual sounds 3 Name the clips exactly as on the supplied database 28 12 4 Load the information from your supplied database into an Excel file 5 Make sure that the data are ranged in successive cells in the order Name Catego ry Description User 1 User 4 the user fields may contain any kind of informa tion you like but they cannot contain more than 24 characters 6 Load a terminal program on the PC and get it ready to send the file you just saved Go to the AudioBase Menu and press the File soft key Now press Import and when the Station is ready send the text file from the PC 7 After the Station has received the file it will ask you to find the Project with which to pub
294. ngs are described in detail below 2 Change the console IP address in the Windows Network and Dial up Connec tions settings window This address must be unique and within the subnet range of the engine See Console Network Configuration on page 39 10 for more details 3 Edit the C Projects Mixers DREAM bat file on the console PC Modify the engine IP address at the top of the file to match the address set under the Web section of the setup file on the QDC engine See DREAM BAT on page 39 8 for more details QDC Setup File The QDC engine network settings are configured in the nvr setup file While the DREAM Start splash screen is displayed on the mixer display any char acters typed on the PC keyboard are passed through to the QDC engine Start DREAM Start if necessary by using the trackball to double click on the DREAM Start icon on the Windows desktop To configure the networking setup on the engine type setup atthe prompt The setup file will be displayed in a text editor Use the arrow keys to navigate through the setup file The default setup file is shown below Web HOSTNAME virgin IP ADDRESS 10 1 1 11 NET_MASK 255 255 0 0 DOMAINNAME VIRGIN VISIBILITY PUBLIC DNSSERVER off DNSDOMAIN your dns domain com GATEWAY MOLL SCANHOSTS 1 11 20 AudioBase VERSION 1 SERVER TO LDL Console ENABLE No SERVER OL Le EL SERVER PORT 2727 CLIENT PORT 2727 DEBUG 0
295. nk groups are created from the Group menu Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Group key Press the Link Group soft key The feeds that currently belong to link groups flash red Feeds available for selection are dimly lit Press the feed selection key of the first feed of the group Press the feed selection key of the last feed of the group Link groups can only include track feeds or live feeds not a mix ture of both Link groups can only include up to eight contiguous members Select a menu item from the Apply Defaults soft key menu all defaults applies pan settings to each member to set the link group into a surround format as described above under Link Group Format All defaults also applies the feed parameter values of the first member of the group to all the members Parameters modified are fader level pan EQ dynamics aux sends inserts and direct out state default pans applies pan settings to each member to set the link group into a surround format as described above under Link Group Format Default pans affects the pan parameter only feed params applies the feed parameter values of the first member of the group to all the members excluding pan Parame ters modified are fader level EQ dynamics aux sends inserts and direct outs no defaults no feed parameters are modified Hold down a BLUE key and press the Group key to return to the
296. now be used to select outputs for the Direct Out Press the Direct ON OFF soft key is used to turn the direct out put on and off Press the Pre Post soft key to derive the direct output from before or after the feed or bus fader Press the Gain soft key and turn the jog wheel or use the numeric keys to enter a gain value for the direct output Press Enter to complete the operation CONTROLLING THE SIGNAL PATH FADERS TO MASTER FADER The Faders To menu allows the channel faders to be assigned to one of a number of feed parameters Press the Faders To key to toggle the fader between its normal function and the function selected in the BLUE Faders To setup menu The faders will snap to the level of the selected parameter on each channel All other controls on the Parameter Pad continue to function normally To select the Faders To function follow these steps Step 1 Hold down the Blue key and press the Faders To key to display the Faders To menu Step 2 Press one of the menu soft keys to select one of the following functions Input allows the faders to control the signal level prior to the disk recorder in a track feed Direct Output the faders control the direct out level of each feed Boom Level the fader controls the Boom level for each feed OR Select an Aux bus to control the feed send level to the selected bus Step 3 Press the Auto Monitor soft key when a bus is selected to auto mati
297. nsport control and Range selection For more information on transport and track selection see Tracks amp Transport on page 4 2 The transport and range features include BINNACLE EDITING Jogger Wheel this is used for many functions including moving the transport and scrubbing the audio To and From these keys are used to set the beginning From and end To of the Range Pressing and releasing one of these keys sets the Range to start or fin ish at exactly that point Holding down one of the keys allows various menu options and other keys to be used for setting the Range extremities Play Jog if the transport is not in Jog this key will put it into Jog If it is in Jog this key will put the transport in Play This is designed to allow the most common transport commands used during editing to be accessible without moving the hand Jump Left and Jump Right these keys allow location of the transport to impor tant features in the Project such as the next clip next mark start or end of the Project and many more Holding down a Jump key causes display of a menu on the LCD that selects and locks in one of the Jump choices Zoom the Zoom key is used to change the horizontal time scale of the video display To use it hold it down while rotating the Jog wheel Enter the Enter key is used to complete many editing and menu selection operations BLUE the BLUE key modifies the function of any key with blue text To select
298. nt methods of en gaging these states on the parameters of the mixer This flexibility allows each user to adopt the methods that suit their preferred technique or project requirements This chapter will introduced some of these basic methods A thorough understand ing of fundamentals of the system will guide the user to find the methods that work best for them Mix ON Before the Mix ON key is pressed all mixing and routing functions can be manually operated but the mixer will not record or play back automation Pressing the Mix ON key allows the console to write and read mix automation data The automation data for a project starts at a timecode location one frame after midnight and finishes one frame before midnight However the system requires a minimum preroll of at INTRODUCTION 25 3 least one second and it is advisable to start projects at a location of at least one minute after midnight providing adequate preroll Static Snapshots Project Snapshot Every project contains a snapshot of the state of the mixer when the project was last closed When a project is opened the mixer state is updated and all parameters are recalled Mix Snapshot Every saved mix contains a snapshot of the state of the mixer when the mix was saved More than one complete mix can be saved within a project When a mix is loaded the mixer state is updated and all parameters are recalled See Data Storage on page 25 19 for more details Paramete
299. ntain either 56 or 64 channels 64 channel mode is selected by the environment variable MADI_HIGHDENSITY At 96k the MADI frame can contain either 28 or 32 channels 32 channel mode is selected by the environment variable MADI96K_HIGHDENSITY This variable can also be used in conjunction with MADI96K_LEGACY At 96k there is a choice of two framing systems 1 The default framing is a 28 32 channel MADI frame repeated at a 96k rate 2 The Legacy mode frame is a 56 64 channel MADI frame repeated at a 48k rate carrying 28 32 channels of audio Each audio channel occupies two consecutive MADI channels This is selected by the environment variable MADI96K_LEGACY AUDIO I O CONFIGURATION 40 11 SPECIFICATIONS MADI Environment Variables To modify the MADI mode the nvr aman_cfg file must be created and or edited and the environment variables as described above must be entered To edit the file open the file in the text editor by typing ed nvr aman cfg at the prompt Then enter the required variables exactly as shown below one per line Save the file and restart the system when you have finished editing setenv MADI HIGHDENSITY If SET and SR lt 48k then the MADI frame will transmit 64 channels Default is 56 Only affects MADI Outputs MADI inputs automatically adapt setenv MADI96K HIGHDENSITY If SET and SR 96k then the MADI frame will transmit 32 channels Default is 28 Only affects MADI Outputs MADI inputs automat
300. ntrol on the Blue Direct Menu Stem Assign It may be desirable to assign a feed or members of a link group to a restricted set of the bus elements in the Main or Sub Buses This procedure is useful where the ele ment order of an imported mix stem differs from the internal DREAM bus and link group element order or when the panner alone cannot be used to create the desired assignment or spatial effect To ensure that signals are routed to bus elements at unity gain turn off the panner in the selected feeds by pressing the pan o soft key in the pan parameter pad Feeds for stem assignment must first be assigned to the desired bus using bus assign see Assigning Signals to Buses on page 5 15 above Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Stem Assign key ASSIGNING SIGNALS TO BUSES Aux to PATCHING AND ROUTING Step 2 Press the bus selection key of the destination bus to which you want to assign signal paths This can be the Main Bus or any Sub or Aux Bus to which the feed is currently assigned The Speaker Mute keys now show which elements of the des tination bus the signal path is assigned to Elements currently assigned are brightly lit unassigned elements are dimly lit and elements unavailable in the destination bus are off Only bus elements that are available in the destination bus format can be selected Step 3 Press any Track Live Feed or Link Group key to toggle its se lection on or off Step 4 Use the Sp
301. nts of the clipboard are inserted at the cursor Audio to the right of the cursor is moved along to the right Using Razor On Mid Edit RAZOR mode can be turned on in between the CUT and PASTE stages of an edit For example you may perform a cut with RAZOR off leaving the time line intact then press RAZOR ON to insert time when pasting Razor Soft Key Functions When Razor On is selected an additional soft key Menu is available on the LCD Insert Silence will be inserted from the start of a Range for the dura Space tion of the Range CUT AND COPY EDIT MODES 10 11 ERASE EDIT MODE The ERASE mode commands remove clips and parts of clips from the Project To enter ERASE mode press the Erase key The Binnacle will remain in ERASE mode until another edit mode key is pressed Unlike COPY and CUT the ERASE edit is completed at the moment of striking the target key Using Erase Step 1 Press the Erase key Step 2 Select the desired track s If only one track is to be edited double click its track key to ensure no other tracks are selected Step 3 Locate the transport so the cursor lies over the desired edit point clips that will be edited are highlighted in red Step 4 Press the required edit target key Range Clip Head or Tail on the left hand side of the Binnacle Erase Edit Targets The result of an ERASE edit is determined by the target key pressed Range Clip Erases all clips on the top layer which touch the curs
302. ole Installation on page 39 2 Once the console is correctly installed and connected you may follow the start up proce dure and then move on to configuring the engine QDC NETWORK SETUP ENGINE INSTALLATION The default network settings are suitable for installations where the console is direct ly connected to the QDC engine with the CAT5 cross over cable supplied If the QDC engine is connected to a Fairlight Medialink network the network configu ration of the system may need to be modified Network configuration requires the following changes 1 Edit the nvr setup file on the QDC engine Modify the engine IP address host name network domain name and console IP address Modify the DNS server and domain settings to enable internet access if necessary Modify the Audio Base server address if necessary These settings are described in detail in QDC Setup File on page 35 3 2 Change the console IP address in the Windows Network and Dial up Connec tions settings window This address must be unique and within the subnet range of the engine See Console Network Configuration on page 39 10 for more details 3 Edit the C Projects Mixers DREAM bat file on the console PC Modify the engine IP address at the top of the file to match the address set under the Web section of the setup file on the QDC engine See DREAM BAT on page 39 8 for more details INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL SCSI DEVICES The Engine unit has been d
303. ole emu raw file the system will not launch the disk recorder application on the QDC engine when FMC is executed on the console computer Console Network Configuration The Station requires a TCP IP network connection to the QDC engine For this to occur the network settings on both the console computer and the QDC engine must be configured correctly The console and engine must be within the same subnet and have unique IP ad dresses Check the QDC network settings as described in QDC Network Setup on page 39 11 or read the address on the QDC startup diagnostic screen To configure the Station network settings follow these steps Step 1 Hold down the Shift key and press the Pause Break key on the PC keyboard to change the keyboard focus to the Station compu ter Type Q then Y to exit the FMC application if necessary Step 2 Use the trackball to right click on My Network Places on the Windows desktop to open the Network and Dial up Connections dialogue box Select Properties Double click Local Area Connection then click Properties AUTOMATIC START UP 39 11 Step 3 Step 4 Double click TCP IP and set the Station console s IP address Ensure the IP address is unique and within the subnet range of the engine Press Tab to get the default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 then click OK Tick the Show icon in taskbar box then click OK and Close QDC NETWORK SETUP If you need to modify your network settings or you hav
304. olo Call by Solo Pressing the SOlo key next to a Sidecar fader calls the path to the Parameter Pad PARAMETER PAD GENERAL OPERATION The Parameter Pad consists of a panel of ten motorised pots eight soft keys an LCD parameter display and a row of Parameter Pad mode switches When using the Parameter Pad a signal path is called from the selection panel as described above a Parameter Pad mode switch is selected to choose the type of processing required When a new Parameter Pad mode is selected the pots and soft keys change func tions and the LCD displays the current function of each control The Parameter Pad mode switches are EQ 4 band parametric shelving notching equalisers plus 2 bands of switchable high low pass filters and shelving EQs Pan Complete surround panning Dyn Compressor plus limiter or expander or gate Aux Four aux sends mono or stereo Plug Ins Controls for optional signal processing plug ins The Master Fader The Master Fader provides level control to whichever signal path has been called to the Parameter Pad The Master Key The Master Key next to the Master Fader allows the Central Fader to be assigned to be the Main Bus Master The Fold Key DREAM Software release 1 2 does not support folding and unfolding This infor mation is included for future reference The Fold Key can be used whenever a group of signal paths has been selected to the Central Fader This could be a Link Group
305. on When Share is selected inputs that are already patched to existing destinations re main patched to those destinations and are also patched to the currently selected destinations When Replace is selected the input is unpatched from its current destinations and p P P patched to the currently selected destination PATCHING INPUTS Unpatching Inputs To remove input patching from a set of one or more feeds press the Patch I O key select the feed and press the unpatch inputs soft key PATCHING AND ROUTING PATCHING OUTPUTS Physical outputs can be patched from buses insert sends direct outs and monitor outs Patching Bus Outputs To select physical outputs for the buses Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Press the Patch I O key to enter the Patch I O menu Press the Inputs Outputs soft key to select Outputs Select the Main Bus or a Sub Bus by pressing a bus selection key Select an Aux Bus by holding down the BLUE key and pressing an Aux Bus selection key Press the Patch soft key Press the ANALOG DIGITAL and AES MADI soft keys to choose the desired type of output The track feed keys may now be used to select outputs for the bus Outputs of the selected type Analog AES MADI currently patched to the selected bus element are brightly lit Outputs of the selected type Analog AES MADI currently patched to other sources flash off to dim Outputs of the selected type Analog
306. on for the soft pot press the Custom key in the Soft Pot keys section on the Station Master Sidecar Assigning a Custom Soft Pot Function To define a custom function for the soft pot follow these steps Step 1 Adjust the Parameter Pad to display the function you wish to con trol by pressing the EQ Pan Dyn Aux or Plug In key and any page soft key necessary Step 2 Hold the BLUE key and press the Custom key in the Soft Pot keys section on the Station Master Sidecar Step 3 Touch any rotary control in the Parameter Pad to select that func tion for the Sidecar soft pots Individual feeds may be soloed in the monitoring system There are three solo modes which may be entered by pressing the SOLO key next to any fader These are Mute 13 4 solo in place or SIP after fader listen or AFL and pre fader listen or PFL SIP mutes all other feeds leaving only the soloed feeds feeding the bus being monitored SIP supports monitoring in any format AFL and PFL modes replace the current monitor source with the stereo solo bus whenever a feed is soloed All soloed feeds are routed to the solo bus Soloed link groups are automatically upmixed or down mixed to allow all their members to be monitored in the stereo monitor bus normal monitor upmixing or downmixing occurs between the monitor bus and the selected speaker set The AFL solo signal is derived after the feed fader and mute PEL solo is derived be fore the feed fader and m
307. on is executed from within the Windows Startup directory 2 The DREAM Start Start key is clicked by the user which in turn launches the DREAM bat batch file 3 DREAM bat copies the emu raw file from the QDC engine onto the console computer using FTP via TCP IP DREAM bat writes an error log to C Projects Mixers startup_log txt 4 DREAM bat launches the FMC Fairlight Mixing Console application 5 FMC negotiates with the QDC via the serial port and compares the copy of emu raw on QDC with the copy on the console computer 6 If emu raw is current FMC launches the disk recorder application on the QDC engine In order for these processes to take place the settings detailed below must be in place Windows Start up On the console computer a short cut to DREAM Start exe must be placed in the Windows start up directory This is achieved by right clicking on the taskbar at the bottom of the Windows desktop select Properties Advanced Add and browse to DREAM Start exe either on the desktop or in C Projects Mixers Utils Copy a short cut to the Startup directory AUTOMATIC START UP 39 7 DREAM Start DREAM Start is a splash screen application that is used to start the Fairlight Mixing Console application AN CONSOLE INSTALLATION DREAM Start also supports keyboard communications to the QDC engine over the controller RS232 link whenever the splash screen is displayed This feature is useful for setting up QDC net
308. onal Farnell P N Farnell P N 865 722 865 722 Signal QDC Signal RS232 Signal RS422 Signal RS232 Signal RS422 comms CN2 CN3 COM 1 CN6 COM2 CN9 CON TX 232 PIN 6 PIN 3 PIN 2 CON RX232 PIN 24 PIN 5 PIN 3 GND PIN 1 PIN 9 PIN 5 CON TX4224 PIN 13 PIN 4 PIN 7 CON TX422 PIN 31 PIN 2 PIN 6 CON RX422 PIN 12 PIN 3 PIN 2 CON RX422 PIN 30 PIN 1 PIN 1 Shield shell PIN 9 PIN 5 SPECIFICATIONS 40 20 Station Pre Production Controller Adapter Cable Description Adapter cable for pre production Station systems upgrading from MFK controllers Connector 37 pin D Female cable mount 9 pin D Female cable mount 9 pin D Female cable mount 37 Pin D Type Signal Pair 9 Pin D Type Connector Connectors PIN 1 GND 1 232 PIN5 PIN 6 CON Tx 1 232 PIN 2 PIN 24 CON Rx 2 232 PIN 3 PIN 12 CON Tx POS 3 422 PIN 2 PIN 13 CON Rx POS 4 422 PIN 7 PIN 30 CON Tx NEG 3 422 PIN 1 PIN 31 CON Rx NEG 4 422 PIN 6 SHELL GND Drain 422 SHELL DREAM Console Pre Production Controller Cable Description QDC Serial interface to DREAM Console for pre production DREAM Consoles Connector 25 pin D Female cable mount 2 x 10 pin DIL header optionally 2 x 9 pin D Female cable mount Crimp pins for 10way crimp housings are Farnell P N 865 783 D25 Female Signal 10 Way DIL 10 Way DIL D9 Female D9 Female crimp housi
309. opied from libraries This will determine how much a clip can be trimmed later The HANDLES parameter can be set to 0 to 99 seconds or to ALL which will copy the entire waveform NOTE To keep just one clip use the Edit Menu to cut the clip then hold down the BLUE key and press Enter This will copy the waveform shown in the clip with no handles Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Space key Step 2 Enter a HANDLES value if required then press Enter Step 3 Press the KEEP ALL BORROWED soft key Step 4 Press the Enter key Once a KEEP BORROWED has been performed on a Project back ups can be made with the knowledge that all originally borrowed audio clips are now stored in one place More About Committing Examples of committing to clarify its operation are A 30 second recording has just been made and then the first ten seconds are trimmed off Go to the Space Menu and press COMMIT while the cursor is touching this clip with Handles set to zero The effect will be to remove the first ten seconds of audio data with that disk space becoming free Attempting to enlarge the clip us ing the TRIM command will fail because there is no more data in the Master Re cording If Handles are set to 2 seconds only the first 8 seconds of data would be removed A 30 second recording has been made and this time the last 15 seconds of the re sulting clip Clip A are covered by pasting another clip Clip B on top Go to th
310. or and keys to select a mark The last mark you created or selected will be the de fault when you enter this menu TIME Enables entry of a new timecode value with the numeric key pad NAME Allows you to enter a name for the mark using the alphanu meric keyboard INTRODUCTION 27 3 MARKS GOTO MARK The GOTO menu allow the transport to jump to any named mark including the head and tail of the project Press the GOTO key press the Mark soft key and turn the jog wheel to select a mark Press Enter to locate to the mark point f DELETE Deletes the mark from the Project RENUM Renumbers the marks into correct timecode order NOTES 1 Making and naming marks can be done during recording no other form of editing is allowed at that time You can enter the Edit Marks Menu press the Mark key to create a mark then immediately press the Name soft key type a name and press Enter because the newly created mark is always the current one for naming 2 You can create special Beat Marks for musical uses by typing the following IBM number beats tempo Enter where IBM Insert Beat Marks number number of bars required beats number of beats per bar tempo beats per minute lt RETURN gt Enter key in the alphanumeric keyboard Beat marks are placed at the beginnings of all bars starting from the current timecode and are named bar1 bar2 etc They can all be deleted by typing DBM lt RETURN gt delete beat
311. or on selected tracks Head Erases the heads of all clips which touch the cursor on selected tracks Tail Erases the tails of all clips on the top layer which touch the cursor on selected tracks Erase Edit Options The Binnacle options for ERASE are RANGE ON ALL LAYERS RAZOR ON Erase with Range On To perform an ERASE with RANGE on follow these steps Step 1 Press either the Erase key Step 2 Select the desired track s If only one track is to be edited double click its tracks key to ensure no other tracks are selected Step 3 Define a Range using the From and To keys or press Range On to recall the last range set Step 4 Press the required edit function key Range Clip Head or Tail on the left hand side of the Binnacle The selection should now be erased BINNACLE EDITING 10 12 Erase Range Targets Range Clip Head Tail Erases all clips on the top layer from the beginning of the Range to the end of the Range Erases all clips on the top layer from the beginning of the Range to the current cursor position Erases all clips on the top layer from the current cursor posi tion to the end of the Range Erase with All Layers On Overlapping clips are arranged in layers When the All Layers key is selected after pressing either the Erase key the target will consist of all clips on all layers When range is offand you press All Layers or Razor a range is created that encloses the selected clips
312. or group elements advance in the following order Left Left Centre Centre Right Centre Right Left Surround Centre Surround Right Surround Boom Elements that are not in the current bus or group format are not displayed To skip the current element press the Next soft key To remove patching for the current bus element and leave it with no output press the Blank soft key Step 7 To patch elements out of order press the speaker mute key of the element you wish to patch Inserts may be switched in and out of circuit by pressing the ON OFF soft key Insert return gain and phase may also be adjusted in the Insert menu Patching To Multiple Signal Paths It is possible to patch the same physical input to many different signal paths and have it heard on many of them at the same time This includes Live Feeds Track Feeds and Insert Returns The exception is that only one of a group of Track Feeds with the same physical input can be armed or put in Thru mode at one time The user is prompted before sharing of physical inputs takes place So when a phys ical input is selected as part of the patching operations described above if it is al ready being used by another signal path the following warning message appears One or more inputs already patched Do you want to share replace or remove Press the Share or Replace soft key to choose the patching option you require Press the input selection key again to remove it from the selecti
313. or hold the Mute key Select tracks to mute The MUTE function can be toggled on or off with the first soft key This will switch between muting the selected tracks and monitoring all tracks Indicators next to the track numbers show blue for muted tracks Tracks can be put into SAFE mode to prevent accidental editing or recording Step 1 Step 2 DISABLE Hold down the BLUE key and press the Safe key Select tracks to be in SAFE mode The SAFE function can be toggled on or off with the first soft key This will switch be tween having the selected tracks safe and no tracks safe Indicators next to the track numbers show green for safe tracks Tracks can be disabled for playback waveform display and editing Step 1 Step 2 SOLO AND MUTE Hold down the BLUE key and press the Disab key Select tracks to DISABLE The DISABLE function can be tog gled on or off with the first soft key This will switch between having the selected tracks disabled and no tracks disabled 21 4 DISABLE 22 1 NOTES 22 2 Chapter 22 Track Takes INTRODUCTION The Track Menu is used to copy and move clips to other tracks without affecting their position in time Tracks may also be re numbered All Track functions except NUMBERS use a Range and affect all layers of clips The Takes Menu provides the POP function which moves clips on lower layers to the top Clips that lie beneath the cursor are listed in the upper display
314. or using the Fill Range soft key in the Mix menu It is not possible to enter Trim mode from preview Preview automatically selects Write To preview and record a new mix over existing automation data follow these steps Step 1 Press the Mix ON key to enable the automation system Step 2 Press parameter enable soft keys for the parameters you wish to modify Step 3 Press the Mix key to select feeds to automate Select the feeds you wish to modify Make sure that Touch AutoEnable is not selected in the Mix LCD menu Step 4 Press Preview key to enter preview mode Step 5 Press the Touch key to select touch Latch mode In touch latch mode the parameter remains in preview when the control is released Step 6 Locate the transport to the section you wish to modify and press PLAY Note that parameters with previously recorded mix data are dis played in green for READ Step 7 Modify a parameter and note that the parameter control flashes red and the associated channel AUTO key is illuminated to indi cate that it is in preview The parameter now ignores previously recorded mix data Roll back the transport and modify more parameters to establish the new mix Note that the parameters remain flashing red and in preview Continue in this way to build up the new mix balance Step 8 25 14 To take a parameter out of Preview press the Touch key to enter touch Snap mode and touch a parameter control The parameter will drop back into
315. ord protection without re starting the system type enduser Enter Extending a Project creates a new Project with all the clips borrowed from the orig inal The extended Project also inherits all the track names and marks Projects can be extended for several reasons 1 The current drive is full Extending the Project to another drive will enable more recordings 2 The current Project is full Projects have a 4 Gig limit extending the Project will enable more recordings 3 The original Project is a pre edited and labelled bed This allows Projects to be used as a templates 4 To create new versions This will allow further recording and editing without affecting the original Project When working on an extension the original Project can be regarded the same as a library Project i e all the clips are borrowed It is not possible to perform an Over write record on borrowed clips When using libraries and extensions be very careful with what you do to the original Projects and libraries Erasing clips or Projects that are used by other Projects will result in missing audio Extending A Project Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Press the Proj key Press the EXTEND soft key Select the desired destination Type the new name Press Enter Pressing the Refresh soft key will updated the directory view for the current folder drive or domain 26 4 MANAGING DISK SPACE After recording and editing has taken p
316. order system These offer a fast method of controlling which track feeds are monitored The solo and mute functions described in this chapter can be used in conjunction with mixer solo and mute features which are described in Solo on page 7 3 and Mute on page 7 5 The disk recorder SOLO and MUTE functions operate in a similar manner to those on a mixing console SOLO mutes all tracks except for soloed tracks MUTE silences only the selected tracks Both the SOLO and MUTE functions can be activated by pressing the Solo or Mute key then selecting the desired tracks Solo Key Mute Key Figure 1 Solo and Mute Keys There is also a useful feature where you can hold down the Solo or Mute key while selecting the tracks This will automatically return you to the previous menu when you release the keys SOLOING TRACKS Step 1 Press or hold the Solo key Step 2 Select tracks to SOLO The SOLO function can be toggled on or off with the first soft key in the LCD menu This will switch between soloing the selected tracks and monitoring all tracks Indicators next to the track numbers show orange for soloed tracks and blue for remaining silent tracks INTRODUCTION SOLO FOLLOWS EDIT The SOLO FOLLOWS EDIT function automatically puts selected tracks into SOLO as you edit Step 1 Step 2 MUTING TRACKS Step 1 Step 2 SAFE Press the Solo key Toggle the FOLLOW function on or off with the second soft key Press
317. oup master Adding a Feed to a Fader Group To add or remove Feeds in a Fader Group Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Group key Step 2 Press the fader group soft key in the LCD menu Step 3 Select the fader group from the soft keys on the Macro Pad The feed selection keys are used to select feeds to include in the current fader group Feeds already in the current fader group are illuminated Feeds in other fader groups flash Other feeds are dimly illuminated Step 4 Press the feed selection keys or sub bus keys to toggle feeds in or out of the fader group Select another fader group to edit or press the BLUE Group key to return to the previous mode or any other key to continue mixing or editing FADER GROUPS Destroying a Fader Group Fader groups cannot be destroyed however when they contain no members they are inoperative To remove a member from a fader group follow the steps in the section on creating fader groups above and de select all members from the group To remove a feed from a fader group follow these steps Selecting a Fader Group Step 1 Press the Group key Step 2 Press one of the fader group soft keys on the Macro Pad to select a fader group and bring it to the Master Fader Unfolding Fader Group Members Dream software release 1 2 does not support fold and unfold this information is in cluded here for future reference If the optional Station Sidecar is fitted a fader group may be unfo
318. own the Jog Shuttle key for a menu of Jog Shuttle settings Hold down the Record key for a menu of record options Binnacle Editing Keys and Jog Wheel The Binnacle is at the heart of the Station s advanced editing interface Dedicated edit functions are associated with these keys In addition to normal Jog Shuttle transport operations the jog wheel is used for zooming and parameter selection in soft menus Numeric and Track View Keys The Numeric Keys are provided for entering timecode locations or parameter val ues By pressing and holding one of the three BLUE keys the Track View Keys select the number of tracks visible on the monitor track display The Clear key can be used to clear numeric and text fields on the LCD menu and also to cancel dialogue box requests Edit Option Keys The edit option keys modify the effect of each edit An edit can be performed on All Layers on a time Range and can insert or delete time via Razor mode Trackball The Trackball is used as a conventional pointing device for the on screen graphical interface Monitor Controls These controls allow adjustment of the listening level in the control room and the selection and configuration of the nine possible multiformat monitor sets The monitor source can also be selected here Fader Section The Fader Section provides a motorised touch sensitive linear fader for control of the level of the current signal path Also included are Solo and Mute keys A
319. pecified range with a single key press Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Establish your new mix in Preview mode as described above Press the Mix key to make the Mix menu active Select a range with the From and To keys on the Binnacle Press the F111 Range soft key in the Mix menu to write the static values of the flashing previewed parameters across the selected range The selected parameters ramp in from the previously recorded value to the previewed value over the Glide In time and return to the previously recorded values over the Glide Out time specified in the Utils menu PREVIEWING MIX MOVES 25 15 Using Mix ON with Preview Toggle the Mix ON key at any time to isolate all parameters from reading automation data This can be useful for previewing a new mix balance Be aware however that when Mix ON is subsequently engaged all previously recorded parameters will switch to Read and the new mix will be lost When using Mix On with Preview the Preview selection is preserved when switching Mix On on or off Parameters in Pre view are isolated and will retain the adjustments made while Mix ON was not en gaged SAVING AND LOADING MIXES Up to 256 complete mixes may be saved in each project and recalled later Mixes must be saved before closing a project Any unsaved mix data is lost unless saved The available space left in the project file for new mixes or mix data is displayed in the Mix menu When the space left falls below 296 the
320. plays The status of the signal path associated with each fader is indicated with illuminated tally displays TOUCH SAFE READ WRITE TRIM INPUT BUS LINK The fader is has been touched The selected signal path is in safe mode and will not update automation data The selected signal path is in read mode and playing back au tomation data in mix mode The selected signal path is armed to write automation data the console is in write mode and recording automation The WRITE indicator flashes while in write mode but not re cording The selected signal path is set to trim automation data the console is in trim mode and recording automation The TRIM indicator flashes while in trim mode but not re cording Fader to input is not available in DREAM software release 1 2 The fader controls the input level to a disk recorder track The fader controls a bus level The fader is a member of a link group OPERATION 7 7 SignalLED Signal present LEDs are not supported in DREAM software release 1 2 The Signal LED monitors the channel audio level For Live Feeds the level is taken before the channel processing For Track Feeds it depends whether or not the track is armed for recording If it is not the level is taken directly at the point of playback from the disk prior to the channel processing If it is armed the level is taken at the end of the input path just prior to recording to disk If the si
321. port to where you want to start recording then press PLAY and RECORD together Step 2 Press STOP or PLAY to end the recording It is also possible to drop tracks in and out of record using the track keys in the Arm Menu RECORDING 9 7 Recording Types Recordings can be made using the following different recording modes Press the Record soft key in the Arm menu to toggle through the options listed below Record A new clip is created for each recording This will result in NEW new layers on top of previous recordings This is the default and is the safest way to record when learning to use a Station The HANDLE parameter available when this type of record ing is selected sets the amount of buffered audio recorded to disk prior to the start of the clip This handle may be exposed by applying a TRIM HEAD edit please read the Trim Edit Mode on page 10 13 for further details The available han dle range is 0 30 frames Record Recording replaces audio that is already on the disk This is OVER destructive and cannot be undone Clips lying under the cur sor or the next ones along are replaced on armed tracks The recording continues past the end of the original clip un less the tail of the clip does not show all the waveform due to the clip tail having been trimmed or cut In this case the re cording will stop Record Tape mode behaves just like an analog tape recorder If re HADE cording is commenced where there are
322. position spread is set to maximum divergence is set to minimum and rotation is set to zero If the link group contains a Boom channel the assignment is achieved by Stem As signment of the member to the Boom element only of the destination Bus See Stem Assign on page 5 16 Group member panning can be changed later by unfolding or individually selecting a member as described below If you are using a link group to control a premixed stem which is delivered in a dif ferent channel order it may be necessary to edit the track order on the disk recorder or to change the input patching of the feeds if the stem is played in off an external device Link Group Features Linking feeds in link groups has the following effects 1 Selecting one member using the Track or Live Feed keys selects the entire link group 2 There is only one fader for the group When the group is created the group master fader adopts the level of the first fader in the group When the fader is adjusted the member s fader levels are offset by the amount the master fader is moved in dBs To get access to the individual fader settings the group must be unfolded or its member individually selected as described below 3 When a group is created the master pan control is centred The pan control of each member may be changed as described above in Link Group Format The Spread and Rotate controls becomes active when the link group master is called to the Master Fade
323. previous mode or press another mode key to continue mixing or editing LINK GROUPS GROUPING Destroying a Link Group Link groups are destroyed from the Group menu Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Group key Press the Link Group soft key The feeds that currently belong to link groups flash red Press the feed selection key of a feed belonging to a group Select unlink on the LCD soft key menu item Hold down a BLUE key and press the Group key to complete the operation and return to the previous mode or press any other key to continue mixing or editing Unfolding or Selecting to Access a Link Group Member Note that folding and unfolding is not available in the DREAM 1 2 software release but are included here for future reference BLUE selection as described below can be used to select individual members of a link group Once a link group has been created selecting or calling any member will select the entire group and place the link group master on the Master Fader The link group master is the first feed in the group In order to adjust any of the members of the group independently they must either be unfolded or independently selected Follow these steps to access a link group member by unfolding Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Call the group to the Master Fader by pressing the CALL key then pressing the feed selection key of any member of the link group Press the Fold key next to th
324. ptions Each QDC card can be loaded with I O daughter boards as shown below There can be a max imum of four QDC cards in an engine There are four different I O daughter board options All Analog Input AOI Analog Output AO1M Analog Output with Monitoring Relay Option and AES1 Digital I O The MADI digital I O option takes up one entire QDC card The diagram below shows one QDC card with the three fifty pin I O connectors at the left and the six I O daughter board positions numbered 1 6 from top to bot tom To determine the I O configuration of an installed system quit to the MFX prompt and type qdcinit 1vv The screen will display a complete list of I O compo nents and pin connection data QDC Card I O Daughter Board Analog Input 8 channels do not fit if I O board 2 is AES Con 1 I O Daughter Board Analog Output 8 channels or AES I O 4 stereo in amp 4 stereo out only fit AO1M in slot 2 or 5 I O Daughter Board Analog Output 8 channels or AES I O 4 stereo in amp 4 stereo out I O Daughter Board Analog Output 8 channels or AES I O 4 stereo in amp 4 stereo out I O Daughter Board Analog Output 8 channels or AES I O 4 stereo in amp 4 stereo out Con 3 only fit AO1M in slot 2 or 5 I O Daughter Board Analog Input 8 channels do not fit if I O board 5 is AES Figure 7 QDC I O Options AUDIO I O CONFIGURATION
325. r Step 6 Select panel number Panel 5 then select Sidecar type Click OK to add the panel This refers to the switch panel and joystick on the sidecar To remove a panel select the panel and click Remove Panel To modify a panel select the panel and click Modify Panel Exit Console Type Dream y prm Panel 1 ChanSelectPanel Panel 2 EditorPanel Panel 22 FaderPanel Panel 23 FaderPanel Panel 24 FaderPanel Panel 25 FaderPanel Panel Central amp sgnPanelL eft Panel 8 Central amp sgnPanelRight Add Panel pa ae Panel 3 Delete Panel Conce Remove All X Figure 6 ConsCon Window CONSOLE INSTALLATION 39 14 Sidecar Calibration Follow the procedures in Console Calibration on page 39 4 above to calibrate touch sensors on the fader panels and the joystick TROUBLE SHOOTING The disk recorder application does not start The QDC engine displays the following error message Cannot establish a reliable connection to 1 1 1 11 Solution 1 Check the ethernet network connection between the console and engine 2 Refer to QDC Network Setup on page 38 7 and follow the instructions for configuring the network setup 3 Refer to Automatic Start up on page 39 6 and follow the instructions for con figuring the network setup TROUBLE SHOOTING 40 1 NOTES 40 2 Chapter 40 Specifications AUDIO I O CONFIGURATION The QDC engine can be configured for a range of different I O o
326. r These pan parameters offer unique and flexible pan ning controls to multichannel link groups See The Surround Panner on page 8 7 for a complete description of these functions When a link group is assigned to a stereo auxiliary bus the master aux send pan control is centred and the member s send pan controls adopt default pans as described above 4 When the group is created the parameter pad controls adopt the position of the first feed in the group When the control is adjusted the controls of the mem bers are offset by the amount the master control is moved When a soft key is pressed the members parameters are all set to the value displayed To get access to the individual parameter settings the group must be unfolded or its member individually selected as described below 5 The MUTE and SOLO keys on the Master Fader section indicate the mute and solo status of all the members The MUTE or SOLO keys are illuminated if all members are currently muted or soloed The MUTE or SOLO keys will flash if all members are not in the same state Press the MUTE or SOLO key to mute or solo all members of the link group If the keys are flashing a single press will unmute or unsolo double pressing either key will mute or solo all members 6 The AUTO key on the Master Fader section enables automation recording for the link group master which will control all the members Creating a Link Group Group Key Figure 1 The Group Key Li
327. r Enables Parameters must be enabled before any automation data can be recorded No pa rameter can be written unless it is enabled This applies to all modes of automation record Parameters can be enabled by pressing the Enable key in the automation sec tion and pressing one or more of the soft key LCD menu items The menu allows whole groups of parameters to be enabled independently including all faders mutes pans EQ dynamics and auxiliaries Hold down the BLUE key and press the Enable All key to enable all parameters at once If any group of parameters is enabled the Enable All key will flash to indicate that some but not all parameters are currently enabled Hold down the BLUE key and press the Enable All key to clear any parameter enables Automation record can be limited to a single parameter by using Touch Write as described below Parameter enables apply only to recording mix data and have no effect on read All mix moves will play back regardless of the parameter enable settings AUTOMATION Level Level Pan Pan PRE POST PRE POST PRE POST PRE POST IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT s JN J CEE Cu OO CH CD Coe All Faders j All Mutes L R Pan Rotate EQ Level EQ IN OUT Compressor Lim Exp a Gain T
328. r an overview of link groups Link groups should be established before any automation is written If members are added to a group when automation data is present on either the master or the mem bers the data on the members is erased If the link group is destroyed or unlinked after automation is recorded for the group the automation data remains on the group master but not the slaves Only the parameters on the link group master can be automated the slave member s parameters follow the master The slaves fader levels always match the level of the master Other slave member s parameters are isolated and can not be individually automated but can be manually controlled and their relative offset to the master ad justed DATA STORAGE AUTOMATION All the mix data of the current mix is stored in system memory This data must be explicitly saved to disk as a named mix If a new project is loaded the previous mix data is retained in memory and may be saved as a mix in the new project The following diagram represents the data objects that are stored in each DREAM project which is stored on hard disk in an MT file Each project contains all the au dio recorded and the clips which represent the audio edits made in the project This data is written to disk automatically Each project also contains a static snapshot of all the mixer setting including the fader sets The project also contains all the man ually saved mixes each of which contain a sn
329. r narrow use only If the Engine is configured for narrow use all de vices are addressed in narrow mode only 38 10 Configuring The Engine For Narrow Use Step 1 Connect disk drives to external SCSI bus port Step 2 Power on the disk drives and Engine Step 3 When the BIOS screen appears press the Space Bar before the Press Key To Display Boot Menu countdown ends Step 4 Under Booting Procedure press RC and press Enter Step 5 A message should appear next on screen asking Do you want to use the recommended NVRAM Configuration Press N Step 6 Press C then Enter to Reconfigure The System Setup Step 7 Press Enter until the cursor has moved down to the 11th line Slot 1 SCSI Wide At this point you will need to know which PCI slot the SCSI controller card has been fitted in Looking at the Engine from the rear will show which slot the card is in Slot 1 is the top most slot e Slot 2 is the middle slot e Slot 3 is the bottom slot Step 8 Use the Enter key on the console keyboard to move down the list to the correct slot Step 9 Next press 0 on the console keyboard to change from Wide to Narrow use Step 10 Then press Enter until the following message appears on screen NVRAM Configuration is complete System will now restart Press Enter on the console keyboard The configuration is now complete Mixing Wide And Narrow Disk Drives Wide and narrow based disk drives can be mixed on the same SCSI bus at
330. r specifying studio cabling installations Connector sex described is the panel mount connector on the rear of the QDC engine General Purpose Interface Description Remote tally and ADR signalling interface Connector 37 Pin D Male Input TTL Level CMOS Logic Hi Z Output TTL Level CMOS Logic Hi source 15mA max Lo sink 48mA max PIN 1 GND PIN 19 GND PIN 2 GPIOBOUTG PIN 20 GPIOBOOUT7 PIN 3 GPIOBOUT5 PIN 21 GND PIN 4 GND PIN 22 GPIOBOUT4 PIN 5 GPIOBOUT2 PIN 23 GPIOBOUT3 PIN 6 GPIOBOUTI PIN 24 GND PIN 7 GND PIN 25 GPIOBOUTO PIN 8 GPIOING PIN 26 GPIOIN7 PIN 9 GPIOIN5 PIN 27 GND PIN10 GND PIN 28 GPIOIN4 PIN 11 GPIOIN2 PIN 29 GPIOIN3 PIN 12 GPIOINI PIN30 GND PIN 13 GND PIN31 GPIOINO PIN 14 GPIOOUT6 PIN 32 GPIOOUT7 PIN 15 GPIOOUTS PIN 33 GND PIN 16 GND PIN 34 GPIOOUTA PIN 17 GPIOOUT2 PIN 35 GPIOOUT3 PIN 18 GPIOOUTI PIN 36 GND PIN 37 GPIOOUTO QDC WIRING AND CONNECTION DETAILS 40 17 Mixer Description Control Interface for Fame and Prodigy systems Connector 25 pin D Female PIN 1 GND PIN 13 SYNCN PIN 2 RxFEN PIN 14 RxFFP PIN 3 RxCLKN PIN 15 RxCLKP PIN 4 RxDATN PIN 16 RxDATP PIN 5 RxWRN PIN 17 RxWRP PIN 6 NC PIN 18 NC PIN 7 NC PIN 19 GND PIN 8 TxFFN PIN 20 TxFFP PIN 9 TxCLKN PIN 21 TXxCLKP PIN 10 TxDATN P
331. rce selection as described below Press the Main key again to de se lect the Main bus as the destination before selecting a Sub bus as a new destination for bus assignment Assigning Sub Buses to the Main Bus If the Main Bus has been selected Sub Buses may be routed to it Bus elements in the Sub Bus are routed directly to the corresponding elements in the Main Bus It is possible to assign a Sub Bus of a lower format to a Main Bus of a higher format e g stereo Sub Bus routed to a 5 1 Main Bus In this case only the bus elements present in the Sub Bus are connected to their corresponding elements in the Main Bus i e Sub Bus left to Main Bus left Sub Bus right to Main Bus right If the Sub Bus has a higher format than the Main Bus e g 5 1 Sub Bus routed to a stereo Main Bus bus reduction or down mixing automatically occurs Bus to bus assignments use the same procedure as feed to bus assignments Step 1 Press the Bus Assign key Step 2 Press the Main bus selection key to select the Main Bus as the destination Step 3 Press a Sub bus key to route that bus to the Main bus Press the All Subs soft key to assign all Sub Buses to the Main Bus Step 4 To complete the assignment process press the Bus Assign key to return to the previous state or select any other mode To create a sub bus output at a different level from that going to the Main bus cre ate a Direct Output for the sub bus and offsetting its level using the Gain co
332. re is a delay in the reaction time of the track keys to allow for the pos sibility of double clicking Change this setting to off in order to remove this delay useful when using the track keys to put individual tracks into record When it is off double clicking does not work FadeDefault 72 Every clip is played with a fade at both ends unless it is butted up to another clip even when you do not specify one The value here is used every time the system pow ers up you may change it temporarily while the system is running The number is set in time units which are equivalent to sample periods at 48 kHz A table shows you the equivalents in subframes at various frame rates THE MDR CONFIGURATION FILE SYSTEM FILES e DitherOutput 24 This allows you to set the dithering of the digital and analog outputs In most cases this should be left at 24 but if you are outputting to a digital system where only 16 or 20 bits are going to be used you should set the dither accordingly DefaultInputType 1 This will set the input type for newly created Projects immediately upon power up Once a Project has been loaded or created all new Projects created after it will in herit the patching and input type from it The numbers of the different input types can be seen in the file you are editing Note that the mixer also has a default input type and that each Title will overwrite the settings of the inputs to match their state whe
333. ress the PUBLISH soft key Use the jogger wheel or and keys to select a Project Wav file or directory Press Enter The top of the video screen displays the various fields stored in the database INTRODUCTION Clip Name Category Sample Rate Stereo Mono Duration Source Project Description Project Availability User Fields Figure 2 AudioBase Clip Data All the clips will be added to the database but no waveforms are copied For the clip to be used the Project containing that clip must be present on the system The ad ditional description and user field can be added later as described below in Main taining a Database on page 28 7 SEARCHING FOR SOUNDS AudioBase can use various search criteria to filter the fields of the database to find clips The Search Options determine how the database will be searched Step 1 Press the AudioBase key Step 2 Press the SEARCH soft key Step 4 Press the MATCH and FIELDS soft keys repetitively to scroll through the options described below MATCH This specifies how your search text is matched to the fields in the data base This parameter affects all the fields being searched WHOLE Your search text must match all the text in a database field PART Your search text only has to match any part of a database field START Your search text only has to match the start of a database field FIELDS This specifies if all the fields you search have to match or if only one or more field
334. reviously recorded mix Step 1 Press the Mix ON key to enable automation Step 2 Press the Enable key to enter the Enable menu Press the Fader soft key to enable recording fader mix data only on the selected paths Step 3 Press the Mix key to display the Mix menu Step 4 Press the feed selection keys of the feeds you wish to adjust or press the soft switch keys next to the faders Step 5 Press the Write Trim key to select Trim Step 6 Press the Multi Trim key to enter Multi Trim mode Step 7 Press the Rel soft key in the Multi Trim menu to enter relative mode TRIMMING A MIX WITH MULTI TRIM 25 19 Step 8 Make sure that no feeds or buses are selected on the selection panel and move the Master Fader to the OdB mark Step 9 Press the feed selection keys of the feeds you wish to adjust to place them under control of the Multi Trim master Step 10 Move the transport to a location prior to the section you wish to adjust and press PLAY Step 11 Press the In key to drop in to automation Trim on the selected feeds Step 12 Move the Master Fader to adjust the level of the selected feeds Step 13 Press the Out key to stop recording automation data and drop the selected feeds back in to Read Step 14 Press the Multi Trim key to leave Multi Trim mode AUTOMATION WITH LINK GROUPS Link groups are useful for dealing with groups of feeds carrying audio in a multi channel format such as stereo or 5 1 See Grouping on page 11 2 fo
335. ription b lt cmdline gt Run lt cmdline gt when FMC exits lt cmdline gt may include a path E g the following will run dream start note spaces are accepted bc projects mixers dream start C Run MSAT on the same machine as FMC ignoring the p set ting 35 16 Option Description d Run without dsp i e mix surface does not use TCP IP to communicate with the QDC engine e Run without editor emulator inhibits editor and keyboard comms to the QDC engine g Run without graphics h Hi res mode 1600 x 1200 otherwise runs 1280 x 1024 l Lo res mode 1024 x 768 m Enable mix automation D lt HHH HHEH BEES Specify the IP address for a network connected machine run ning MSAT for testing O lt H HTH HHEH BEES Specify the IP address for the QDC engine E Run jog and editor commands over TCP IP s lt gt Specify mixer type where 0 for satellite 1 for station 2 for console 3 for station24 u Disables stop on wrong USB driver message FMC will still check the drivers still report out of date drivers and will still say that it can t continue but it will continue anyway A typical command line would be C projects mixers fmce fmc exe s1 q192 168 200 21 bc projects mixers dream start BLUE Utils Menu The BLUE Utils menu offers the Update Sys File item for storage of system settings System Fi
336. ropping out of WRITE mode when locking to an external video transport Edit the following line in System_Variables txt TC LOCK WINDOW 10 Change the number at the end of the line to specify the number of frames This number will also determine the amount of pre roll required prior to performing an automation mix pass Typical values are TC LOCK WINDOW 1 for Vmotion TC LOCK WINDOW 5 for Betacam TC_LOCK_WINDOW 10 for U matic Setting Momentary Talkback Time Threshold The Momentary Talkback Time Threshold defines the amount of time the talkback key must be held down to prevent the switch from latching The default value is 500 milliseconds WORKING WITH CONSOLE SYSTEM FILES 35 15 SYSTEM FILES Edit the following line in System_ Variables txt Change the numerical value at the end of the line to specify the time threshold in milliseconds MOMENTARY TB TIME THRESHOLD 500 Enabling AFL and PFL Modes AFL and PFL solo modes require two of the available buses Disable AFL and PFL to free these buses Edit the following line in System Variables txt Change the numerical value at the end of the line to 1 for enabled or 0 to disable AFL PFL ENABLED I1 Metering Numeric Peak Level The numeric peak levels displayed on the mixer display bus meters have a variable threshold The level at which these values are displayed can be set in the System Variables txt file Edit the following line in the file PEAK DISPLAY L
337. rsor This will be the head of the clip unless a sync point has been set using the TRIM function on the Binnacle All clips imported using AudioBase are borrowed To keep the clips use the KEEP ALL BORROWED function in the Space Menu PLACING SOUNDS IN A PROJECT MAINTAINING A DATABASE The Name Category Description and User fields can be edited to add additional clip information The following fields can be edited AUDIOBASE Step 1 Use the AudioBase search functions to highlight the required clip record Step 2 Press the EDIT soft key Step 3 Press the Prev and Next keys to highlight a field you wish to edit Step 4 Type the text you wish to enter Step 5 Press lt Enter gt NOTES It is also possible to simultaneously change the selected field for all the clips listed VA from a search To do this edit the desired field as described above except hold down the BLUE key when you press Enter The SWAP soft key toggles the contents of the selected field between what you have just typed and the previous contents It is possible to import and export AudioBase data with a PC database See later in this Chapter for details Deleting Records To delete records from the database follow the steps below Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 O OKAY L LIST A ALL C CANCEL Use the AudioBase search functions to display the required clip record s Press the EDIT soft key Press the DELETE so
338. s Press PLAY to play from the new location with pre roll INTRODUCTION TIMECODE CALCULATOR Go To Figure 2 Numeric Keys and GOTO Menu The GOTO menu provides access to a flexible timecode calculator The LCD dis plays the current timecode location above the numeric register display Numbers are entered into the numeric register by typing on the numeric keypad or by capturing the current timecode location using the down arrow key above the GOTO key There are actually two registers The displayed register containing the most recently en tered value and another hidden register containing the previously entered value Op erations are performed on the values contained in these two registers Follow these steps to jump to a location 30 seconds ahead of the current location Step 1 Press the GOTO key Step 2 Press the down arrow to capture the current location and load it into the numeric register Step 3 Type 30 then press the 00 key Step 4 Press the key Step 5 Press Enter to move the transport to the new location Subframe display and calculation may be turned on or off by holding down a BLUE key and pressing the Subf key on the numeric keypad There are 80 SMPTE sub frames per frame Pressing the key when no values are entered into the numeric registers increments the displayed register by one frame or one subframe Turning the jog wheel clockwise performs the same function as the key Turning the jog wheel anti
339. s Press the Fold key next to the Master Fader The bus elements are now represented by the Speaker Mute keys Press the CALL key then press a Speaker Mute key to call an indi vidual element to the Master Fader Bus elements may be called and their parameters or faders adjusted in turn Press the Fold key again to re group the elements and return the Speaker Mute keys to their normal function BUSES If the optional Station Sidecar is available individual bus elements are unfolded to the first eight faders See Sidecar Operation on page 13 2 for more details on Sidecar operation GROUPING 11 10 BUSES 12 1 NOTES Chapter 12 Library INTRODUCTION The Library menu provides storage for Equaliser Dynamics Channel presets or complete Console snap shots Up to 100 of each type of preset can be stored These presets can be recalled and applied to any signal path in any project Edit Target Library Key Figure 1 Automation Keys To access the Library menu press the Lib key Select the preset type by pressing the EQ DYN CH or ALL CONSOLE soft key Select the library function by pressing the Save Load or Delete keys The presets and functions are described below PRESETS Equaliser A library of 100 equaliser settings is provided Each equaliser preset stores all the pa rameter settings of the equaliser section on the signal path currently called to the Master fader Press the EQ soft key in the Li
340. s have to match ALL All the selected fields must match ANY Clips are returned if any of the fields match AUDIOBASE 28 4 To start using AudioBase set the MATCH parameter to PART and the FIELDS parameter to ALL Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Press the AudioBase key Press the SEARCH soft key Press the Prev F8 on the keyboard and Next F9 on the key board to highlight a field you wish to search 9 to 15 provide AudioBase functions Selected fields are highlighted in blue Enter your search text Press the CLEAR key to clear text from the field If the field is left cleared it will not be included in the search To add more fields to your search repeat steps 3 and 4 Oth erwise press Enter to start the search Additional search conditions can be added to the text These are described on the following page Additional Search Conditions Additional search parameters can be added to field searches in a similar manner to the GO TO CLIP NAME function Additional sorting criteria are provided by pressing the relevant key on the key board These are as follows ANY ANY ONE ONE OR NONE AND amp OR This places an asterix in the search text The asterix can be replaced by any number of characters For example typing squeak would enable the listing of mouse squeak and door squeak This places an equals sign in the search text to replace any one character Thi
341. s places a question mark in the search text to replace any one character or no character An ampersand amp is placed in the search text to add another name Only clips with names containing both search names will be listed For example typing door amp squeak would list only the clips with names including both door and squeak This will list door squeak but not mouse squeak or door slam A bar is placed in the search text to add another name Clips with names containing either search string will be listed For example typing door slam will list clips with names containing door as well as clips with names containing slam This will list door squeak and door slam but not mouse squeak SEARCHING FOR SOUNDS 28 5 AUDIOBASE NOT A tilde is placed in the search text to add another name This will exclude the specified text For example typing door amp squeak would list the clips with names including door except those also containing squeak This will list door slam but not door squeak Searching the Current Project AudioBase can be switched to search the currently open Project instead of the clip database It does not matter whether it has been published or not To enter Project mode hold down the Shift key on the keyboard and press the SEARCH soft key Once in Project mode AudioBase will stay there until you repeat lt Shift SEARCH soft key gt The AudioBase Menu and the Search submenu change to show
342. s replace the current monitor source with a the stereo solo bus whenever a feed is soloed All soloed feeds are routed to the solo bus Soloed link groups are automatically downmixed to allow all their members to monitored in the stereo monitor bus normal monitor down mixing occurs between the monitor bus and the selected speaker set The AFL solo signal is derived after the feed fader and mute PFL solo is derived be fore the feed fader and mute Hold down a BLUE key and press the Utils key to enter the Utils menu Press the Solo soft key to select the solo system to be used Soloed feeds are shown with a green indicator on the mixer video display See Solo on page 7 3 for more details on the mixer solo system Solo Clear To clear all currently soloed paths hold down the BLUE key and press SOLO press BLUE SOLO again to restore the soloed channels SAVING MONITOR SETUPS 6 9 SIP Defeat Hold down the BLUE key and press the MUTE key next to the Master Fader or on a Sidecar to prevent the selected feed from being muted when other feeds are put into SIP This feature is useful for keeping reverb returns live when channels feeding them are soloed SIP Defeat feeds are shown with a grey solo indicator on the mixer video display SIP Defeat is sometimes referred to as Solo Safe Disk Recorder Solo The disk recorder solo system allows an selection of track to be soloed For details of the disk recorder solo and mute functions
343. s the MOVE soft key Select the destination Press the OKAY soft key Multiple files may also be moved in batches see Copying and Moving on page 34 5 for more details You will be prompted to confirm the move process if it is across different devices In this case the move process may take a few minutes depending on the size of the Project Renaming Projects and Folders Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Press the Proj key Press the NEXT soft key Select the Project or folder you wish to rename Press the RENAME soft key Type the new name Press Enter FILES AND FOLDERS 3 7 Deleting Projects or Folders Step 1 Press the Proj key Step 2 Select the Project or folder you wish to delete Step 3 Press the DELETE soft key Step 4 Press the Y or Enter key to confirm the delete when prompted Other feature of the Project Menu are described in Project Management on page 26 2 VA NOTES A folder containing other folders is shown with a sign Locked files have an L indication This usually means that another user has the file open There is no way to open a file other than by pressing the Enter key Names for Folders and Projects should contain no more than 18 characters only the following characters A Z a z 0 9 _ underscore can be used Although Station will allow entry of some other characters you are advised NOT to use them as they may cause problems in exchange wi
344. shelving high pass or low pass Press the SETUP key again to return to the default state in which the soft key to the left of each band is used to switch the band IN or OUT of circuit The rotary control at the left of each section controls the gain of shelving filters with a range of 18dB The rotary control at the bottom left controls the gain make up for the entire EQ section with a range of 18dB The soft key at the bottom right bypasses the entire equaliser EQUALISER 8 7 THE SURROUND PANNER The Parameter Pad provides controls for a comprehensive surround panning sys tem The panner automatically configures itself for control of signals within all the supported surround formats In addition to simple two dimensional panning of a mono signal the surround panner provides advanced control of multichannel signal paths in contained in link groups Mix Parameters Figure 4 The Surround Panner The supported surround formats are Stereo LCRS LCRSS 5 1 6 1 and 7 1 For mono signal paths the pan control is a simple panner moving the signal left to right and front to back around the surround field with the addition of divergence control to increase the size of the sound field For link groups the pan control pans all members of the link group at once and adds spread and rotate functions which can imitate the effect of a camera pan with the entire surround sound field or collapse the entire sound field into a
345. signed your track feeds to Step 3 Ensure that the bus master fader is up by checking the screen dis play If the fader level is down press the CALL button and then press the bus selection key to call the bus to the Master Fader Auto Extend Punch I The Auto Extend feature allows the DREAM system to support projects of any size up to the maximum capacity of the disk drive It is possible while recording to reach the limit of the single project file size which is 4 Gigabytes approximately 12 track hours of 16 bit audio If this happens while the transport is actually in record the Station will automati cally create a new Project and continue recording This can only happen if there is additional free space on the SAME DISK DRIVE on which the system is currently recording At the point where the Project is extended there will be a split in the clips that were currently recording The new Project borrows audio from the earlier Project in a read only operation which means that Tape Mode and Overwrite mode cannot replace that audio by re cording Also no operation in the Space Menu which is used to free disk space will operate on the borrowed audio For more information about borrowing please see the Importing Clips on page 29 2 AutoExtend may be turned off using the mouse on the System Page BLUE S see The System Page on page 35 9 for more details n Punch Out It is possible to enter record while playing bac
346. sing either Jump key will locate the transport to the start or end of the Range TRACKS amp TRANSPORT PLAY MENU The Play Menu enables soft key selection of various transport selections Step 1 Step 2 Press the Play Menu transport key Press the desired soft key function All the Play Menu functions preroll the transport HEAD TAIL EDIT FADE AGAIN RECORD MENU Plays the head of the clip under the cursor If there is no clip under the cursor the next clip is played Plays the tail of the clip under the cursor If there is no clip under the cursor the next clip is played Plays the last edit Plays the fade out Plays from the same place the transport last went into play All the Record Menu functions preroll the transport Step 1 Step 2 HEAD CLIP AGAIN Press the REC Key Press the desired soft key function Records from the head of the clip under the cursor and con tinues until stopped Records from the head of the clip under the cursor and stops at the tail Records at the current cursor location If a Preroll is active the transport will locate to and play from the Preroll point then drop into record at the point which the HERE soft key was pressed Records the same as the last record command For details on setting pre roll and post roll see Setting Preroll and Postroll on page 24 3 PLAY MENU 5 1 NOTES 5 2 Chapter 5 Patching and Routing INTROD
347. sing the same method Change the On STOP setting to On STOP Return this returns the parameter to the previously recorded value when the STOP key is pressed If new moves are recorded over previously recorded data the new moves replace the old moves Use On STOP Hold to overwrite all subsequent events for the parameter maintaining the same value to the end of the project You can use the AUTO key to drop in and out of record over old mix data Enable Pan Mute or any other parameter and use the AUTO key to enter record for these parameters as well CHANGING A MIX WITH TOUCH WRITE Touch write offers an alternative way to modify existing mix data and simplifies the AUTOMATION process of arming the mixer to record automation Because touch write makes it easy to make mistakes and overwrite existing data the following safety features are avail able 1 Only enabled parameters can ever be written 2 In touch mode the mixer senses which control you have touched and arms only that single parameter 3 By default only paths that are in the Mix mask are enabled for Touch Write However the Touch Auto Enable feature allows this safety feature to be over rid den Setting Touch Auto Enable to ON allows any enabled parameter on any path to enter Write or Trim when touched Step 1 Step 2 Press the Mix ON key to enable mix automation Press the Enable key to enter the Enable menu Press the Fader soft key to enable recording
348. single point Link groups can be created with default pan settings for each member see Link Group Format on page 11 2 The surround panner provides automated control of a level control matrix between the feeds and the individual bus elements of the buses to which the feed is currently assigned Using the Panner PARAMETER PAD Step 1 Call a signal path to the Parameter Pad by pressing the CALL but ton then pressing a feed selection key Or use Call Follow as described in Call Follow on page 8 2 above The signal path must be assigned to a bus for the panner to have any effect 8 8 Step 2 Press the Pan button at the bottom of the Parameter Pad to enable the pan controls Step 3 Adjust the controls to achieve the desired result See the details of each control below LR and FB Pan Controls The left right and front back pan controls provide a linear control of the perceived source location of the signal The LR control range displays 100 left to 100 right with 0 being centre actual display values L100 L1 CNTR R1 R100 The FB control range displays 10096 front to 10096 back with 096 being centre actual display values F100 F1 CNTR B1 B100 When a link group is created the master pan control for the group defaults to a cen tre position Trackball The track ball can be used to control the left to right and front to back pan position Press the Pan key below the track ball to use it as a two dimension
349. so appear in the monitoring format are passed through to their respective loudspeakers unmodified For example when monitoring a stereo bus through a 5 1 speaker system the left and right bus ele ments appear in the left and right speakers and the centre and surround speakers are ignored The exception to this where the source format contains a centre or centre surround element and the target format does not In these cases the centre channel is distributed between left and right elements Bass Management The default monitor matrix eliminates the boom or LFE channel when downmixing to a format that does not include a boom channel If it is desired to add the boom signal into the front monitors this may be done by adding the appropriate entries to the monitor matrix file as described below Editing the Monitor Matrix File The monitor matrix data is contained in a readable text file on the StationDREAM Console console computer The file specifies both downmix and upmix combina tions This file can be opened and edited to conform to your specific monitoring requirements The file is laid out as a comma delimited table Each downmix entry begins with a description prefixed with a e g Stereo to Mono Each subsequent row describes a node in the matrix and has the following elements WORKING WITH CONSOLE SYSTEM FILES 35 13 SYSTEM FILES SET_NODE command source format e g Stereo destination format e g Mono source element e g
350. soft key Step 5 Press the Multi Trim key to return to the previous mode or press another key to continue mixing or editing Multi Trim can be used in conjunction with the automation record modes in the following ways ABS WRITE With Multi Trim in absolute mode and automation in Write mode Multi Trim is useful for establishing static presets of fader levels and other parameters across a range of feeds ABS TRIM With Multi Trim in absolute mode and automation in Trim mode the members of the Multi Trim Group will all move to the level of the virtual master Depending on the initial position of each member control this will cause the automation values to be trimmed or offset by differing amounts This may cause unpredictable results and it is therefore NOT advised to use this combination REL WRITE With Multi Trim in relative mode and automation in Write mode Multi Trim is useful for reducing the level across an established static mix or for performing fades on a static mix REL TRIM Multi Trim in relative mode with automation in Trim mode is the most useful com bination This combination allows the level of an existing dynamic mix to be trimmed across a whole section of the mix Changes in the virtual Multi Trim mas ter apply relative offsets to all the members while retaining the dynamic changes in the existing mix automation TRIMMING A MIX WITH MULTI TRIM Follow these steps to change the level of a section of a p
351. soloed feeds leaving the soloed feeds feeding the bus being monitored at the normal level set by their faders SIP supports mon itoring in any format determined by the current monitor source AFL and PEL modes replace the current monitor source with the stereo solo bus whenever a feed is soloed All soloed feeds are routed to the solo bus Soloed link groups are automatically upmixed or downmixed to allow all their members to monitored in the stereo monitor bus normal monitor upmixing or downmixing oc curs between the monitor bus and the selected speaker set The AFL solo signal is derived after the feed fader and mute PEL solo is derived be fore the feed fader and mute To set the solo mode Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Utils key to enter the Utils menu Step 2 Press the Solo soft key to select the solo mode to be used Soloed feeds are shown with a green indicator on the mixer video display 7 4 Solo Clear To clear all currently soloed paths hold down the BLUE key and press SOLO press BLUE SOLO again to restore the soloed channels Solo Contrast When a feed is soloed in SIP mode all other feeds are reduced in level by the amount set in the Utils menu To adjust the solo contrast Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Utils key Step 2 Press the Solo soft key and turn the jog wheel to set the gain reduction level The range is 0 to 100dB 100dB is off SIP Defeat Hold down the BLUE key a
352. speed and the disk recorder must move at the same speed to remain in sync This translates into producing the correct number of samples every second which is called the Master Clock rate This can be locked to a Digital Word Clock a video signal an AES EBU signal by the internal crystal a timecode source or a digital audio source which is being recorded If the Position Reference and Motion References are not the same it is possible that they will drift apart over time This will be shown by a warning at the top of the Station s video screen which indicates when an inconsistent timecode frame was en countered How Station Synchronises Station goes through a number of steps in achieving synchronization in play mode 1 Read the position reference and start loading up the corresponding audio on all active tracks 2 When ready start playing but with the outputs muted Use variable speed to reduce the error between the Station position and the Position Reference until it is very small 3 Switch to the Motion Reference for continued playback The system is said to be locked once this switch is made and the audio is unmuted 4 Warn of error status if the sync error increases if a reference signal is lost etc Digital Synchronization Conflicts TIMECODE SETUP When you are recording a digital source it must be synchronised to the same Master Clock Reference as the Station or an overflow too many samples or underflow too
353. splay Additional logical sorting criteria are provided by the soft keys These are as follows ANY ANY 1 1 OR NONE OR AND This places an asterix in the search text The asterix can be replaced by any number of characters For example typing squeak would enable the listing of mouse squeak and door squeak This places an equals sign in the search text to replace any one character This places a question mark in the search text to replace any one character or no character A bar is placed in the search text to add another name Clips with names containing either search string will be listed For example typing door s1am will list clips with names containing door as well as clips with names containing slam This will list door squeak and door slam but not mouse squeak An ampersand amp is placed in the search text to add another name Only clips with names containing both search names will be listed For example typing door amp squeak would list only the clips with names including both door and squeak This will list door squeak but not mouse squeak or door slam 23 6 ALPHANUMERIC SORTING 24 1 NOTES 24 2 Chapter 24 ADR GPI Loop INTRODUCTION Station provides the ability to automate recording using In and Out points with a simple interface The ADR menu includes functions for setting pre and post roll and features for automatic dialogue replacem
354. sport is in Record Warning lights tallies indicator lights for artists GPO remains ON whenever the transport is inside the ADR Menu Record Range If Command is chosen the GPO turns on only when the transport is in Record Only available if T imecode is set Sets the length of time the GPO remains ON May be set to a number of milliseconds or set to HELD where the GPO stays on until the transport stops Fires a GPO immediately for testing purposes If pulse is set to held the GPO switches on and off as the key is pressed and released GPO remains on while the transport is Prerolling Indicator lights for artists GPO remains ON whenever the transport is inside the ADR Menu Record Range If Command is chosen the GPO turns on only when the transport is in Record Only available if T imecode is set Sets the length of time the GPO remains ON May be set to a number of milliseconds or set to HELD where the GPO stays on until the transport stops Fires a GPO immediately for testing purposes If pulse is set to held the GPO switches on and off as the key is pressed and released 24 6 Type POSTROLL Description GPO remains on while the transport is Postrolling Examples Indicator lights for artists Timecode GPO remains ON whenever the transport is inside the ADR Menu Record Range If Command is chosen the GPO turns on only when the transport is in Record Pulse Only available if Timecode is set Sets the leng
355. ssions Attribute d s pe pw pr e w r turns attribute on n turns attribute off Options a do not print attributes after changes X directory to search is execution directory z get list of file names from standard input z path get list of file names from path CHD Function Change current directory Syntax chd path COPY Function Copy data from one path to another Syntax copy opts srcpath lt dstpath gt lt opts gt Options a abort on error b size buffer size rewrite destination files with no write permission p dont print file names copied with w option only r rewrite destination v verify integrity of files written w dir name wild card copy to dir name x look in execution directory for source z get list of file names from standard input z path get list of file names from path SYSTEM FILES 35 18 DATE Function Display system date and time Syntax date lt opts gt Options 3 print day seconds past midnight in julian time m print hour minute sec in military format Dcheck Function Check directory file integrity Syntax dcheck opts lt devnam gt Options d lt num gt print path to dir lt num gt deep r rebuild allocation map from file structure y answer y to all questions in repair mode DEL Function Delete files Syntax del opts lt file gt lt opts gt Options e erases the disk space th
356. sword Protection 26 2 Patch Inputs 28222 a RERO ee 5 4 9 4 Datchilg AA uos Hen ei none 5 2 Patching External Monitor Sources 6 4 Patching Monitor Outputs 6 3 Patching Outputs 324000 dato 5 10 Paisa da 33 2 Pause Break Ke s 35 11 Peak Hold ius accetto ck 14 2 Peak ResBbs cud as pU sued 14 2 PERS edet to heat 6 8 Phases iaa er MI 5 5 9 5 Phase Revetsal x es REIS 6 7 Prices essen 20 2 20 5 PEAY GPD Esel il ud 24 7 Play Menu usos dod sie tes 4 12 Playback ADR ud ce esee 24 2 PlayInhibitThreshold 35 7 POP ssa esce tea UNS Sede 20 3 22 3 Postroll teste ad oed eR EDS EAE S 24 3 Postroll GPI cua 24 6 PEN SQ als eng de ns laa 14 2 Pre Fader Listen eei e Ea 6 8 A Seren 24 7 PreRoll 152 tr doe bar 31 2 Breroll oss dece eee ee IDEAS 24 3 Preroll GPI ooo ana 24 5 INDEX Index vi Presets yia a a eu 12 2 PRIME 4 2422 Haus datas 25 12 RINE 5 4010 heat 25 6 Printer nes 235 Bie Sw 40 22 Projects Sid 3 2 Publisher 2 an 28 2 Publish to AudioBase Wave Export 29 10 BUNG Pas uae SANGO a 25 6 25 7 Panel ais 9 9 Q E mares dh 8 5 18 3 R RAN GO cach aster Ae o E SATA 4 10 10 4 Modes Ama C Ea e suche 4 11 Range Mendo dido E 4 10 Setup ar bred 30 3 Bates A N 9 2 30 4 Ratio siue realer 8 11 Razor On 2 2 10 10 RBE Susanne 36 2 Read Indicator 7 6 13 5 Rear Panel Connections 38 4 Rec Out ADR 24 3 Record ADR 425 seven 24
357. system will warn you that the output is used by another signal path Press a track key to add it to the outputs for the direct out To advance to the next bus or link group element press the Next soft key or press another speaker mute key to select that bus ele ment out of sequence Press the Direct key to return to the previous mode or select another bus to patch by pressing a bus selection key For a signal path with ports established for Direct Output the Direct ON OFF soft key is used to turn the direct output on and off Direct Out Pre Post The direct output signal can be derived before or after the feed bus fader Press the Pre Post soft key to toggle the direct output Direct Out Gain The direct output signal can have gain or attenuation applied prior to the output If all the outputs of the selected bus or link group elements have the same gain value that value is shown in the LCD below the Gain soft key as an absolute value ABS otherwise this field has the value 0 dB and is displayed as a relative value REL ABS represents the absolute value of all Outputs REL represents a trim or offset applied to all Outputs To alter the direct out level of a single member of a link group individually select the member by holding down the BLUE key and pressing the selection key Monitor Outputs Patching monitor outputs is covered in Patching Control Room Monitor Out puts on page 6 3 CONFIGURING BUS FORMATS The Main
358. t bus or link group element press the Next soft key or press another speaker mute key to select that bus ele ment out of sequence Press the Insert key to return to the previous mode or select another path to patch by pressing a track or bus selection key Inserts may be switched in and out of circuit by pressing the ON OFF soft key Patching Direct Outputs Any feed or bus may be sent to a Direct Output Direct Outputs may have one or more physical outputs To select physical outputs for Direct Outputs Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Direct key to enter the Direct Outputs menu Select a feed or link group by pressing a track key or select the Main Bus or a Sub Bus by pressing a bus selection key Select an Aux Bus by holding down the BLUE key and pressing an Aux Bus selection key Press the Patch soft key in the LCD menu Use the ANALOG DIGITAL and AES MADI soft keys to choose the desired type of output The track feed keys may now be used to select outputs for the Direct Out Outputs of the selected type Analog AES MADI currently patched to the selected feed or bus element are brightly lit PATCHING OUTPUTS PATCHING AND ROUTING Step 5 Step 6 OR Outputs of the selected type Analog AES MADI currently patched to other sources flash off to dim Outputs of the selected type Analog AES MADI currently avail able are dimly lit Outputs of the selected type Analog AES
359. tandard or to match the format of the video material or project currently being worked on Step 1 Press the Setup key Step 2 Press the TC FORMAT soft key RECORDING Step 3 Step 4 9 4 Turn the jogger wheel to select the desired timecode format Select Non Drop or Drop Frame if applicable Press Enter VA NOTE 1 The sample rate is also fixed if an import from another Project is performed Refer to Import Export on page 29 2 2 The sample rate and frame rate jogger wheel selection can also be performed using the and keys on the numeric keypad or the numeric keys 0 to 4 PATCHING INPUTS TO TRACK FEEDS Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 First enter the Patch I O Menu by pressing the Patch I O key Select the feed to be patched to by using the Track Feed keys at the top of the Station or you can use the Track keys already selected Press the Patch soft key The Track Feed keys now show all the physical inputs Press the ANALOG DIGITAL and AES MADI soft keys in the LCD menu to select the desired input type Inputs that are available for patching are illuminated dim Inputs of the selected type already assigned to the Feeds select ed are brightly lit Inputs assigned to other feeds or returns flash between offand dim illumination Inputs that are not installed are not illuminated and cannot be selected Select the input by using the Track Feed keys on the selection panel
360. tation Project may have a password which restricts access to the material When there is no password one can be applied by anyone who opens the file There are three levels of access available to a file with a password one of which must be chosen when the password is created These are Public Play Only Private Any user can open the file and change any part of it A pass word is not requested upon opening the file Any user can open the file and play the audio but cannot change anything A password is requested when first opening the file and if none is supplied read only permission is grant ed Extending the file will then create a new unpassworded file ex tension which can be edited as required without changing the original file If the correct password is supplied when opening the file then full write delete rename and move permission is granted No user can open the file at all without supplying the correct password Password protection does not prevent file deletion from the Project menu Once you have opened a file using its password all other Projects with the same password can be opened without the machine requesting you supply the password again This may apply to several passwords that have been used in a single session on the machine INTRODUCTION 26 3 Extend Refresh PROJECT MANAGEMENT Restarting the system software re enables the password protection Alternatively to re enable passw
361. te that no other applications should be running while working on a Project Dream Start Associated Application Paths c projects mixer DREAM bat A batch file for launching FMC c projects Wmnixerslutils Dream Start exe The application itself c projects mixers utils DOWN EXE An application launched by Dream Start to shutdown the PC c projects mixers utils usbview exe An application to graphically show the state of the USB tree c projects mixers utils user bat A batch file that can be launched by Dream Start for user definable requirements 39 8 c projects mixers fmc system ConsCon exe An application to configure sur face hardware e c Program Files Internet Explorer IEXPLORE EXE Windows Internet explorer Used by Dream Start to go to www fairlightesp com au e c Program Files Adobe Acrobat 4 0 Reader AcroRd32 exe Acrobat Reader executable Acrobat must be properly installed first i e don t just copy the EXE onto a Station Dream Start launches AcroRd32 exe with an argument being the path to the DreamHelp pdf c Documents and Settings All Usersl Documents Dream DreamHelp pdf The PDF file for online help This is product specific for Station and Console The correct file must be installed for the correct product DREAM BAT The FMC mixer application is launched by the DREAM bat batch file This file is in turn launched from the DREAM Start application on the Windows desktop or in the Windo
362. ted Limiter Parameters Press the TYPE Lim Exp Gate soft key on the right hand side of the Parameter Pad to select the Limiter controls Limiter Threshold The top right rotary control adjusts the limiter threshold This sets the maximum output level of the limiter section Control range is from 50 to OdB Limiter Bypass The Lim IN OUT softkey bypasses the limiter section Expander Parameters Expander Threshold Press the Thrsh Rat io soft key to select the expander threshold for the top right rotary control The expander threshold sets the signal level below which gain reduc tion occurs The control range is from 50 to 0 dB Expander Ratio Press the Thrsh Rat io soft key to select the expander ratio for the top right rotary control This sets the gain reduction ratio input to output applied to signals which fall below the threshold level T he control range is 1 0 1 to 10 1 Expander Range The second rotary control on the left hand side controls the expander range This sets the maximum amount of gain reduction that will be applied when the signal falls below the expander threshold When the signal falls below the level determined by the expander threshold minus the expander range no gain reduction is applied The control range is from 0 to 60 2dB Gate Parameters Gate Threshold Press the Thrsh Hyst soft key to select gate threshold for the top right rotary con trol The gate threshold sets the signal level below whic
363. ted on the Binnacle the following LCD soft key options are available Split Splits the clip at the current cursor position into two clips Clip Reverse Reverses the clip Ghost On or Off displays or hides the last clipboard item 10 8 Cut and Copy Edit Options The Binnacle edit options for Cut and Copy are RANGE ON ALL LAYERS RAZOR ON Cut Copy with Range On The CUT and COPY commands offer additional functions when a Range is selected In CUT mode the selected range is removed from a track and held on the clipboard In COPY mode the range is left unchanged but a copy of the range is passed to the clipboard The resulting content of the clipboard is the same for both CUT and COPY modes For details on selecting ranges see Selecting a Range on page 4 10 To perform a CUT or COPY with RANGE ON follow these steps Step 1 Press either the Cut or Copy key Step 2 Select the desired track s If only one track is to be edited double click its tracks key to ensure no other tracks are selected Step 3 Define a Range using the From and To keys or press Range On to recall the last range set Step 4 Hold down the required edit target key Range Clip Head or Tail on the left hand side of the Binnacle Step 5 Locate the transport so the cursor lies over the destination edit point Select an alternative destination track if desired Step 6 Let go of the selected edit function to paste the Range To do a one handed e
364. tem provides simple flexible and compre hensive facilities for recording and editing mix automation data All feed and bus mix parameters can be automated and played back in perfect synchronisation with the project audio In addition to the channel parameters bus assignments inserts and direct outs may also be recorded The DREAM automation system is designed to allow the operator to record all the static and dynamic parameter changes involved in balancing the mix of tracks played back from the disk recorder and live feeds from external sources Mix moves may be recorded on one or more parameters or channels at a time More moves may be add ed with each pass resulting in complex and detailed mixes that can be played back identically every time the project and mix are loaded This chapter does not cover basic operation of the mixer Refer to the chapters on Patching and Routing Master Fader Master Fader and The Channel Panel for a complete overview of mixer operation Automation Basics below provides an in depth discussion on the fundamentals of the automation system Example proce dures are detailed later in the chapter Edit Target Figure 1 Station Automation Keys AUTOMATION BASICS Every parameter on every signal path can independently be set to any one of five au tomation states These states are Read Write Trim Preview and Isolate The DREAM automation system provides the user with many differe
365. th of time the GPO remains ON May be set to a number of milliseconds or set to HELD where the GPO stays on until the transport stops Fire Fires a GPO immediately for testing purposes If pulse is set to held the GPO switches on and off as the key is pressed and released Type ADR REH Description GPO remains on while the ADR Menu is in Rehearse mode Examples Indicator lights for artists Timecode GPO remains ON whenever the transport is inside the ADR Menu Record Range If Command is chosen the GPO turns on only when the transport is in Record Pulse Only available if Timecode is set Sets the length of time the GPO remains ON May be set to a number of milliseconds or set to HELD where the GPO stays on until the transport stops Fire Fires a GPO immediately for testing purposes If pulse is set to held the GPO switches on and off as the key is pressed and released GPI MENU 24 7 Type ADR PLAY Description Examples Timecode Pulse Fire Type BEEPS Description Examples Spacing Pulse Fire Type PREREC ADR GPI amp LOOP Description Examples Pre Time Pulse Fire GPO remains on while the ADR Menu is in Play mode Indicator lights for artists GPO remains ON whenever the transport is inside the ADR Menu Record Range If Command is chosen the GPO turns on only when the transport is in Record Only available if T imecode is set Sets the length of time the GPO remains
366. th other audio worksta tions PROJECTS 3 8 FILES AND FOLDERS 4 1 NOTES Chapter 4 Tracks Transport INTRODUCTION The Station is supplied in 24 track and 48 track versions In addition to the track feeds the Station supports 8 live feeds which may be used for effects returns or any other real time signal source The Station can support up to 48 analog and digital inputs and outputs which may be patched to track feeds or buses as required see Patching and Routing on page 5 2 for more details on patching An additional 48 digital I Os are available by fitting the MADI multi channel audio digital inter face I O card DISPLAYING TRACKS Disk recorder tracks are displayed on the video screen Select the number of tracks to display by holding down the BLUE key and pressing one of the numeric keys la belled 1T 2T 4T 8T 16T 24T 32T and 48T Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key Step 2 Press the desired Track Display key Figure 1 Track Display Keys INTRODUCTION Track numbers correspond to the track feeds Clips show the amplitude of the waveform Figure 2 48 Track Display Figure 3 1 Track Display The Clip TRACKS amp TRANSPORT When audio is recorded or imported into the Station it is displayed as a clip The clip is a reference to the audio data stored on disk Clips can be cut copied or moved without affecting the original audio data When new clips are recorded or paste
367. the front of the Engine for 5 seconds a beep will be heard and the system will start to power on Power on the video monitors Comprehensive start up diagnostics are displayed on the Recorder Editor video monitor Power on the Station console by pressing the switch on the rear panel Assuming the system is properly configured once the console has booted up it will display the DREAM Start screen Click on the Binnacle Start key to launch the Fairlight Mixing Console application See Automatic Start up on page 39 6 for more information on start up options SYSTEM SHUTDOWN Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 STATION OVERVIEW Hold down the Shift key and press Pause Break on the PC key board to switch the keyboard focus to the Station Console com puter Type Q then Y to quit the FMC and disk recorder applications If the system is in its default configuration the DREAM Start splash screen will be displayed If not use the trackball to click on the shortcut to DREAM Start on the Windows desktop Click on the Shutdown DREAM key on the Binnacle display This will shut down the QDC engine and shut down Windows on the con sole computer Once Windows has shut down turn off the power to the Station Console by switching off the switch on the rear of the console USING THE SYSTEM Follow the instructions in the following chapters to quickly learn all the operating procedures necessary for completing audio production tasks with the D
368. the link group is hard panned to their respective bus elements As the spread is reduced the panning of each link group member is made to converge with the location of the link group master pan control With the spread control less than full the pan control enables the sound field to be moved to favour the location of the pan target As the spread control approaches POINT the panning of each member becomes closer to the pan location of the link group mas ter This has the effect of mixing the signals of each link group member so that they all emerge from the same loudspeakers as determined by the link group master pan When a link group is created with default pans spread is set to maximum diver gence is set to minimum and rotation is set to zero The spread control can be used to great effect when it is desired to collapse the sur round sound field to a point source This may occur for instance where the camera moves continuously from an interior shot to an exterior or visa versa The surround field can be established for the interior and then as the camera moves through the door or window the surround field collapses and pans and fades down to the loca tion of the window As this is occurring a pre mixed surround field for the exterior can be growing from the rear speakers and spread out to the entire speaker system as the exterior shot is established Rotate Control PARAMETER PAD Rotate controls the left right and front back pan con
369. the new status While in Project mode none of the editable fields are shown This is because the screen is displaying clips in the Project and they contain none of the Category De scription or User Fields For the same reason it is not possible to enter the Edit Sub menu while in Project mode At the end of the Found Records list you will find a list of Master Recordings that are not being accessed by any clips This can happen for example when you erase a clip but do not dispose of the Master Recording see Space Menu for details of disposing PLACING SOUNDS IN A PROJECT Before using AudioBase to import a clip park the transport at the sync pointin your Project This can be done with a 9 pin machine online Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Matching Clips List Figure 3 Placing Clips After searching the database a list of matching clips is dis played Ensure the transport is in STOP then use the jogger wheel or and keys to highlight the clip you want Press the AUDITION soft key This will play the clip using the currently selected track When auditioning the Project re mains stationary If necessary use the transport keys including Jog and Jump to locate the clip to the correct location Press the PASTE soft key to place the clip in the Project NOTES It is also possible to PASTE the highlighted clip immediately without auditioning VA This will place the sync point of the clip at the cu
370. the next bus element press the Next soft key or press another speaker mute key to select that bus element out of sequence Press the Patch 1 0 key to return to the previous mode or select another bus to patch by pressing a bus selection key Patching Insert Sends To select physical outputs for insert sends PATCHING AND ROUTING Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Enter the Insert Menu by pressing the Insert key Select the feed or bus to be inserted or press the track key of any member of a link group to select the group or retain the existing selection Select an Aux Bus by holding down the BLUE key and pressing an Aux Bus selection key Press the Patch soft key in the LCD menu Press the ANALOG DIGITAL and AES MADI soft keys to choose the desired type of output The track feed keys may now be used to select outputs for the insert sends Outputs of the selected type Analog AES MADI currently patched to the selected bus element are brightly lit Outputs of the selected type Analog AES MADI currently patched to other sources flash off to dim Outputs of the selected type Analog AES MADI currently avail able are dimly lit Outputs of the selected type Analog AES MADI that are not fitted are unlit If the selected path is a bus or a link group the outputs can be selected for one bus or link group element at a time The Speaker Mute key of the current bus or link group element is illuminated green
371. the same time However care must be taken to ensure that the devices are properly config ured Fairlight recommends that a separate SCSI interface be installed to keep wide and narrow devices separate Data corruption can occur if devices are incorrectly connected or terminated Narrow based SCSI disk drives must always be the last in the chain after any wide disks are connected If the Engine is configured to run in wide mode a quality 68 CONFIGURING DISK DRIVES 38 11 pin to 50 pin adaptor must be used when connecting from the SCSI bus to a narrow disk drive Please note the high data byte must be terminated when using an adaptor to allow for correct termination when converting to a narrow disk drive Use an active high byte terminating 68 50 pin adaptor Remember to always terminate the last drive in the chain with an active terminator If the Engine is configured to run in narrow mode an adaptor without high byte termination may be used Wide based SCSI Bus T SCSI Controller Narrow Disk Drive Wide to Narrow Adaptor Wide Disk Drive DONT Figure 6 Using Narrow Devices on a Wide Bus Narrow based SCSI Bus SCSI Controller Narrow Disk Drive Wide Disk Drive HII UL Figure 7 Narrow and Wide Devices on a Narrow Bus Checking for Newly Installed SCSI Devices ENGINE INSTALLATION Once you have mounted all external and internal SCSI devices the following pro cedure will aid you in determin
372. the waveform without changing the length of the clip The clip can be trimmed as long as the original recording extends beyond the desired head or tail locations Head Trims the head of the selected clip s to the cursor while maintaining the position of the tail of the waveform 10 14 Tail Trims the tail of the selected clip s to the cursor while main taining the position of the head of the waveform Trim Soft Key Functions When the Trim key is selected on the Binnacle the following LCD soft key options are available Trim Selects TRIM mode when the Trim Slip key is pressed Hold down the BLUE key and press the Trim soft key to set TRIM as the default mode Slip Selects SLIP mode when the Trim Slip key is pressed Hold down the BLUE key and press the Slip soft key to set SLIP as the default mode Sync Pressing the Trim Sync soft key creates a sync marker within the selected clip s at the cursor position The JUMP TO POINT or JUMP TO POINT OR FADE functions will then land on this point It can be used to quickly jump to a frequently used sync point within a clip It also determines where a clip is refer enced when using AudioBase To change the sync point select TRIM SYNC at the new lo cation There is only one sync point per clip This sync marker should not be confused with the term sync point used throughout this manual except in the section on JUMP Trim Edit Options Trim is usually applied to a single clip or se
373. three backlights are controlled together The backlight for LCD 2 the last one is used to set all three LCD backlights On Station Meters backlight on LCD 3 and LCD 7 affect LCD 0 to 3 and LCD 4 to 7 respectively Adjust backlight for LCD 3 and LCD 7 only On Sidecar LCD 5 is used to control backlight for all six LCDs Click OK to save the values for the current LCD and move on to the next LCD Click Skip to skip the current LCD and move on to the next one CONSOLE INSTALLATION x LCD Name Fader Panel E E LCD Contrast al Skip Contrast Contrast Exit LED Backlight 6e Backlight Backlight Figure 5 LCD Calibration Window Touch Sensor Calibration Touch sensors in rotary controls and faders must be calibrated to compensate for environmental changes Select Touch Sensor from the Type list AUTOMATIC START UP This section explains the process of automatically starting the system The default configuration will allow the system to start automatically when the console is con nected to the engine via the CATS cross over cable supplied If you are connecting your system to a Fairlight Medialink network see QDC Network Setup on page 38 7 for instructions for network configuration The following information is needed to reconfigure your network settings or if you have difficulties starting your system When the system starts up the following processes take place 1 The DREAM Start applicati
374. ting create blocks of free space that can be used by the Project They cannot however be used by any other Project or file because the blocks are inaccessible little islands in the middle of the Project Packing shoves all the data down towards the beginning of the file so that it occupies a continu ous block and then gives back the empty piece at the end To regain the maximum possible disk space highlight the whole Project from Mark zero to Mark 999 then DISPOSE COMMIT and PACK The first two oper ations are virtually instantaneous All Space Menu operations are permanent No UNDO When Committing nothing will happen to the Master Recording that a clip is referencing unless the selected Range contains all clips that reference it It is a very good idea to dispose often during recording sessions Each time a use less recording is made UNDO it to remove it from sight then dispose The next recording will immediately occupy the freed disk space Committing with Handles set to ALL is a way of removing the parts of the clips that are not heard but preserving the Master Recordings entirely This can be used for example when a stack of clips have been placed on top of each other to simplify the edit structure down to one layer effectively without losing any re corded audio data 24 AND 48 TRACK PROJECT COMPATIBILITY Station can support in 24 and 48 track versions 24 track projects can be opened on a 48 track syste
375. tion determines the TCP IP parameters for mixer commandis sent across a network from a Dream or Station 35 6 If the SERVER entry is present then client mode is enabled and this QDC will connect to the surface on the specified port number If there is no SERVER key then this QDC checks for the CLIENT PORT key and if it is present enters server mode and listens on that port By default the QDC runs as a server and the SERVER en try must be commented out SERVER Specify the name or address of an optional surface server This line must be commented by appending it with a character SERVER PORT Specify the port number of an optional surface server This line must be commented by appending it with a charac ter CLIENT PORT Specify the port number of the FMC surface client Must be set to 2801 DEBUG Enables development debug Must be set to 0 Once the setup file has been modified type ESC Z to save and quit Restart the machine when prompted THE MDR CONFIGURATION FILE A This file contains many settings that are used by the Multitrack Disk Recorder pro gram MDR To open it when Station is running type CFG RETURN CAUTION The MDR Configuration File contains many things that you should not change If you do some operations of the system may become unstable or not work at all DO NOT CHANGE ANYTHING that is not described fully here The following lines may be changed ArmKeyDelay on Normally the
376. to RESTORE This opens a BU file and uses it to mark the files for restoring COPY Copies all the marked files from their current locations to the destination MOVE Moves all the marked files from their current locations to the destination EJECT Ejects removable media such as exabyte tape Backups are performed as a background task This enables the Station to continue working as normal with the backup process being suspended when the open Project needs to play or record When backing up or restoring to and from tape drives files cannot be added to the end of existing tapes Backing up to a tape will always erase the previous contents of the tape INTRODUCTION 34 3 BACKING UP Destination Summary Selected Items Figure 2 Backup Display The following procedure is run from the Backup Menu Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Press the BACKUP soft key Select the destination device and folder It is possible to create a folder using the NEW FOLDER soft key Press Enter Type the Backup BU filename when prompted The default for this name is the current date and time Press Enter Use the jogger wheel and the MARK soft key to select the files for backup Press the START BACKUP soft key A window will appear prompting Do you wish to verify your backup If Y Yes is selected the backup files will be verified against the original files This will take longer but
377. to editable fields in the database The fields into which data can be placed are Name Cate gory Description and User fields 2 It can output as part of the publication process a text file containing all the editable information about the clips from the Project that was just published This file can be written to your hard disk or can be exported to another compu ter using FTP The Text File Format When AudioBase outputs a file as part of the publication the format of the first line is as follows Project Project Name Project Identification Number Between each entry there is a tab and at the end of the line there is a carriage return This line is used during subsequent republication to identify the Project to which the text file refers Each subsequent line represents one clip in the Project It is set out as follows AudioBase Number Clip Name Category Description User 1 User 4 Between each entry there is a tab and at the end of the line there is a carriage return The AudioBase Number is written with a tilde at the beginning to distinguish it from other text It is used to identify a clip in the Project 28 10 When you make your own text files you can omit the first line or just the Project identification number and still publish using this file The AudioBase number at the beginning of each line and the tab separating it from the next part is also optional you can still use the data without this identific
378. to restart FMC and the disk recorder Your modified monitor matrix settings are now active 35 14 Removing Boom from a Monitor Downmix The following setting sends the boom channel from a 5 1 bus to left and right speakers of a stereo monitor set 5 1 to Stereo SET_NODE 5 1 Stereo Left Left 0 SET_NODE 5 1 Stereo Right Right 0 SET_NODE 5 1 Stereo Centre Left 3 SET_NODE 5 1 Stereo Centre Right 3 SET NODE 5 1 Stereo S left Left 0 SET_NODE 5 1 Stereo S Right Right 0 SET NODE 5 1 Stereo Boom Left 3 SET_NODE 5 1 Stereo Boom Right 3 Remove the last two lines to eliminate the boom element from the monitors as shown below 5 1 to Stereo SET_NODE 5 1 Stereo Left Left 0 SET_NODE 5 1 Stereo Right Right 0 SET_NODE 5 1 Stereo Centre Left 3 SET_NODE 5 1 Stereo Centre Right 3 SET_NODE 5 1 Stereo S left Left 0 SET_NODE 5 1 Stereo S Right Right 0 The System_Variables File The System_Variables file contains user configured setup parameters plus automat ically generated system variables Only modify the parameters described below The file is located at C Projects Mixers FMC Data System_Variables txt To edit the file open it in Windows notepad as described above Setting the Automation Lock Window The timecode lock window specifies the number of consecutive contiguous time code frames that the automation system must read from the disk recorder before en tering automation record This prevents the system from d
379. tor KEEP The transport drops out of record at the OUT time but con PLAYING tinues playing without stopping at the Postroll point BACK Returns to the first soft key Menu NOTES VA 1 The Auto Record functions also control the armed tracks on a 9 pin machine if it is online 2 Countdown beeps and relay closures for ADR can be set up using the GPI Menu SETTING PREROLL AND POSTROLL The highest value preroll and postroll of the machines currently online will be used for RECORD and PLAY functions This includes M1 M2 DISKand LTC Generator Step 1 To enter the Preroll Menu hold down the BLUE key and press the Preroll key Then press the POSTROLL soft key if you are setting the POSTROLL Step 2 Select the soft key for the desired machine Available ma chines are M1 external machine 1 M2 external machine 2 Disk internal disk recorder Gen LTC generator output Step 3 Use the jogger wheel or numeric keypad to enter the preroll Range 1 to 99 seconds Step 4 Press Enter ADR GPI 8 LOOP GPI MENU 24 4 GPI means General Purpose Interface sometimes known as GPO General Pur pose Output It refers to eight logic interface outputs in the GPI connector at the rear of the QDC Engine which can be used to trigger events external to the Station The GPI is used for tally lights and other studio automation tasks GPOs switch at specific timecodes or upon certain events Each GPO is given a type which determi
380. trols to rotate a single feed around the centre of the room Adjust the front back pan to reduce the radius of rotation Use rotate on a link group to rotate a pre mixed surround sound field with respect to the listener s position This effect is the audible equivalent of panning a camera where all the elements in the visual field are subject to the same angular movement The rotate control range is from 180 to 180 degrees When rotation is applied the panning of each link group member is offset in the direction of the rotation Rotate can be used in conjunction with spread and link group pan to create more or less audible panning effects for the entire surround soundfield When a link group is created with default pans spread is set to maximum diver gence is set to minimum and rotation is set to zero 8 10 Hold down the Pan key below the trackball and turn the jog wheel to achieve con tinuous rotation Boom The Boom control is available when the selected signal path is feeding a bus whose surround format includes a sub bass or low frequency effects channel These include the following formats 5 1 6 1 and 7 1 The boom level is independent of the panner position The boom element of a link group is only ever assigned to the boom element of the bus to which the link group is assigned Boom ON OFF The signal sent to the boom element of a bus may be switched on or off This proc ess is similar to stem assignment see Stem
381. tus Indicators Auxiliary Sends rd B DIEM y rv dapes ee tm B FWD Fill Backtip enano pes nd Backwards Compatibility Bandpass io a omes qiiod aes Bass Management voa ys Beats Per Minute INDEX 38 6 38 13 10 10 4 6 BEEPS menudo xam vae Nace 24 7 BeepsFrequency as eoe eov Rs 35 7 BeepsTrackNumber 35 7 BeepsVol me c esu ds 35 7 Betacam ios sv ev REA 35 14 Birthday ibarra 26 7 Bit Depth susanne 9 2 BLUE Piles aa years Te Sas 35 16 BEUR Gap 552 Iria io 4 10 BLUE Jump Seitens 4 9 Blue deus E Doa 26 6 Boomi vos mt ve se es 8 10 35 14 Boom Level cose 8 10 Boom ON OFF 8 10 Boom Pre Post 8 10 Borrow ooooooooooo o o 29 2 Bounces 24 ctu ee E ESSEN AS 10 9 Broadcast WAVE oss vuelve 29 6 Browse Import 29 2 BUS MP TTE 1 6 13 6 DIS oua eua ene ee 5 15 Bus Elements 5 5 Bus Formats ss 5 14 Buses te ade ohh lada bad 11 8 C Cable Length ocu ledere 38 5 Gabline 52s crinii damise ind 38 5 alles a A Meter eS Ra 7 2 13 5 Call by Solo dui 7 3 Call Follow i v 1i eR 8 2 Call Follows Solo 13 4 Calling a Signal Path 8 2 Capture Head sets dai 10 19 Capture Tail du nr 10 19 CEG arte 35 6 Channel Library Presets 12 2 Channel Meters 14 2 Channel presets werte 12 3 Massie cease dices vite atten ute A 20 3 CRE 2 10 33 4 CHENT PORT ser 35 5 Chpr ae
382. unreliable if there is more than one clip in the Project with that name AudioBase will choose the first one it finds Commands Using Text Files Publish a Text File After pressing the Publish soft key you are invited to browse and select a file If you select a text file it is incorporated into the publication process First AudioBase will look at the text file and see if it matches a Project file on one of your hard disks If it does the publication proceeds automatically If a match cannot be made Au dioBase will ask you to select the Project which you do by browsing and then press ing lt Enter gt During publication AudioBase tries to match text entries with clips in the Project Wherever a match is made a Clip Record is made from the clip and the data from the text file is inserted into the appropriate fields If there are clips in the Project that are not matched by anything in the text file they are inserted into the database with PUBLISHING WITH TEXT FILES 28 11 AUDIOBASE no editable data except their names If there are lines in the text file that are not matched by clips in the Project they are ignored Export The difference between EXPORT and PUBLISH is that Export also outputs a text file after publication You may choose a Project or a text file as the target of the com mand and the first part will go exactly the same as Publish The text file is created during publication and can be directed to a c
383. unt 9 pin D Female RS232 cable mount 9 pin D Female RS422 cable mount 37 Pin D Type Signal Pair 9 Pin D Type Connector Connectors PIN 1 GND 1 232 PIN 5 PIN 6 CON Tx 1 232 PIN 2 PIN 24 CON Rx 2 232 PIN 3 PIN 10 GND 2 422 PIN 5 PIN 12 CON Tx POS 3 422 PIN 2 PIN 13 CON Rx POS 4 422 PIN 3 PIN 30 CON Tx NEG 3 422 PIN 1 PIN 31 CON Rx NEG 4 422 PIN 4 SHELL GND Drain 422 SHELL QDC WIRING AND CONNECTION DETAILS 40 19 Station Console Controller External Adapter Cable Description Controller adapter cable for systems upgrading from MFK controllers Connector 37 pin D Female cable mount 9 pin D Female cable mount 37 Pin D Type Signal Pair 9 Pin D Type Connector Connector PIN 1 GND 1 PIN 5 PIN 6 CON Rx 1 PIN 2 PIN 24 CON Tx 2 PIN 3 PIN 12 CON Tx POS 3 PIN 8 PIN 13 CON Rx POS 4 PIN 7 PIN 30 CON Tx NEG 3 PIN 1 PIN 31 CON Rx NEG 4 PIN 6 SHELL GND Drain SHELL DREAM Console Controller External Adapter Cable Description Controller adapter cable for systems upgrading from MFK Fame Prodigy controllers Connector 37 pin D Female cable mount 2 x 10 pin DIL header optionally 2 x 9 pin D Female cable mount Crimp pins for 10way crimp housings are Farnell P N 865 783 PP y p 8 Signal D37 Female 10 Way DIL 10 Way DIL D9 Female D9 Female crimp housing crimp housing optional opti
384. ur local standard Use the speaker mute keys to mute all speakers except the centre speaker Place the SPL meter at your normal lis tening position and use the amplifier gain controls to roughly set the sound pressure level to 83dBSPL 85dBSPL or your local standard set the meter to slow response C weighted Repeat this process for the all speakers Step 3 Hold down the BLUE and Fixed keys to enter the fixed calibration mode The variable gain setting is displayed on the LCD Step 4 Turn the jog wheel to adjust the level Step 5 Release the Fixed key Press the Fixed key again to re enable the Monitor Level control Refer to SMPTE RP 200 Proposed SMPTE Recommended Practice Relative and Absolute Sound Pressure Levels for Motion Picture Multichannel Sound Systems or your local standards manual for more details on reference monitoring levels Master Mute Press the MUTE key next to the Monitor Level control to mute the control room monitor outputs The MUTE key is illuminated red when the monitors are muted Press the MUTE key again to unmute the monitors Individual Speaker Mutes The individual Speaker Mutes below the bus selection keys can be used to mute each individual speaker The speaker mute keys are illuminated dim red for elements available in the current Main Bus format Press a speaker mute key to mute the se lected speaker The mute key will be lit bright red when muted Press the key again to unmute the speaker
385. ure starting at start root for file names that match match string usage dd USR CMDS espfind opts start root match string Options d N don t descend beyond the Nth directory level default 0 no limit FIND Function Find a file Syntax find lt opts gt lt root directory gt file Options d show directories searched a find all occurrences FREE Function Report free space on disk Syntax free lt opts gt lt device gt lt opts gt Options b lt size gt buffer size FAIRLIGHT OS COMMANDS 35 21 SYSTEM FILES FTP Function Connect to a remote internet site and transfer files Syntax ftp lt opts gt lt host gt lt opts gt Options d Turn on debug mode g Turn off wildcard expansions name globbing n Disable Auto login to host r Overwrite the existing file on get command s Do not pre extend file on received data v Verify verbose mode is enabled LIST Function List a file Syntax list lt opts gt lt path gt lt opts gt Options z get list of file names from standard input z lt path gt get list of file names from lt path gt LOGIN Function Provides system login security Syntax login lt opts gt lt name gt lt password gt Options n operate in non interactive mode super user only MAKDIR Function Create a directory Syntax makdir opts lt dir name opts Options x create directory in execution dir
386. urrent clip ture Tail NOT available when RANGE activated Capturing Fade Parameters It is possible to copy the fade parameters from a clip so they can be reapplied to other clips or adjusted and reapplied to the same or other clips Step 1 Press the Fade key Step 2 Select the clip from which you want to copy the parameters Step 3 Press the HEAD or TAIL soft keys to capture the parameters from the corresponding fade Fade Options Range On Follow these steps to perform a fade on a range Step 1 Press the Fade key Step 2 Use the From and To keys to select a Range or press RANGE ON to recall the last range set BINNACLE EDITING 10 20 Step 3 Press the required edit target key Range Clip Head or Tail on the left hand side of the Binnacle Range Fade Targets The result of a RANGE FADE is determined by the target key pressed Range Clip Applies an Auto In and Auto Out fade to all the clips wholly contained within the Range Head Creates a new Master Recording bounce over the Range and sets a fade up from its beginning to its end Also splits the clips underneath so that no unexpected crossfades occur Tail Creates a new Master Recording bounce over the Range and sets a fade down from its beginning to its end Also splits the clips underneath so that no unexpected crossfades occur Layers On ALL LAYERS ON is not supported in Fade Mode Razor On RAZOR ON is not supported in Fade Mode Fade Defaults Ev
387. ut and placed on the clipboard When Enter is pressed the clip is pasted with the cursor positioned at the cut point Tail CUT TAIL functions in the same manner as CUT HEAD except that it works from the cursor to the tail The section of the clip from the cursor to the tail is cut and placed on the clipboard When Enter is pressed the clip is pasted with the cursor positioned at the cut point CUT TAIL can be used to shorten a clip by pasting the tail over the original closer to the head If all you wish to do is remove the tail permanently don t paste the waveform Copy Edit Targets The result of a COPY edit is determined by the target key pressed In COPY mode the original clip is not altered but the contents of the clipboard are the same as for CUT Range Clip A copy of the clip is placed on the clipboard When Enter is pressed the clip is placed on the currently selected track Head The section of the clip from the head to the cursor is cut and placed on the clipboard When Enter is pressed the clip is pasted with the cursor positioned at the copy point Tail COPY TAIL functions in the same manner as COPY HEAD except that it works from the cursor to the tail The section of the clip from the cursor to the tail is placed on the clipboard When Enter is pressed the clip is pasted with the cursor posi tioned at the copy point Cut Copy Soft Key Functions BINNACLE EDITING When the Cut Copy or Erase keys are selec
388. ute To set the solo mode Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Utils key to enter the Utils menu Step 2 Press the Solo soft key to select the solo mode to be used Soloed feeds are shown with a green indicator on the mixer video display Solo Clear To clear all currently soloed paths hold down the BLUE key and press SOLO press BLUE SOLO again to restore the soloed channels SIP Defeat Hold down the BLUE key and press the MUTE key next to the Master Fader or any MUTE key on a Sidecar to prevent the selected feed from being muted when other feeds are put into SIP This feature is useful for keeping reverb returns live when channels feeding them are soloed SIP Defeat feeds are shown with a grey solo indicator on the mixer video display SIP Defeat is sometimes refered to as Solo Safe Solo Contrast When a feed is soloed in SIP mode all other feeds are reduced in level by the amount set in the Utils menu To adjust the solo contrast or solo front attenuation level Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Utils key Step 2 Press the Solo Frnt soft key and turn the jog wheel to set the gain reduction level The range is 0 to 100dB 100dB is off Call Follows Solo The current feed called to the Channel Panel and Master Fader can follow the cur rently soloed feed Call follows solo is enabled in the Call menu Step 1 Press the Call key to display the Call menu Step 2 Press the Call by Solo soft key to toggle ca
389. utoma tion Enable and bus Master and Fold keys USER INTERFACE Recorder Editor Display Features Shell Comman Prompt Project Info Track Display STATION OVERVIEW The graphical display provides status information clip and waveform display and visual feedback for editing functions Status Line 00 00 45 00 Shell Command Prompt This is the command line interface for typing system commands from the PC Key board Project Information The Project Information Display shows the name of the current project the frame rate and sample rate Track Display The track display shows the 24 hour time line on which audio clips can be placed The amount of time displayed can be adjusted by pressing the Zoom key and turn ing the Jog wheel The number of tracks visible can be selected using the blue track view keys to the right of the Binnacle Status Line The Status Line displays messages and prompts associated with current edit mode or menu selected Clip Information In normal play mode clip information is displayed including layer name location and source of the clips In arm mode this area of the display contains input track level meters 2 12 Mixer Display Features The mixer display shows real time status of fader levels signal levels and automa tion for all track feeds live feeds and buses Also shown is the path configuration for the current path displaying the status of all signal processing param
390. value type Clear The output level changes in real time Step 4 Press Enter to make the change permanent The output of each track is displayed on the level meters Press BLUE a on the PC keyboard to display the meters LEVEL SOFT KEY FUNCTIONS Set The SET soft key sets the level of all selected clips to the value that was entered For example if three clips were already set to levels of 6 0 and 4dB Using the SET function at 2dB would change the levels of all three clips to 2dB INTRODUCTION CLIP LEVEL Mode Info The TRIM soft key adds the entered value to the existing level of all selected clips For example if three clips were already set to levels of 6 0 and 4dB using the TRIM function at 2dB would change the levels of the clips to 4 2 and 6dB re spectively The MODE soft key switches the Level Menu between CLIP level and DISPLAY lev el When in DISPLAY mode the waveforms displayed in clips can be scaled for easier viewing whilst editing This does not change the level of the clip only the displayed waveform Clip Press the clip soft key to select the clip as the target for the level change Display Press the display soft key to alter the amplitude scale of the display When in DIS PLAY mode the waveforms displayed in clips are be scaled for easier viewing whilst editing This does not change the level of the clip only the displayed waveform Clip Before Level Change Clip After
391. video jog speed Add jogsh to the end of the device definition you wish to modify where is 1 or 0 THE SYSTEM PAGE This page is used for setting some system parameters To reach it press BLUE s Your mouse is used to make changes on this page then save them to disk if neces sary Whenever you wish to save the current configuration click on the SAVE icon To return to the track display type BLUE t LOAD SAVE DEFAULTS FILE DISPLAY SORTINGEES LIBRARY FILE LIST FILTER WAVEFORM LIST FILTER METER CALIBRATION LAW METER RED LEVEL dB gt PRINTER HERD DENSITY PRINTER TYPEMES PAPER WIDTH lt INCHES gt PAPER LENGTH lt INCHES Bi PRINTER COMPRESSION FACTOR FELINE CNOT USED PIXEL DENSITY x AXIS ME PIXEL DENSITY Y AXIS JOIN CLIPS CLIP ATTRACTION IN FRAMESRE PRINTER MODES PRINTER SMPTE FORMAT CROSSFADE FROM ZERO FADE DEF ON BUTTED CLIPS DISTINGUISH CROSSFADES AUTO UPDATE DL FILE WAVE MENU SAMPLE SIZE AUTOMATIC EXTENSION SUPER TRIM Print Options Figure 1 System Page Many of the fields on the S Page concern the operation of the printing software These are described fully in Setting Printer Characteristics on page 32 2 File Display Sorting Allows you to choose the order in which files are displayed on the F Page This may be done by the last Edit Date the File Creation date or alphabetically The right hand field determines the direction of the sort Libr
392. will ensure that valuable files are safely stored Projects can be unmarked by pressing the UNMARK soft key If you mark a Project that has borrowed clips you will be prompted to select the libraries if required BACKUP AND RESTORE 34 4 Backup Tapemode Options Fairlight recommends that you backup in the default Native format for your tape drive Some Exabyte tape drives support tape formats for other models these op tions may be used for compatibility across various drives Press the Tapemode soft key in the backup menu to toggle through the following options Native 8200 8500 8200 comp 8500 comp RESTORING The default native tape format for the tape drive fitted Exabyte 8200 format Exabyte 8500 format Exabyte 8200 format with data compression Exabyte 8500 format with data compression The following procedure is run from the Backup Menu Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Select the required backup BU file Press the RESTORE soft key Use the jogger wheel and the MARK soft key to select files for restore You will be prompted to confirm the destination or select new ones Press the START RESTORE soft key Projects can be unmarked by pressing the UNMARK soft key When restoring from Exabyte it is possible to mark individual files It is not necessary to restore the whole tape RESTORING 34 5 COPYING AND MOVING Copy and Move options allow multiple files to be selected and moved or copied as a
393. work configuration where the network connection is not functioning DREAM Start offers a number of other features l 1 Click on the Binnacle Start key to launch FMC and the disk recorder applica tion Click on the Binnacle Shutdown key to shutdown the QDC engine and shut down the console Windows operating system Click on the Binnacle Exit key to quit DREAM Start Click on the Binnacle Help key to view the User Manual in an Adobe Acrobat Reader window Click on the Fairlight logo to launch Internet Explorer and open the web page at www fairlightesp com au if you have an active internet connection Press Pause Break and type su Enter Pause Break to enter super user mode which allows access to these extra commands Press Pause Break and type su Enter Pause Break to toggle out of super user mode In super user mode click on the Binnacle Cut key to launch Cons con the con sole configuration utility In super user mode click on the Binnacle Fade key to launch USBView the USM monitoring utility Press Pause Break and type cu Enter Pause Break to gain access to the custom user launch utility Press Pause Break and type cu Enter Pause Break to toggle out of custom user mode 0 In custom user mode click on the eye in the centre of the Binnacle to execute C Projects Mixers Utils User bat This batch file can be modified by the user to launch extra utility applications such as a studio scheduling data base No
394. written MIX UNDO DREAM software release version 1 2 supports one level of mix undo Step 1 Hold down a BLUE key and press the Mix File key Step 2 Press the UNDO PASS soft key in the LCD menu UNDO PASS deletes all mix automation data written between entering PLAY and STOP during the last mix pass UNDO PASS can be used up until any new automa tion data is written If UNDO PASS is pressed during a mix pass the soft key flashes to indicate that all data written during that pass will be ignored THE MIX MENU Only mix menu items that are dimly lit are available in DREAM software release 1 2 Press the Mix key to display the Mix menu When the mix menu is active the feed and bus selection keys are used to enable specific paths for automation The From and To keys can be used to set the In and Out points for automation punch In and Out points which are displayed at the left of the LCD The available mix memory is displayed in percent The current mix name is displayed at the right of the LCD all Read All parameters are instantly dropped in to Read On STOP Determines what data is written after leaving automation record by pressing the STOP key or pressing the Mix ON Hold erases all events from the current position to the end of the project Return returns to the previously recorded value at the cur rent location Event holds the current value until the next event is en countered Touch ON When a Touch mode is engaged
395. ws Startup directory When the user clicks on the Start key DREAM bat is executed When executed the batch file downloads current console software from the QDC engine via FTP and launches the FMC application with a complete set of command line options During this process a log is written to c Projects Mixers startup_log txt If you have problems starting the system examine the contents of the start up log to identify which part of the process has failed It may be necessary to edit the batch file to specify the QDC engine IP address if it is different to the default values You can also modify other FMC command line op tions as necessary The DREAM start up batch file is located at CAProjectAMixerA DREAM bat Use the Notepad editor to edit the file Click on the Start menu and select Pro grams Accessories Notepad and open the DREAM bat file Edit the entries for Product QDC IP address MSAT IP address and FMC application name and as in dicated at the top of the file AUTOMATIC START UP 39 9 PRODUCT STATION ENABLE_ENGINE YES QDC IPADDRESS 192 200 150 13 MSAT IPADDRESS LOCAL FMC APP NAME FMC exe kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk DEFINE CORRECT IP ADDRESSES AND APPLICATION NAMES ABOVE kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk EXAMPLES WARNING KEYWORDS MUST BE UPPERCASE Set PRODUCT STATION Use STATION STATION24 OR DREAM only and must

DREAM Station Installation and User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents